. V ; r *

Ichnographia Ruftica :

OR, THE

Nobleman, Gentleman,and Gardener’s

RECREATION.

BEING

Directions for the general Di-
ftribution of a Country Seat, into Rural and
Extenfive Gardens, Parks, Paddocks, &c.

And a General

Syftem of Agriculture,

ILLUSTRATED

With great Variety of COPPER - PLATES,

done by the bcft Hands, from the AUTHOR'S
Drawings.

VOL. II.

By Stephen Switzer, Gardener,

Several Years Servant to Mr. Louden and Mr. Wife.

LONDON:

Printed for D. Browne without Temple-Bar ,
Barter and C. King in W ejhnivjkr - Hall ,
Mean without Temple- Bar
Fleet Jlreet, 1718.

TO THE

Right Honourable the

Lord CON IN GS BY,

One of the Lords of his Majefty’s Moft
Honourable Privy-Council, .

THIS

TREATISE

Is humbly Dedicated

By your Lordship’s
Moft obedient Servant ,

Stephen Switzer,

Vol. II.

A 2

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2017 with funding from
Getty Research Institute

https://archive.org/details/ichnographiarust02swit_0

THE

CONTENTS.

Introduction, Geometrical Infiruttions,

■ Sec.

CHAP I.

The Definition of a Point, and the Motion
thereof, a Line P- 3

CHAP IE

numerical Infractions for Gai deners, See .
containing rehat Arithmetick is necef-

fary. 2 3

CHAP HI.

Infrumental Infractions, and particular-
ly the Ufe of Surveying Inflruments 6o

CHAP IV.

Of Court-Yards, and other Divifions in

Rural Gardening. 5 3 5

CHAP

The Contents*
chap v.

Of Terrace-Walks. , jQ

CHAP VI.

Of the Parterre. jg^

CHAP VII.

Of Woods and Groves , Wilderneffes , Parks,

&c- i9s

CHAP VIII. '

Of Efpalier Trees , Hedges* Sec. and their
Management. 22^

CHAP IX.

Of Fruit-Gar dens , Planting, Pruning,Graft-
ing, Sec. of Fruit-Trees. 2^ 3

CHAP X.

Of Orchards, Vineyards , and their parti-
cular Culture. 2 59

GEO-

1

JV* *********** ****** ************ * *
«• *:• * * * * * $ * * * * * * * •:■ * * * * * * ************

Geometrical Inftruflions.

Introduction.

MON GST the feveral Bufinefles to
which the Mathematicks is turn’d, ’tis
certain that ’tis no where and in no Cafe
more ufeful, plain, and diverting, than
in this of Laying out of Gardens, Villa’s, and
large Eftates : For however extenfively the Word
Geometry is now apply’d,it was, at firft,no more than
themeafuring out,diftributing,and fixing,the Boun-
daries, or Enclofures, of the large Demefnes, and
the leffer or more immediate Decorations of the
noble Villa s and Granges of the ancienteft and
politeft Part of the World, of which the well-
known Relation of the Over-flowing of the River
Nile undeniably proves.

To this I fhall then apply what I have here to
fet down, as neceflary to be learnt by all young
Surveyors and Layers out of Ground, not mixing
©r confounding it with thofe many Rules and Pro-
blems that are contain’d in other Books of the
Mathematicks, out of which ’tis not eafy for a
Beginner, nor indeed for many Gardeners of fome
Standing, to tolled what is ufeful and neceflary to
be knewm *

ii Introduction.

I {hall begin firft with the Principles of Geometry,
and fo go.on through the whole Pra&ice thereof,
as far as it relates to our prefent Purpofe. And for
our readier Introduction to it, we are to underftand
that Geometry is eftabliftfd upon three Sorts of
Principles, viz. Definitions , Axioms , and Petitions.

Definitions are, firft, brief Explanations of the
Karnes and Forms of Lines, Superficies, that
are made Ufe of in all Parts of fuperficial Menfu-
fatrons and Schemes ^ and this is particularly ufe-
ful in Gardening , &c. to enable a Perfon to fpeak
properly and intelligibly.

Axioms are felf-evident Truths, which there
is the leaft Reafon to make ufe of, of any Thing
us’d in the Mathematicks : As for Inftance, that a
Line three Foot, is equal to one, two, three, or
four (feparately) of the fame Length, &c. and is
us’d on no other Account than to demonftrate the
Rationale of Addition, Subftraftion, either of Lines
or Numbers.

And Petitions are clear and intelligible Demands,
whereof the Execution and Pra&ice requires not
any Demonftration * thus it is eafy for the moft un-
learn’d, when he is bid to draw a ftreight Line,
or trace out a Circle, to do it, and fuch other Things
that are requir’d in this Divifion. Thefe being the
Preliminaries of Geometrical Pra&ice, let us then
begin on the definitive Part thereof.

CHAP.

Geometrical Iriflruttions, &c.

A A A * * A A * A 0 A A A A A A A A AA*

ewW «j.O oTu <3lt5«.Oo.O o«0 eM*».Oc***>e«* *J c*i«)o.O ».W e$tOUiO jj£j t*0

CHAP. I.

The Definition of a Point y and the Motion
thereof \ a Line .

§ i. A Point is generally put as the firft Principle
/jL in the Mathematicks, and that which of
it felf has no Part or Parts. • ' ;

And by this we underhand, that the Point hath
neither Length, nor Breadth, nor Depth -7 and that
alfo "tis not fenfible, but only intellectual, feeing
there is nothing which fallet'h under Senfe, which
hath not a Quantity ^ and that there is no Quan-
tity without Parts, which would altogether con-
tradict this Definition. Nevertheless, as none can
make any Operation, but by the Interpofition of
corporeal Things, they reprefent therefore the Ma-
thematical Point by the Point Phyfical, which is
the ObjeCt of the Sight, the lmalleft andleaft divi-
fible to our Sente, and is made with the Point, of a
Needle, or with the End or Point of a Compafs or
/ Pencil, as the Point noted by A.

The Point central, or Center, is a PCiht by
which a Circle is drawn ^ or rather it is the midffc
of a Figure, as C.

The Point feeant, is a Point where the Lines
do divide themfelves, and which is ordinarily call’d
a Section, as B B.

B A B

/

VOL. II.

B

2 Geometrical Infir uSiions

The Definition of a Line.

§ 2\ The Line is Length without Breadth,
made by the Motion of a Point, and is of feveral
Kinds, as it receives Difference of Motion.

The right or ftrait Line, is that which is equal-
ly compriz’d within its Extremities, as A B, Def.
i.

The circular Line, is as plainly made from the
round Motion of a Pair of Compares, as C D,
Def. 2.

The crooked Line, is that which turneth or wan-
dereth from its Extremities by one or more Turn-
ings aflde, as E F, Def. 3.

The compofite or mix'd Line, is that Part of
it which is crooked, and Part ftrait, as is the Line
G H, Def 4.

The Line is alfo difiingniJI) d into finite and infinite , in-
to apparent , and occult or hidden.

The Line finite, is a Line bounded at each End
of a certain Length •, fuppofe 100 Yards certain,
or any other certain Dimenfion, whether ftrait or
circular, as are the Lines pointed at both Ends,
and mark'd I I 1 1, Def. ■>.

The infinite, is a Line of an undetermin'd
Length, as K K, Def. 6.

The apparent, or Tra£t, is drawn very ftrong,
as either K — K, Def 5 or

The occult are only mark'd with the Point of
the Compafs or Pencil, as we commonly do our
Hedge-Lines, as L L, Def 7.

The fpiral Line, call’d otherwife the Voluta ,
from volvo) is defcrib’d L, Def. 8.

Paps a.

st

1.

JCzm. J.1*-

-R,

c{_.

X, uie 2, ^

2-

C

N

x(j v-

£ me p

\ J)

^ X

Zw * A

— X

J?late.JLtL

6-

$}

Xtine 6>.

IE

p /

X

JC~ni£ y

-£/l~

K

\

%

< 1-

■3

V:..

\

if

Pcu/&l/ol .a •

for Gardeners, &c. 3

The Line crtfo receives divers Denominations , according
to its divers Portions and Di'cperties.

A Perpendicular is a right Line, that is made or
cxprefs’d by the Fall of a Plumb, or by the Ele-
vation at right Angles of any Line upon the Mid-
dle or End of another, as is A, B, and C, Def

9*

A Line horizontal, is a Line of an equal Poife,
which inclineth it felf equally on the one Part and
the other, as D E, Def. 10. and in Gardening is
generally underftood to be the Bafis, or Bottom
of a Terras, Slope, &c. tho’ it is properly any
level Line, and may as well fignify the Top of a
Terras, or any other Plane, or dead Level.

An oblique Line, is neither horizontal, nor
plumb, . or perpendicular, but of a Byas or Slope-
and is in Gardening, Where Ramparts or Terras*
Walks are made, apply’d to the Slope of them.
This is call d the Hypotheneufe, or fubtenfe Line,
when we fpeak of artificial Triangles, which is
the Conftrudticn of the Slope of a Terras not-
withftanding in that famous Problem of Euclid,
(for the Invention of which Pythagoras is laid to
offer an Hecatomb) it is us’d for the Bafis of a
redtangled Triangle.

This Line is limply demonftrated by the Line
G H, Def- it. and the other two, and this, com*
pos’d by the three Lines ABC, as they are fe-
verally plac’d above.

Lines parallel, are thofe that are of any equal
Diftance from each other 5 which, tho’ they are
extended never fo far, are neither nearer nor far-
ther. off from each other,* as are the Lines F, Def
3 2,

B 2

4 Geometrical Inftruttions

Lines alfo receive their Names as they encompafs, pafs

through, touch , or dijfeci a fuperficzal or folid Fi-
gure.

Side-Lines are thofe which encompafs any Sort
of Figure, be it either a Square or a Polygon, as
does A B CD, in Def. 13. Fig. 1.

A diagonal Line, is that which pafleth thro’
the very Center of a Figure, and which begin-
neth and endeth at two opposite Angles, as E F,
Fig. 2. andG H, Fig. 3. Def. 14.

The Diameter has chiefly Relation to a Line
that pafles through, and touches the Center of a
Circle, or Oval, as does the Line I K in Figure
the 4th, and L M in Figure the 5th and 6th. In
an Oval there are two, call’d the tranfverfe and
conjugate Diameters.

The Chord, or fubtenfe Line, is a Line that
cuts off only a fmalier Part of a Circle from a
greater ^ or is more plainly like the String of a
Bow, which is Part of a Circle, as is the Line N
O, Figure the 7 th ^ the Bow whereof is N O P,
Figure the 7th ^ and the remaining Part of the
Circle is R, Fig. 10.

A Line tangent, is that which toucheth any Fi-
gure, (whether circular or polygonar) without di-
viding it, and without being able to divide it, al-
tho’ it was prolong’d never fo far, as are the Lines

5 T in Fig 8, 9. .

A Line fecant, is that which divideth, crofleth,
or traverfeth any Circle, Oval, or Polygonal Fi-
gure, the faid Oval or" other Figure remaining
whole $ and is plainly demonftrable by the Lines
T U in Fig. 9, ic*

SiiUanJfichtrHs tcufe-

' c

' 4

-4 *.-) . *»..4

V -

*

■

5

for Gardeners, &c.

The Definition of an Angle .

§ 3. An Angle is the indirect Meeting of two
Lines at one and the fame Point y or rather, it is
the Space encompas’d between the indirect Meeting,
or Concourfe of two Lines, joining together in one
Point, as A B C, Fig. 1, 2, 3.

When ever this Concourfe is made of two flrait
Lines, it is call’d Redilineal, as A, Fig. 1.

When it is made of two crooked Lines, it is call’d-
Curvilineal as B, Fig. 2.

But when it is made of one crooked and oneftrait
Line, it is call’d Mixtilineal, as C, Fig. 3.

The Angle Redilineal receiveth particular De-
nominations as it is more orlefsopen, (viz.) right,
acute or fharp, blunt or obtufe: So that thefe
Terms, of Redilineal, Curvilineal, and Mixtiline-
al, are in Refped of the Quality of the Lines, and
thofe of right, fharp, and obtufe, in Refped of the
Quantity of the Space enclos’d within thofe Lines.

It is a right Angle, when one of the Lines is per-
pendicular upon another, as when E. is perpendi-
cular to D, F Fig 4. and this exadly 90 Degrees of
a whole Circle, which is fuppos’d to contain 160
Degrees, as is demonftrable by Scheme. HI K L,
Fig. 7.

It is an acute Angle, when it is lefs open than a
right Angle, E D G which contains about 49
Degrees, and is mark’d alfo on the ’ Scheme, H I

K L, Fig. 7.. t

The Angle is obtufe, when it is more opeii than
a right ^ that is, when ’tis above 90 Degrees fo that
the right Angle, or 90 Degrees, . .and the'aeute An-
gle of 4? makes the obtufe Angle 13 <> Degrees, as
appears an the Scheme, H I K L Fig.' 7,

B 3

6 Geometrical Injlruttions

Of a Superficies.

§ 4. A Superficies is that which hath Length
and Breadth without Depth, and according to Geo-
ometricians is the Production of a Line, as a Line
is the Production of a Point.

And thus we muft conceive, that the Line E F,
in Fig. 2, moving on towards G, H, doth make
the Superficies E F, G H, which is an Extenfion
bounded with Lines, which hath nothing but Length
and Breadth, without Depth or Thicknefs. And
therefore it is the Superficies , Surface, and Bounda-
ries of a Figure, if one confider it in RefpeCt of its
Extremities, which are the Lines that clofeit, and
the Face that thofe Linesjnake by their Motion.

Superficies are of feveral Kinds, not only in Ref-
pect to the Inequality and the Number of Sides they
are compos d of, but alfo of the Difference of their
Surface, or Levels.

Thus A is a plain Superficies.

B. a convex Superficies.

C. a concave Superficies.

And the two latter are, in Gardening, very often
call d Amphitheatres * fo that in this Cafe, in Re-
fpcct of their Depths and Heights, C may be a
concave .Amphitheatre, and B a convex Amphi-
theatre, whilft A is a Level Latvn Parterre. &c.

In fine, . in the Conftrudtion and framing Geo-
metrical Figures, a Point is the Term or Bound of
a Line j the Line the Term, or Bound of a Superficies ,
and the Superficies is the Term or Bound of a Body.

D. Fig. 1 o. Is. the Plan of a large multangular
Concave, or hollow Amphitheatre,

Pape, 166. a. -Plat? if VX . th

w

w

*&■ '

k

/

\ V T-

Bye e/Je'd. 2 ..

Tlate if 'Vtt.e4'

*ig-7- 3%.<?. Tia-.^.

for Gardeners, &c. 7

§ 5. Superficial Figures take their particularNames
from the Number of Si :es whereof they are compos'd; the
firft whereof (I mean Triangles) arc diftinguilh d by the
Quality of their Angles, and by the Difpofition of their
Sides.

A. A re£hng]ed Triangle, has one right Angle, Fig. 1.

B. A Triangle Amblygon, jhas one obtufe Angle, Fig. 2.

C. A Triangle O£lagon,has three fharp Angles, Fig. 3.

And is alfo in Reffiefi; of the Lines , call'd,

C. A Triangle equilateral, as is the fame, Fig. 3.

E. A Triangle Ifofcele,or equicrural,has two Sides equal
only, as Fig. 4.

F. A Triangle Scaleuous, has all his Sides unequal. Fid .

Fig. *5.

Of Tetragonal or fquare Figures.

G. A right Square is compos’d of four equal Sides, and
four right Angles, Fig. 6.

H. A re£tangled long Superficies, or long Square, has
right Angles and equal Sides, Fig. 7.

j. A Parrellogram has parallel Sides, but is not always
re Wangled ; and both thefe laft Figures are call’d Parrello-
grams, Fig. 8.

K. A Rhombus, or Lozenge, is a fquare Figure which
has four Sides equal, but not the four Angles, Fig. 9.

L. A Rhomboid has its Sides parallel, without being e-
quiangular or equilateral, Fig. io.

M. A Trapeze, or Trapezium, is neither parallel, equi-
angular, nor equilateral, Fid. Fig. n.

Of the fever al Kinds of regular Polygonal Figures .

N. A Pentagon, or Figure of five Sides, Fig. 1 2.

O. An Hexagon, or Figure of fix Sides, Fig. 13.

P. An Heptagon, or Figure of feven Sides, Fig. 14.

Q. An O&agon, or Figure of eight Sides, Fig. 15.

R. Enneagon, or Figure of nine Sides, Fig. 16.

S. A Decagon, or Figure of ten <ddes, Fig. 17.

T. An Endecagon, orFigure of 11 Sides, Fig. 18.

U? A Dodecagon, orFigure of 12 Sides, Fig. ip,

B 4

8 Geometrical Injlruttions

Of crooked and Curvilineal Figures , and of Figures mxd
• and compos'd-

A Circle is a Figure perfectly round, drawn or
defcrib’d from a Letter, from which the whole Cir-
cumference is of equal Diftance. The Boundary
Line whereof is call'd the Circumference, or other-
wife, the circular Line that enclofeth it. Fig. i.
Letter '4. v

An Oval (ab Ovo, an Fgg) is a crooked Figure
drawn from many Centers * and which Diameters
divide into two Equals, Fig. 2. This is alfo call'd
an Ellipfis*. but this Word, as well as the Word O-
•val, is more properly apply 'd to Fig. 3. Letter B,
near the Shape of an Egg,

A Demi or Semi-circle or Oval, is the exa£t half
of a Circle or Oval, as is C D, Fig. 4. 5.

A Quadrant of a. Circle, is the exa£t Quarter
thefeof, asE , tig. 6.

A Segment?, or Part of a Circle, either more or
lefs than the half or quarter of one, asis F. Fig. 7.

A Sedor.or Seftion of a Circle, is contain’d with-
in two Diameters, then half a Circle, as is G. Fig.

3.

Figures coiicentrical, or thofe which have one
and the fame Center, H H, Fig. 9. 10.

Figures excentpcal are thofe which are contain’d
in others of divers Centers, I I, Fig. 11, 12.

Thefe being the inoft material Definitions, I
pafs now to the next Thing in Courfe to be known,
which are the Axioms us’d in Geometry,

r 'niton..

(

t '

V

Tig. *.

£ foot

£ foot

£ fooot

£ foot

Tig 3

IB JEgual to
C J£qual t>

C JE,qiuil soe^

4 foot

20 foot 6j/ a££i£on^

' ^ X)

£ foot Su6jtT'Zlc£u>7L :

„

1 jr S irnp/d

-2*^-1) add'd.
* IE, fo&tzilL

7 foot

fo?e $ . <4 .

I’kJbLjr JK t

Tis-z.

*

for Gardeners, &c. 9

axiom 1.

§ 6. Things equal to one and the fame , are equal amongft
themfelves.

Thus the Lines A C, A C, which are equal to A B,
are equal alfo between themfelves.

A X I O M II.

If to equal Things one [hall add Things equal, all will become
equal.

The Lines A C, A C, are equal.

The added C D, C D, are equal.

All of them A D, A I), are therefore equal.
AXIOM III.

If from Things equal one tales equal Things , the Remainder
fhall be equal .

Thus if from the equal Lines A D, A D.

One take the equal Parts A C A C.

The remaining Parts C D, C D.

fhall be alfo equal.

AXIOM IV.

If to Things unequal , one add Thiugs equal, the whole will be
unequal .

If to the unequal Lines D E, D E.

One adds the equal Lines A D, A D.

The whole A E, A E.

fhall be unequal.

Thefe Axioms may, at-firft Light, feern very flrange to a
young Learner, who may fuppofe them to be more diffi«
cult than they really are ; I fhall therefore demon ftrate
them by Lines number’d, which feemsto me the bell Way.

For the firil ’tis no more, than that the Lines A C, tho'
never fo many Times repeated, or tranfpos’d to never fo
great a Diflance, as they all appear to be equal to A . B,
fo they are alfo ever amongft themfelves: For Inflance, be-
ing of fix Foot in Length, they all of themarefo, and/equal
to the firft A B.. The like may be faid of the 2d and 3d
Axiom.

And for the 4th. nothing is more plain, that if one add
an equal Line. or Number of two Foot, to an unequal Line
or Number of five Foot, the Produce mud be feven Foot,
which is flill an unequal Number; and if, as in the 2d and
3d, you add or fubftra cl the equal Line, or Number of
four, from or to the equal Number of ten, the Produ£l
will be the equal Number of fourteen by Addition, or fix
by Spbfiya&ign,

i o Geometrical Inftruclions

AXIOM V.

Ij from Things unequal one takes Things equal, the Regain-
der fliall be m equal.

If from the unequal Lines A E A E
One take away the equ*l Line A d’ A D
The remaining Part D E* D E*

'will be unequal.

Explanation. This is the very Reverfe of the 4th Axi-
om; lince, if the equal Number, or Line of two Foot be
taken from the whole unequal Line, or Number of feVen
Foot, his certain, the unequal Number of live will remain
which is che Purport of this Axiom. *

AXIOM VI.

The Things that are doable to one another , are equal amngft

themfelves.

Thus the Lines D D, D D,

Which are double to the Line A D
are equal between themfelves.

Explanation. This is demonftrated by the Lines in Fie
7. where the Lines D D. of 40 Foot long, tho’ they are
double the Line D A, are neverthelefs equal among)!
themfelves. 0

AXIOM VII.

The Things which are the half of one and the fame, or of
7 ‘kings equal are j^eqnal among ft themfelves.

Thus the Lines A D A D

Which are the half of the Lines D D* D D ’
are equal between themfelves.

Explanation. This is again the Reverfe of the la/1 Axi-
om, fviz. the Vlth) for tho* the Lines D D ; are double
to the Lines A D, A D, yet they are neverthelefs equal
among ft themfelves.

That which is faid of Lines may be alfo Jaid of Superficies
and Solids ; however trivial, thefe Things may appear, ’tis on
thefe our Ma hrmatical Dif put ants ground their Arguments ;
and tho they arc not very much usd in our Way, they could,
not^ poJJihj be pajs d over without manifest Injury to this Sub -

'Mate 3? X ?*-

I *

Rl<7£ >lj6L<l. ' _£//ifr -f YT **-

)

>

SultOTLjfu^wUr jculp.

for Gardeners, &c. h

§ 7. Pofitions , or Demands, hi order to the pitting
of Geometry into P? attic e.

Demand I.

Draw a ftrait Line from A to B.

The Practice.

Apply the Ruler to the Points A B *, and drawing
the Pencil along by the Side of the Ruler, it will
make the Line A B,

Demand II.

Enlarge infinitely the Line C D by E, &c.

The Practice.

Join the Rule to the Line C D, continue the Paid
Line C D, ad infinitum , towards, by, or beyond E,
and it anfwers this fecond Demand.

Demand III.

Draw a Circle from a Point — A,

And the Interval A B.

The Practice.

Set one Point of the Compafs at the Point given,

Open the other unto the Point —

Turn the Compafs upon the Point

And drawing it from the Point

Defcribe the Circle B D

Demand IT.

From the Points given E and F,

Make the Seftion G.

The Practice.

Open the Compalfes as you fhall have Occafion,
that the Opening may be more than the half Di-
ftance between E and F ^ and by this Opening from

the Point E, draw the Arch — 1 m.

And from the Point F, the Arch — h i.

The Section at G

?s the Demanded,

M

iz

Geometrical InflruBtons
PROPOSITION I.

§ 8. To elevate a Perpendicular at ajty Point of a Lire

particularly the Middle and the Pnd. J ^ ’

The Practice on Paper on the Middle, Fig. t
From the Point given Qtcuch the Line in D and E.
Fr°m_ the Point D E, make the Section I.

By which Means, C I fliall be the two Points
whereby the Line is to be drawn perpendicular
1 he fame -on the End of the Line, Fig. if. \
From the Point A, draw the Arch G, H ~ M.
From the Point G, draw the Arch A h/

From the Point H, draw the Arch M N.

From the Point M, draw the Arch H N
Then draw the requir’d Perpendicular AC.

rhere is not Occalion on Paper to make all thefe
Aiches ; .or which Reafon I have put down Fig. ?.

to lhmv you how to avoid it, as the other is to
explain it

r ipS- is ajipther Way which almofl explains it
lei/, and tne filth are the Lines limply conlider’d.

The Practice on the Ground.

■ A. Garden Line very plainly effects the fame on
the Ground as the CompaiTes do on Paper; but
cm belt > method is our Garden-Square, which apply ’d
to m • Line/ Lets off a Perpendicular, as is evi-
dent by, the Plaice, Fig. 6, 7. 8:

. ^'1t in, f9‘ a Square is Wanting, a Meafure of
eigm- ancl fix Foot with a ten Foot from one End
to the other, makes a good Square, as may be feen
9. aMit. is;bv;this that all right-angled
Figuies are fet* out in Gardens, and all other
Works,

It is particularly by this, that all middle Tines,

??c prJ^ Avenues and Walks, are fet out from a
Houfe, &c\

V%e to. Vol 2.

J’/atz J0DI

Jhy cl Crarcten. Tine, Practice ~\?.t
on. the Crrouru) .

Sfirvio . 2

1

TlS' 7- . f

£Pi~op. 2 .

• r r~^~-

D

. Uj

TheTK. Practice, in/ a Square,.

11^

Jx§. 8.

:b iL

^fcrojo. 1 .

tL

The 1V1 Practice, Sy a, Tine .

Ttyotv iPapev

»

/

-P/a£z,~2$Si

J&u/c. 73 . Viet. 2, ,

for Gardeners, &c. 15

In this Page I Jhall comprize three Frbpofitians,

together with their Practice on the Ground.
PROPOSITION II.

To let fall a Perpendicular on the Poiiit of an Angle.

Upon Paper, Fig. 1.

From the Angle A, defcribe at Pieafure the Arch
B C $ and from the Point B and C, make the Secti-
on D ^ and the Line E F is the Line requir’d.

PraBice on the Ground, Fig. 4.

Move the Garden Square on the Bafe of Trian-
gle E F, ’til the Point ot the Square G, come over-
right the Point A, then ftrain the Line to D.

PROPOSITION .JII.

To bring down a Perpendicular vtibn, a Pine given, or a

Point without or near that Line.

Upon Paper, Fig. 2.

This is fomething like the former *,. for from the
Point C you are to draw D fi; cutting the Line
A B at D and E *, from the Points I) and E, make
the Section F-r draw the Line C F, and the. Line
C O will be the Line demanded.

Practice op the Ground, Fig. 5.

In this Cafe either the Line or Square will do*,
the Method has been hinted at already, 'and the
Scheme tells the reft.

PROPOSITION VT.

By a Point given, to draw a Line parallel to a right
Line given.

Upon Paper, Fig. 3.

Let H F be the Lines given, add G the parallel
Diftance •, fix the Compafs in El and F, and defcribe
the Arches G and I ^ by applying the Ruler to G
and I, you may draw the Line requir’d.

PfnBice on the Ground, Fig- 6.

By applying the Square to the Points H and F,
this Parallel iseafily fet off in G and I. Vide the
Scheme, Fig. 6.

'14 Geometrical JnflruSlions

I fialllilewife in this Page , bring in Proportions relating
to the dividing of a Line , and an Angle into Wo Pa i fs,
awd of the Manner of transferring of an Angle from the
Paver to the Ground , &c.

PROPOSITION V.

To cut a right Line given into two equally.

Upon Paper Fig. I. 2.

From the Point A draw the Arch C D, and with-
out opening or (hutting the Compares, from the
Point or Fnd B, draw the Arch E F ^ and a Line
or Ruler apply ’d to G and FI, will divide the Line
A B equally in two at O.

Practice on the Ground, Fig. 6.

The doubling the Garden Line, to find the
half Length cf any Line is fo common, that I need
not repeat it, tho' this Method is more artificial,
and is preparatory to the next.

PROPOSITION YI.

To cut an Angle into Wo equal Portions ,vpon Paper, Fig. 3.

From the Angle A draw at Pleafure the Arch
D E, and from the Points D E make the Settion
O * then draw the Line A O, which is what is re-
quir'd (viz-) dividing the Angle into two equal Parts.

Practice on the Ground , Fig. 7.

Being perform'd by a Line, as it is upon Paper
by the Compaffes, I need not repeat it.

PROPOSITION VII.

To make an Angle equal to an Angle given , or tranf-
fer an Angle fro?n one Paper to another , or from
Paper to the Ground .

From the Angle D draw at Pleafure the Arch
C G, and without altering the Compaffes, from
the Point D draw the Arch H O, and make the
Arch H E equal to the Arch C G •, draw the
Line D E, and both Angles will be alike.

Practice on the Ground. Fig. 8.

Is the fame as upon Paper. Note, this is very
ufeful in fetting of Diagonal Lines in Gardening,
as may be feen. Fig. 8.

-Platz^X. HI

*/

\

I

m

f

V

\

I

/

K:

-v^r '

J%/feXV

Bye* !Z.

IP?' active. tAelH^on tA& Gi'owzct

JD ^ X ITjpondPa^r

Tig. 5

JPracticz. tAeUL iigon. th* Ground

So Jinrt>

ZsJoot

H/io. HT IP racticz on. the. Ground

C r iD

Tig. l.

3) — .. ...-X

Tig.^.

A

H o T

I D

Tig.

\

/H,

<s\

TV

for Gardeners, &c.' 15

§ 9. Having put down what feems to be moft neccfia-
ry relating to Lines, I come now to Ihetv how thefe Lines
produce fuperficial Figures.

PROPOSITI ON I.

a4nd first lew to frame a Triangle equilateral, upon a (trait

Line given. .

From the End A, and the Interval A B, deferibe the
Arch B D * and from the End B, and the Interval B A
deferibe the Arch A E; and from the Section C draw the
Lines C A, C B; and ABC ihall be the equilateral
1 riangle demanded. Fig. 1 .

PROPOSITION II.

But becaufe there are feveral Sorts of Triangles, I dull
in this Propohrion fhew, how to male a Triangle from any
three given Lines , fupp'rftng ABC. Fig. 2.

Draw the ftrait Line D E, equal to the" Line A A, from
die Point D, and from the Interval B B ; deferibe the
Arch G F; from die Point E, and from the Interval C C%
deferibe the Arch H I $ from the Se£Kon 0,draw the Lines
OE5OD; the Triangle DEO, iliall be compriz’d of
three right Lines, equal to the three given Lines ABC.
Fig. 3.

PROPOSITION FIT.

Hm to frftme a- Square upon one right Line given and hounded.

Elevate the Perpendicular A C from the Point A de-
feribe the Arch B C • from the Points B C, and from the
Interval A B make the Se&ion D ; from the Point D
draw the Lines D C, D E ; and A BCD Ihall be the
Square demanded.

PraElice on the Ground*

. This is fo eafy, and fo like the Practice on Paper, it
need not be repeated ; however, I have put down the Fi-
gures, and lhetvn the Method of making a Square upon
the Ground, and Ihall add,

PROPOSITION IV.

The Way to prove a Square.

Which is indeed only by meafuring Diagonal or Croft-
Ways: and if the Meafure (fuppofing 50 Foot) is exactly
alike, you may conclude your Square is trip, Vi\. Fi*
4, and 7. Otherwife it is falfe.

1 6 Geometrical Tnflruclions

Before we proceed to fhew the laying out Polygonal Fi"
gures or Figures of five, fix, feven, or eight Sides, &c-
it will be neceflary we fhould lay down the Methods of
fhiking out circular or crooked Figures, which are, gener-
ally fpeaking, the Balls of all Polygonal Superficies.

PROPOSITION V.

To find the Center of a Circle . the Center of which is loft, or
any other Way requir'd.

Place at Difcretion the three Points ABC upon the
Out-line of the Circumference, and from the Points A B;
make the Se&ions E and F ; draw the right Lin s E F,
from the Points B C ; make the Sections G H ; then draw
the right Line G H, from the Interaction and Center I,
and from the Interval I A, and from this Center in the
Middle of F I G, you may flrike yoiir Circle, rid. Fig.
i . and

Praftice on the Ground. Fig. G.

This is the fame. as on the Paper, as does plainly appear
from Fig. 5.

PROPOSITION VI.

To Strike a Circle on Paper.

Keep the Foot of your Compaffes in A, and trace the o-
ther Point round, it will make the Circle B C D E, Fig.

3*

Praftice on the Ground. Fig. 6.

The fame is perform’d by a Line, as was before taught
of the Compaffes. Kid. Fig. 6:

PROPOSITION VII.

A Spiral Line , tho it is not properly a Superficies, , yet , as it

males by its Koluta femething like it> / teach the Method

of making it in this Place .

Suppofe you would- divide the Line L into eight: Parts,
divide it frit into two Parts B I; after that into four Parts
of each Side BC,EG,I ,* divide alfo B C into two, e-
qually in A, and from the Point A, draw the Semi-circles
B C, D E, FG, HI; and from the Point B, draw C
D,EF,GHjI L, and that fliall be the Spiral Line re-
quir’d. Kid. 4. and 7.

On the Ground. Fig. 7.

The Practice is the fame.

J&ae /t5~, !/&/.. g.

jP/rtzKXl

1

»

♦

;w*

T/atcmL

flawed /?• l/oi ■ 0-.

J7

for Gardeners, &c.

PROPOSITION VIII.

To defcribe an Oval upon a Length given .

§ 7 . Divide the Length A B into three equal
Parts, as in Figure 1 ^ or into four, as in Figure 2,
I B C D, and from the Points C D, and from the
Interval C A, defcribe the Circles A E F, B C F,
from the Sections E and F * and from the Interval
of the Diameter E H, defcribe the Arches I H, O
P, and A I H B P O lhall be the Oval requir’d, in
Fig. 1. Andin Fig. 2,draw only the Diagonal Lines.

The Pratfice on the Ground
Is fo near the fame, that the Scheme makes it ve-
ry plain. Vide Fig. 3.

PROPOSITION IX.

To defcribe an Oval that has two Diameters given $ and
this is generally calTd the Gard’ner 5 Oval .

Let the Diameters be A B C D, Lines fix d at
Pleafure^ draw the Line A B, and in the Middle
of that Line, at Right Angles, draw the Line C,
by Interfe&ions, from the Points A and B. Divide
the Line C E into three Parts, one Part whereof
fet off from A, and the fame from B *, fix there two
Pins, and by a Thread you may track out the Oval
A B C D. Fig. 3.

Praftice on the Ground. Fig. 4, $•

This is eafier done on the Ground, by a Line and
Stakes, than on the Paper, by Reafon there is more
Room ^ fo that your Work is done more eafy and
more certain $ and this indeed is the beft Method of
laying out any Kind of Oval ^ for, tho’ the firil is
eafier made out on Paper than this laft, yet this laft
is eafier laid out on the Ground than the firft.

Suppofing, then, that the longeft Diameter of
your Oval be 90 Foot, and the fhorteft 60, the
half whereof, C E, is fhorter a Foot, a third whereof
is. 10 Foot, fet off 10 Foot at each End A B, and put
down there two Stakes, fhall ftrike out the whole
Oval. Vide Fig. $,

VOL. II.

C

1 8 Geometrical InftruElions

Wepafsnow to the Conftru&ion cf Polygonar
Figures.

PROPOSITION X.

To frame a Pentagon upon a given Line .

Suppofe the Line B A *, from the End A, and from
the Interval A B defcribe the Arch B D F. Then
elevate the Perpendicular A C ^ divide the Arch B G
into five Parts equally, I D L M N. Then draw the
right Line A D, cut the Bafe A B into two equally
in O ^ elevate the Perpendicular O E from the Secti-
on E, and from the Interval E A defcribe the Circle
ABFGHj bring five times the Line A B within
the Circumference of the Circle, and you fhall have
a Pentagon regular, equi-angle, equi-lateral, AB
F G H, Fig. i and 2.

The Pratfice upon the Ground. Fig. ?.

Is the fame, and is particularly ufeful in Centers
and Cabinets of a Garden or Wildernefs ^ for when
a Walk runs thro3 or into one of them, you mull
firft fet off' on each Side that Walk half the Width,
as you may fee on the Ground ^ and this will be
the given Line, as in the Queftion * from which
you may with Eafe and Certainty make a propor-
tionable Center or Cabinet. Vide Fig. 3.
PROPOSITION XI.

Within a Circle to make a Pentagon.

The Circle being given, there will not be fb
much Trouble as there was in the other. Draw
then the two Diameters A B, CD, dividing them-
felves at Right Angles in E •, divide the half Dia-
meter C E into two equally in F, and from the In-
terval F A^ defcribe the Arch A G from the Point
A ^ and from the Interval A G defcribe the Arch
G H. The Line A H fhall divide the Circle into
five equal Parts. Vide Fig. 3.

The PraBice on the Ground

Is the fame, the Line performing the Part of the
Compafs. Vide Fig. 6.

Pa^isrUoLx i’teBl

^Practice the le^-tipoiv the

(j-rouncL , ITpoiiSTaper

J

I

for Gardeners, &c. 19

PROPOSITION XII.

To frame an Hexagon regular upon a right Line given.

Let A B be the right Line given, from the finds
A and B, and from the Interval A B defcribe the
Arches AC, B and from the Section C defcribe
the Circle ABE F G: Bring fix times the Line
A B within the Circumference, and you fhall have
an Hexagon regular, A B E F G D, fram’d upon
a right Line given, A B. Fig. i, 2.

N. B. It is to be here obferv’d, that the Semidi-
ameter of an Hexagon, is always one Side of it.
And this is the eafieft to make of all Polygonar Fi-
gures.

This is alfo the Foundation from which all Poly-
gonar Figures are fram’d, as will appear in Fig. 3,
The Practice on the Ground,

Is every Way anfwerable to that on the Paper,

PROPOSITION XIII.

The Hexagon being the Foundation, on which all
Polygonar Figures are built, here follows a Me
thod, Upon any right Line given, to defcribe fitch a
Polygon as fiall be requir'd , from an Hexagon to a
Dodecagon , or Figure of 1 2 Sides .

Cut the Line A B into two equally in 0} elevate
the Perpendicular O I from the Point B ^ defcribe
the Arch A C $ divide A C into fix Parts equally,
M N O P Q. R •, this may make an Heptagon if
you will* Then from the Point C, and the Inter-
val of one Part, C M, defcribe the Arch, D M D,
fhall be the Center, to defcribe a Circle capable of
containing feven times the Line AB-, and fo on,
of any of tne reft, as will more plainly appear by
a little Praftice. Fig. 3.

C 2

20 Geometrical Inflrutlions

The general Method of making and linking out
Pc lygonar Figures being thus fix’d, I (hall illuftrate
and explain it farther by a few Examples, and then
leave the Learner to his farther Practice therein.

PROPOSITION XIV.

Upon a Live given , to make a regular Heptagon , or
Figure of feven Sides.

We mud firft luppofe the Line A B defign’d to
make an Hexagon of ^ becaufe, as is before inti-
mated, the Hexagon is the Figure, from which all
Polygonar Figures are made.

After having drawn a Line perpendicular to AB,
from the Middle thereof Q_, fetthe Compaffes in A
or B, and draw the Arch, A C, which divide
into fix equal Parts, and fixing the Compaffes in C,
extend them to Part 5 *, from whence you may de-
fcribe a little Arch * or rather transfer that Mea-
fure on the middle Line to Letter O, and that is
the Center of the Heptagon. Having then de-
fcribkl a Circle, upon that draw the Lines B A F
G FI I K, which will make feven Sides, equal to
the fmgle one A B requir’d. Fig. 1, 2.

On the Ground

The Practice is the fame, and fo needs no Repeti-
tion. Vide Fig. •>.

PROPOSITION XV.

Within a Circle given to infcribe an Heptagon.

Draw half the Diameter I A from the End A,
and from the Interval A I defcribe the Arch C I C •,
draw the right Line CC, bear the Half, C O, fe-
ven times within the Circumference of the Circle,
and you lhall have the Heptagon requir’d , A m
d, B g f e. Vide Fig. 3.

The Pra&ice on the Ground

Is fo near the fame, that for farther Inftruftion
I need only refer the Reader to the Scheme, Fig. 6.

T/atzTL

I

I

' r

y

\

Flatc XXI

th9e

QJ. ITo/.V..

ZPiizcticd y the (jr7~oimcL

^Practice tfie IL tort the GroiuuL

for Gardeners, & c. 21

PROPOSITION XVI.

Within a given Circle to infer ibe an 0 [logon.

Firft draw the two Diameters at right Angles,
one to another, viz. the Line C D, at right Angles,
with A B, this divides the Circle into a Square •,
then fix the Points of the Compares in either of the
Points, (fuppofe D) and mark out Part of an Arch $
and then move the Compafs-Point to the next Let-
ter, (fuppofe B) and make an Interfcdion at E ^
apply the Ruler to that In ter fed ion, and lay it like-
wife on the Center F, and the Place where it cuts
on the Circle, (hall divide D and B, or any other
of the Letters, into two equally*, and that is the
Side of an Odogon requir’d. Fig. 1, 2.

The Praflice on the Ground

Is the fame, as appears by Figure 4.

PROPOSITION XVII.

To make an OBogon from a Line given.

Suppofe the Line A‘B, (life the fame Method as
before, in making of an Hexagon) divide the
Arch A O into fix equal Parts, and from O fet off
two of thofe Parts to P * that iLiall be the Center
of a Circle, on which you are to fet the requir’d
Line A B, which will make eight {trait or right
Lines, Hz. an Odogon requir'd. Vide Fig. 2.

On the Ground , Fig. 5,

The fame Way does*, and is particularly ufeful,
when a Garden- Walk erodes or ends in a Center, or
Cabinet.

In that Cafe, (as has been before mention’d) fet
off half the Width on the other, as a b c d. Fig.
$. and that {hall be a given Line*, and hence you
may eafily make a Center proportionable to the
Walk that paffes thro’, or ends therein.

r2 2 Geometrical InflruSlions

PROPOSITION XYIII.

Within a Circle given , to defcribe an Enneagon^ or
Figure of vine Sides .

Let B CD be the Circle propounded, within
which one would infcribe an Ennea gon.

The PraSice upon Paper.

Draw the half Diameter A B from the End B,
and from the Interval B A defcribe the Arch C A
D *, draw the right Line C D onwards to F ^ make
the Line E F equal to A B. From the Point E de-
fcribe F G, and from the Point F defcribe E G ;
draw the right Line A G, and D H fhall be the
ninth Part of that Circle. Fig. i, 2.

The PraBice on the Ground

Being done by a Line, as the Pradice on the
Paper is by Compaffes, there is little Occafion to
repeat it, but to refer to Figure 4.

PROPOSITION XIX.

A Line being given , to find the Center of a Circle , and
to make an Enneagon , or Figure of nine Sides .

Draw the Line A B, and a Line perpendicular
from the Middle thereof, as has been before taught *
draw the Arch A O, and divide it into fix equal
Parts •, or, which is lefs Trouble, take the half of
it, and fet up to P, which is the Center of this
Circle, upon which you are to make this Ennea-
gon, or Figure of nine Sides, every Side being
equal to A B. Fig. 3. t.

The PraSice on the Ground

Continues ftill the lame* and from this Rule of
anHexagone, is any Polygonar Figure to 20, 30,
or 40 Sides, made upon a given Line *, from what
has been faid like wife of given Circles, may th£
Side of any Polygon be found ^ and with this 1
fhall conclude this Point,

ZP/rtz^M.

2 '2 . l/bZjZ .

JPracticzyY zg oil the, GrvuncL 'VpaTCTapi-

Z&rci rZ/. IS.

%-f

r%.i.

Cr

TheZZL^jEractice, otl the, & rmcncL -

Tig% ^

/

■

1

23

for Gardeners, Sec.

CHAP. II.

Numerical Injtru&ions for Gardeners, See.
INTRODUCTION.

IT will not here be expedted I fhould go bach to
Numeration, Addition, ©V. that being in nocafe
neceffary, fince there are but few that are fo mean
Proficients in Numbers as to require it : I fhall there-
fore comprehend that little I have to fay concern-
ing Numbers in our Way of Gardening, with the
Golden Ride , or Ride of Three , Rules of Pratfice, and
with Duodecimals , or the Manner of Meafuring and
calling up Dimenfions, &c. ufeful, as will hereafter
be found, in digging, levelling, and accounting the
Expenc.es that accrue in Gardening-, becaufe in this
both Stewards and Labourers areohtimes at a Lofs,
and either the Mafier or Servant is very much the
Lofer, which is unjuft to one, and both unjuft and
oppreffive to the other.

Suppofing then that a Gardener is beginning to make his
Gardens, (tho’ I mud confefs myfelf very much an Enemy
to the levelling and draining of Nature beyond her due
Bounds, that is too often feen in many Undertakings)
there are feveral Divifions, that are abfolutely necefiary
to be levelfd ; fuch are all open Compartments of Par-
terre, Bowling-greens, Terrace- Walks, and the like, after
the Levels are fix’d, as may be feen Fig. 7, p. 9, it Will be
then a proper Time for him to fit down and confuit of
his Expence. And how to go the neared Way to work,
preparatory to this, being very well indru&ed in Addition,
oubftraclion, Numeration, Multiplication, and Divifion,
he ought to learn how to take and cad up Dimenfions,
whether it be for the Removal of good Earth for planting,
or of bad Earth for levelling, railing of Terrace-Walks,
Mounts, or the like: And the fird Thing is Duodecimals,
or Crofs-Multiplication ; as follows.

C 4 Before

24 Numerical Inflruttions

Before we go to great Examples, it will be necef
fary to fay fomething of the Rules of Practice and
Crofs-Multiplication, by which almoft all Quefti-
ons in this Matter are folv’d •, and thefe two Rules
are fo interwoven with one another, that they are
taught at one and the fame Time.

The Learner is firft to be inform’d, that by Duo-
decimals, or Crofs-Multiplication, is meant the
multiplying Feet, Inches, and Parts, by Feet, In-
ches, and Parts, without Reduction, which faves a
great deal of Labour and Trouble, and is done in
Fewer Figures.

He is alfo to underftand, that the Rules of Pra-
ctice fhorten even that too, as will by and by very
plainly appear. He ought then, firft of all, to
learn the Aliquot, or even Parts of a Foot, which
is alfo applicable to a Shilling, 12 being a Shil-
ling, as 1 2 Inches is a Foot. He is alfo to learn
the Aliquot, or even Parts of a Pound. And thefe
three will diredt the neareft Way of calling up any
Dimenfionspr Accounts in gardening.

Rules of PraBice.

d. Inch .

1 or 1 is the 1 2tfi Part of a Shilling or Foot.

2 or 2 is the 6 th Part of a Shilling or Foot.

3 or 3 is the 4th Part of a Shilling or Foot.

4 or 4 is the 3d Part of a Shilling or Foot

6 or 6 is the half of a Shilling or Foot.

8 or 8 is the 4 of a Shilling or Foot.

9 or 9 is the-y of a Shilling or Foot.

But as 5 d. 7 d. 10 d. 11 d. are not yet number'd,
being odd, you muft account them thus :
w d. Inch . ‘

5 or 5 is the and of a Shilling or Foot.

7 or 7 is the f and 4r of a Shilling or Foot

. , ih , ^ * 4 • « * •* «* w ! • ' id

for Gardeners, &c.

d. Inch.

10 or io is the 4 and 4 of a Shilling or Foot.

1 1 is always accounted by calling the fingle br-
uits away as you multiply : For Inftance, if you
multiply 1 1 Inches by 26 Foot, it is 26 Foot want-
ing 26 Inches j which is eafily difcoverd to be
23 Foot 10 Inches.

8 and 9 Inches or Pence, are likewife wrought
by a double Number.

8 Inches by -f of a Foot twice repeated.

9 Inches by 4 and 4 of a Foot added together.
But this whole Matter will be made very plain
by the following Examples.

The Aliquot, or even Parts of a Pound*

1 5. is the 20th Part of a Pound.

2 s. is the 10th Part of a Pound.

2s. 6d . is the 8th Part of a Pound,

3 s. 4 d. is the 6th Part of a Pound.

45. is the Jth Part of a Pound.

5 s . is the 4th Part of a Pound.

is. 8 d. is the 3d Part of a Pound.

7 s. 6 d. is the 4 Part of a Pound.

10 s. is the 4 Part of a Pound.

135. 4 d. is the 4 Part of a Ppund.

15 s. is the 4 Part of a Pound.

When, therefore, you are to multiply any of thefb
aliquot Parts of a Pound with any Sum, you need
not reduce, as the Method is too common, but
divide by that Fraction.

For Inftance, fuppofipg that one Rod of Digging
co ft 9 what will 75 Rod coft ? Now, 9 d. being
the 4 and 4 of a Shilling, I firft fay,

5. d.

That the 4 of 7? is ~ 37 6
and the 4 of 75 is —250

See that my Anfwer is — 62 6
^ 4 w • Take

2 6

Numerical Inflruclions

Take here a View of all the foregoing Num-
bers multiply ’d by 75.

1 d. by 75 12)75

— s‘ d-

6 3 which is 6 5

2 d. by 75

6) 75

». d.

12 4-

which is

12 6

3 J. by 75

4)75

—

5. d.

^

18 *

which is

18 9

4 &• fcy 7?

?)7J

J. J.

—

25

which is

25 O

5 & by 75 4)7?

6)2 f}

In all 3 * 3

by 75 2)75 ,

— j. d.

37 -r which is 37 6

7J. by 75 2)7;

I2)?6 wHchiS '6 3

In all 43 9

Or

for Gardeners, &c.

Or thus: 4)7?

In all 43 9

8 by 75 3)75 ^

3)25 1 which is

In all 50 o

by 75 2)75

In all 56 3

10 L by 75 2)77

— s . ft*

o'loJ *1 which is ff, ^

3J27 j 26 o

In all 62 6

11 d. by 77 2)77

37

4Y8

MU

■f which i

iJ

s. d.

. ?7 6
is 18 9
12 6

In all 6 8 9

27i

Without

2$ Numerical Inflruftions

Without the Trouble of multiplying by 9, and
dividing by 12, which is the Method taught in
moil Schools.

But now let us fee how many Pounds.

To divide by 20, is thus, (and which is common*
ly known) ftrike off the Cypher from the 2 thus,
a\ o, and divide the 62 6 by 20

Example.

2(0)62 s. 6d .

The Anfwer is 3 1. 2 s. 6d.

In like Manner if any one Thing were to coft
3 s. 4 d. how much will 75 of the fame coft? You
muft then remember, that 3 s. 4 d. is the 6th Part
of a Pound * then I refer you to the Work. Di-
vide 75 by 6, thus:

6)75

12 4, or 4.

So that the Anfwer is 1 2 Pound and 4, or 4 of
a Pound, which is 10 Shillings •, and that is the
Anfwer, viz. 12 Pounds 10 Shillings.

View the round ^bout Way, and I have done.

Firft reduce 3 s. 4 d. into Pence, which are 40 df.

Multiply 75 divide 3000 by 12 d.
by 40

3000 thus 12)3000

Then by 2jo)2 5|o

32/. 1 os. theAnfw.

for Gardeners, &c. 29

This happens to he a pretty even Number * but
here may be feen five times the Figures as are in
the practical Way.

Here follow all the Shillings in a Pound under
10 Shillings, us’d after this pradical Manner.
s. d. I s, d.

1 o 2]o)7$f3 44 which is 3 15 o

5. d.

2 o

1 [0)7 ? (7 -rs- which is

l s. I
7 10 o

5. d.

2 6

8)75(9 »

z. j. <?.

which is 976

3 O 110)75(7 -r1

n which i* 1;;;]

n*(» U) ^ °i

2|o)75(?

I< 5* d. la St da
115 0

5. da la S . Jo

4 0 5)75(iS o which is 15 00

S. da la S. da

5 o 4)75(i3 t which is 18 15 o

5. d.

6 o

i. 5. a. 1

St

da

!’ oK'»°

s. d.

7 °

«Z. Z.

tj which is lS J5 °q}*6

s. d.
5 o

*. d.
7 6

/• 5. Jo la St da

i)Xl t} whichi. '5 8 . 6

8

3°

5. d.

sop

Numerical InflruttioHs

l. s. d.

o°} «*** S o oj

O

O *

0

5. d.

90 })

\I5 oJ

l. s. d.

> which is § *8 °1

■ 15 0 oJ

l s. d.

>33 0

? - p7,G? §«*** s h a

/. St d%

1*43 ij 0

l. s. d
•

>56 5 0

It were needlefs to make any more Repetition
on this Matter-, if there fliould be any other
Number, 3tis eafy, after a little Practice, to ufe it
without the tedious Way of Redudtion ^ fo I pafs
on.

Of Crofs Multiplication .

§ 2. Thefe Preliminaries, thus learnt by Heart,
the Learner may proceed * and for the under-
{landing this the better, we are to learn this fliort
Table.

That Feet multiply^ by Feet, are Feet.

That Inches multiply’d by Feet, every twelfth
are Feet, and the Remainder are Inches.

That Inches multiply ’d by Inches, every twelfth
of the Product are Inches, and the Remainder are
Seconds.

.This is as far as we ufe in Gardening-, but if
any Perfon hath a Mind to go to a greater Exadt*
nefs, I refer him to a very exadt Treatife, and one
of the firft that was publiftfd on this Subjedt, en-
titled.

for Gardener s, &c. 3 1

titled, Mellifcium Menfurationi 5* ^ or, The
Marrow of Me a faring , by Tan Munday .

follows an Example .

F. L

4 Foot by 5 Foot, is — 20 o

4 Foot by 6 Inches, is — 2 o

5 Foot by 3 Inches, is — 1 3

6 Inches by 3 Inches, is . — o 1 6

23 4 6

But we never ufe the odd Parts in Gar-
dening, they being of fo little Account.

But from this let us go to the more general
Ufe of thefe two Rules, where we lhall fee
it often made Ufe of 5 I mean the Rule of
PraElice, and the Rule of Duodecimals , com-
monly call'd Crofs Multiplication.

Q.UESTION I.

$ 2. How to meafure and cast up any uneven
Ground , in a Parterre , Lawn, or Juclo like Di-
vifion where it must of TSeccjjity be remov'd.

I muft own my felt the moft averfe to the
moving of Hills, or tilling up of Hollows, i-
maginable ^ but there are ieveral Cafes where
it is impoflible to avoid it, and that is, where

the

3 1 Numerical Inftruttions

’ the Parterre lies too high for the Floor of the
Houfe, which is the Cafe in many Places, or
where the Mold is to be carry’d off, for fotne
good Ufe.

This moving of Earth, is commonly mea-
fur’d by the Foot Meafure, and afterwards re-
duc’d into folid Yards, 27 whereof makes a
Yard fquare, or folid, being 3 Foot long,
3 Foot deep, and three Foot wide.

Thefe Dimen (ions may be taken, before the
Ground is carry’d away, by digging Holes
down to the intended Level ^ but it is gene-
rally meafur’d afterwards, by leaving little Hil-
locks about two Foot wide, to {hew the Height
the Ground was before the Work was begun.

Let us then putthe Cafe that ’tis fuch a Par-
terre, or Lawn, as is defcrib’d Fig . 2, being
3 60 Foot long, 160 Foot wide, and of the
feveral Depths under-mention’d , thefe Hil-
locks ought to be rang’d out, or judicioufly. flak’d
out, as the Matter and Undertaker fhall befl
agree. We will fuppofe them to be only ten,
but in a Peice of Ground of this Extent, there
can’t be lefs than 50 or 605 however, thefe ten
will fhew the Reafon of the Thing as well as
50 or 60.

Let the Depths be, (1) 2 F. 3 In. (2) 1 F.

6 In. (3) 2 F. 1 In. (4) 2 F. 5 In. (5) 1 F.

3 In. (6) 2 F. 7 In. (7) o F. 8 In. (8) o F.

4 In. (9) o F. 3 In. (10) 1 F. 4 In. Thefe

added together, will make 14 F. 8 In. Which
being divided by 10, the Number of Depths
makes near 1 F. 5 In. for the mean Depth of

for Gardeners, &c. 3 3

this unlevel irregular Peice of Ground : But
it muff be noted, that when you take thefe
Depths, and find any two Dimenfions alike, you
are to call away one of them, becaufe in the
Account they make indeed more Figures, but
are not of more Value.

But to return, let us now call up our Di-
menfions.

F. In.

Multiply * 360 o the Length.

by . < 1 60 o the Width.

2 1 600
360

and 57600 is the fuperficial Content.

wh. multipJy’d by 1 6

by one Foot 57600
by fix Inches 28800

and it makes 86400 thefolidContentinFeet.

Let us now divide this folid Content in
Feet by 27, the Number of folid Feet in a
Yard.

27^86400(3200

54’*

And the Content is 3200 folid Yards.

The Prices of moving Earth are various,
according to the feveral Prizes of Labourers

D in.

34 Numerical Inflruftions

in the Country ; but, where they are allow’d'
12 d. per Day, a Yard of Sand, or other
loofe Ground, may be dug and fill’d for zd.-h
or 3 d. and of Clay for 3 d. \ or 4 d. Upon
the whole, if you move it 20 or 30 Yards, it
will coft $d. or 6d. or, if Clay, 7 d. or 8 d.
per Yard. We will fuppole the Queftion in
Hand to be 6d.

The Number of Yards 3200
The Price per Yard 6

To reduce it to Shiilings-i , ,
take one half thus, S 1 "c 3

Divide jh it by 2 a
and the Sum is —

j- 80 o o Pounds.

And fo much this will coft the levelling.

Q_ U E S T 1 O N II.

But there m e Pieces of Ground to be reduc'd ,
which are of irregular Widths , as well as
Depths $ the Method of meafuring of which,
will appear Plate 22.

The Widths and Depths being reduc’d in-
to a regular Method, firft by fixing feme le-
vel Stakes round the Edge of the Pit, as
abed. Fig. 3, Plate 22. Thefe Stakes, I fay,
being the exaft Level the Ground is to be at
the Top of the Pit, ftrain the Line round 5
and whenever you have a Mind to find the
Depths, ftrain Lines crofs-ways likewife, or

Bm g

for Gardeners, &c. 3 5

do it fighting a-crofs$ by which you will
difcover the middle Stake R (Fig. 3, Plate 22)
to be 6 Foot 31 Inches more or lets. Suppo-
fing then, you have taken the Depths, and re-
duc’d them as above, you are to let out an exad
Square in the Bottom, that will near touch
the Irregularities quite round j as luppofe
e f g h 5 by which Means, meafuring a-crofs
at feveral Places at Pleafure, as at 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 1 6,
adding all thofe unequal Numbers together,
as you did in the Depths, and dividing them
by the Number of Dimenfions, fuppofe 16
more or lefs, the Queftion will Hand thus,
fuppofing it to be a Hollow, that mull be ei-
ther reduc'd, or quite fill’d up.

F. In.

150 6 long.

103 2 the mean Width,
and 6 2 the mean Depth.

D 3

See

Numerical Inftruttions

'

See the Example.

F. In.

long.

103 ^2 the mean Depth.

150 F. by 3 F. 450
150 F. by 100 F. 150
150F. by 2 In. 25.0

103 F. by 6 In. 51.6

6 In. by 2 In. 1

the mean Depths

1 5526by6F.deep93 156
15526 by 2 In. 2587 . 8

6 F.by 7 In. 3.6

7 In. by 2 In. 1

Divide this 27)95747

by theN um-
ber of Feet
in a folid
Yard.

147'

124

167

3(3546 folid Yards.

5

And this plainly appears to amount to
3546 folid Yards 5 which, if a Hollow, one
would, if pofiible, avoid filling 5 as like-
wife, if it be a Hill, and not in the Way :
Suppofing you were to lay it into a regular

Hollow

for Gardeners, &c. 37

Hollow of 145 Foot 6 Inches Jong, and 106
Foot 9 Inches wide, let us reckon how we
(hall beft order our Matters, that it may be
reduced into our intended Form, without the
Expence of carrying any of it away, or bring-
ing any more in to compleat our Level.

Were the Sides of this Hollow perpendi-
cular, the finding out a proper Depth would
be the eafier 5 but, fince there are to be Slopes
into the Hollow, it makes feme Rebate in the
Difpofition, and Depth of the Hollow. At
firft View, then, any Perfon of the leaft Expe-
rience may fee, that this Hollow we have
been fpeaking of, will be about 6 Foot deep 5
and, according to the common Allowance
of three Foot horizontal to one Foot perpen-
dicular, the Bafis of the Slope of each Side
will take up 18 Foot, and the fame at the
Ends 5 fuppofing you allow the fame Horizon-
tal.

This being rightly underftood, we ought
then to make our Computation from the Mid-
dle of one Slope, to the Middle of the other.

Tou are then jirfi to multiply the Length
by the Depths and divide that by the Number
of Feet contain'd in the great Hollow , 18 Foot
at each Side and each End for the half Per-
pendicular of the Slopes > and it Jlands thus :

3 8 Numerical Injlruttions

See the Operation.

F. In.

12 7.6 long;

88 . 3 wide.

127 Foot by 8 Foot 1016

127 Foot by 80 Foot — 1017
88 Foot by 6 Inches — 44

127 Foot by 3 Inches ■— 31 . 9

1

I

11261 . 10

The Sum of 11261 Feet being the fuperfi-
cial Content of this defign’d regular Hollow,
(the Inches being rejetted, as of little Account)
we are in the next Place to divide the Con-
tent of the irregular Hollow thereby, and
that will give the exatt Depth.

As for Example.

1 1 26i)95745(8TVV/T,which is above fan Inch.

5659

And by this we fee, that this Pit we regu-
larly reduc’d, is to be 8 Foot and a half deep:
If it were to be a Hill that was to be reduc’d
into the fame Method and Figure, the fame
Calculation would fuffice.

for Gardeners, &c. 39

Of the meafuring of fuperficial Plans-

In the Courfe of this Chapter, it will be
proper to fhew the Method of meafuring ali
Sorts of fuperficial Figures $ not fo much for
its not being known, as for a Rememberance to
all that pradife Gardening $ lincethefeThings,
in a Multiplicity of Bufinefs, are apt to flip
out of any Body’s Mind.

Now, it muft be confider’d, that in Gar-
dening, we have Occafion to take and call up
thefe Dimenfions two Ways $ firft, in the ge-
neral Survey of a Landfkip in Chains, Perches,
&c. and them into Acres $ and, in a fmaller
Account, when thofe Figures are in Grafs
Plats, into Feet and Inches, and from thence
into Yards or Perches. Of both thefe Ways
I Ihali give Examples.

Example I.

Of a Square and Parallelogram in large Land -

Meafure , Fig. 4, 5, Plate 23.

Let A be a true Square, each Side being
10 Chains o Links. Multiply 10 Chains o
'Links, by 10 Chains o Links, and the Sum
is 1000000 $ from which cut off the five
laft Figures, and there remain juft 10 Acres
for the Square.

D 4

Again,

40 Numerical Infer u£i ions

Again, in the Parallelogram B, let the Side
A B, or C D, be 20 Chains 50 Links $ and
the Side A c, or b D, 10 Chains o Links.
Multiply a b 20 Chains 50 Links, by a c
10 Chains o Links, and it makes 2050000 5
which is 20 Acres, 50000 $ but here being
a Decimal Fraftion, by the cutting off the
five Figures, we are (which there was no
Occafion of in the laft Dimenfion) to multi-
ply it by 4, and cut off five Figures, and
the Figures above five are Roods. Again, to
find the Perches, multiply by 40, and the
Figures toward the left Hand, above five,
are Perches.

See the Operation.

20 50

10 00

Acres — -

- qo|5oo 00

. 4

Roods —

— q]goooo

40

Perches —

— o| 00000

So that the full Sum is 20 Acres, 2 Roods,

Perches.

How

for G A R D ENERS, &C. 4 I

How in fmaller meafuring in Gardening it is
ufed as in the meafuring of Grafs -Plats and
other fuperficial Figures.

Let A, then, be a true Square of 12 Foot 6
Inches; multiply 12 Foot 6 Inches by 12
Foot 6 Inches, and that gives the Content
156 Foot 3 Inches.

See the Operation :

12 6
12 6

*44

6

6 3

156 3

Again, fuppofe in the Parallelogram B
(Fig. 5, Plate 23) the Sides a b, or C D, be 18
Foot 3 Inches, and the Width 12 Foot 6 In-
ches, as before :

18 3
12 6

186

8

9 * 6

198 1 6

the

4*

Numerical Inflruttions

the Content is 198 Foot, 1 Inch, and 6 Parts $
but thefe Parts we generally throw away, ex-
cept in fine Works.

Of Triangles, (Fig. 3, Plate 23J

The Content of a Triangle is known by
multiplying half the Perpendicular by the
whole Bafe, or, e contra , half the Bafe by
the whole Perpendicular $ but the Dimenfions
are taken as the Nature of the Triangle is 5
and thofe three Kinds, in Fig. 6, give Light
thereinto, being fuch as all Sorts of Triangles
compofe.

When you have,then, pitch’d upon the Bafe,
(which in every one of thefe is A at Right
Angles) thereto draw or fuppofe a prick’d
Line to run up to the Angle oppofite to it,
and that is the Perpendicular.

See the cafting up of one of them.

In the fir ft Triangle, the Bafe c d is 22
Chains, 50 Links 5 and the Perpendicular f e
is 3 Chains 50 Links. See it ftated;

ii

'S

43

for Gardeners, &c.

ii 25
3 50

56250

3375

Acres 3)93750

4

Rood 3)75000
40

Perch. 30)00000
and fo of all the reft.

Now, if we apply this to Gardening, we
fometimes have a Grafs-Plat of this Kind, or
other fuch like but the 3d is the Area of a
Terrace-Walk, taken at the End. Suppofe it
then to be the Horizontal Perpendicular and
Hypoteneufe of a Terrace-Walk ^ take, firft,
the Bafe 6 Foot 4 Inches, and multiply it by
half the Perpendicular of 15 Foot, which is
7 Foot 6 Inches, (for tho’ this, as will here-
after appear, is not near the exaft Proportion
of this Work, yet it will ferve to demonftrate
our Propofition) and the Content will be 47
Foot 6 Inches :

I

7

44

Numerical Inftruttions

7 6
6 4

42

2 4

3 o
2

47

Of the general Ufe of Triangles y in mea furing
all ftrait lin’d irregular Plans.

(Figure the 7th, Plate the 23d.)

It muft be here obferv’d, that a Triangle
meafures all irregular Plats, either large or
fmall, by reducing the whole Piece into Tri-
angles, which Triangles are one of the three
Kinds laft mention’d, and mull be fo mea-
fur’d.

Suppofe that Fig. the 27 th, Plate the 23^,
be an irregular Plan , with ftrait lin’d
Sides and Angles ( for as for circular or
crooked Sides, it is taught in Fig. 2. Plate 23.)
that is to be meafur’d in order to be levell’d,
or any other Work common in Gard’ning,
and reduc’d into Feet, Inches, &c. and after
that into Yards, fuperficial, or folid, or into
fuperficial Perches $ not taking any Notice in
this Place of large Land-meafure, that being
to follow Chapter of Inftruments.

Having

for Gardeners, &c. 45

Having taken the Plan of it on Paper, re-
duce it into Triangles, by drawing Lines
from one Length to another, and leaving no
irregular Square in the whole Work. Being
thus reduc'd into Triangles, you are to pitch
upon proper Lines for your Bale ; fuch indeed
are thofe that are oppofite to the wideft An-
gle, then let drop, or you may from thence
fuppofe a perpendicular Line $ your Work
is juft ready to do as you did before, in the
Example of Triangles.

There are fome that advife the dividing
and meafuring fuch Plats in the fame
Manner you would do a Trapezium 5 but
that is almoft the fame as this, tho’ not
fo intelligible, nor indeed fo exad 5 I have
therefore chofe this Way, tho’ it is fome-
thing more Trouble : Yet, where two Per-
pendiculars have one common Bafe, as have
the Divifions b and c, i and k , h and e , you
may add both Perpendiculars together, to
fave Trouble, and fet them down, as in the
Example.

I need not farther repeat the Method of
taking, or calling up the Dimenfions of this
irregular Plat $ but, in order to find the Con-
tent of the whole Field, I fuppofe the feveral
Dimenfions, upon calling up, are as follow :

F. In,

4 6

Numerical Inftruftions

Feet.

Yards fuperficial.

Now if you were to find the Content in
Perches, you rauft divide it by 272J when in
Feet, as 882.

See the Example.

272)882 o (o 3 . .5-W near i

66

So that you fee the Content is 3 Perches,
and near a Quarter : This irregular Plat
might be taken the fame Way as it is in the
2d Figure ^ but I leave every one to chufe
which they like beft.

Let us now proceed to Polygonar, and Cir-
cular Figures.

F. In.

a 9 6 5

n

c J

d~

157 7

76 10

b}-'6? 1

f —

& —

92
5 6

I)-***

/ 48

In all

882 o
96 o

To

for Gardeners, &c. 47

To find the Content of a Circle , or any Part

thereof.

To find the Content of a Circle, one
Way is, after you know the Diameter,
to work by the Rule of Three, and fay, as
7 is to 22, fo is the Diameter to the Circum-
ference ;■ and then you are to multiply half
the Diameter by half the Circumference, to
find the Content.

But a better Way is to fquare the Diame-
ter, and fay, as 14 is to 11, fo is the
Square of the Diameter to the Content of the
Circle.

Suppofe, then, that the Diameter of the
Circle A B, &c. Fig. 8. Plate the i%dy be 20
Foot, that 20 Foot multiply’d by itfeJf, viz.
20 Foot, makes 400 5 fay then, as 14 is to 11,
fo is the 400 to the Content of this Circle.
See the Work.

14 11 400

11

400

400

14)4400(3 1 4rV above f
20
60

4

So

48 Numerical InftruSlions

So that the Content is 314 Foot and above
a Quarter.

A Semicircle and Quadrant, or any Seg-
ment of a Circle, are meafur’d the fame Way
that a whole Circle is, viz. half the Diame-
ter, or Perpendicular, by half the Compafs.
In the foregoing Circle, if you would know
the Content of that little Piece D C B. the
Arch D. B. is 78 Foot and a Half, the half of
it is 39 and a Quarter, which multiply’d by
100, the Semidiameter gives 3925 for the
Content, and fo of a Quadrant, &c. And
it mull be noted that all thefe Figures are in
Ufe in Gardenings we break Circles, Semi-
circles, and Quadrants out of our Squares,
for the greater Diverfity and Ornament there-
of} but, becaufe it would be a Trouble to
find the Diameter of the Segment of a Circle
at all Times, I fhall Ihew

How to find the Content of the Segment of a
Circle , without knowing the Diameter.

Let E F G be the Segment } the Subtenfe,
or Chord-Line, is 170 Foot, the Perpendicu-
lar G H 50 Foot } now multiply 4 of the
one by the whole of the other, and the Pro-
duft will be the Content.

The- of 170 Foot is near 113, which
multiply ’d by 50, produces 5650 fuperficial
Feet} and that is the Content of that Segment,
Portion, or Part of a Circle.

To

I

Tig*. IV.

v

for Gardeners, &c. 49

To find the fu^erfic'tal Content of an Oval.

The common Way is to multiply the long
Diameter by the fhorter, and from that Pro-
duel to extra# the Square-Root, which you
may call a mean Diameter, and then, as if
you were meafuring a Circle, fay.

As 14 is to 1 1, fo is the mean Diameter to
the Content of the Oval $ bur this is not ex-
ad. A better Way is i . 27, that as 1 44s- is
to the Length of the Oval, fo is the Breadth
to the Content thereof. We may go nearer,
by making the Fradion larger, and fay, as
1.27324 is to the Length, fo is the Breadth to
the Content : But the firft is near enough
to our Purpofe in Gardening.

Let an Oval, then, be 50 Foot long, and
the Breadth, or Ihorteft Diameter, be 37. Say
as follows :

t - '

As 1.27 is to 50 fo is 37 to the Content.

37

350

150

127)1850 . 00(1466
• . •

580

720

850

E

50 Numerical InftruBions

So that as 1.27 is to 50 the Length, fo
the Breadth 37 is 1456 Foot, the Content.

The Reafon why 1 have , in the Dividend of
this Sum, added two Cyphers, is to make it e-
qual to the two FraElions in the Divifor j and
this I particularly advife the Reader of, be-
caufe he is not , perhaps, very well fill'd in De-
cimal Divifion of Feet and Parts, by Feet and
Parts. But if there had been five Figures in
the Fraction of the Divifor, I fhould likewife
have added five Cyphers in the Dividend, to
ballance it. And thus much of circular Fi-
gures.

How to find the fuperficial Content of regular
Polygons , as Pentagons, Hexagons , Hepta-
gons, Sic.

Multiply half the Sum of the Sides by a
perpendicular let fall from the Center upon
one of the Sides, and the Produd will be the
Area, or fuperficial Content of the Polygon.

In the following, the Sides B C fuppofe to
be 84 Foot, the Sum of the Sides 5, the
Work will ftand thus :

<

The Half of 420, which is the Produd of
84 by 5, is 210 $ and this 210 multiply’d by
5 6 Foot, the Semi-diameter, or, as it is ge-
nerally here call’d, the Perpendicular, gives
11760 Square Foot for the Content thereof.
And this Way will meafure any Figure,let it be

for Gardeners, 8zc. 51

6, 7> 8, 9> io, or more Sides 3 fo that I
need not enlarge more on it.

I fhall only give one Example more of Com-
pound figures, which are us’d very much
with us in Gardening. Let it be Figure the
10th, Plate the 23d, compos’d of a Square
and a Semi-circle at each End.

Having already taught how to meafure a
Square and a Semi-circle, there is the lefs
Occafion to enlarge here. Firft meafure the
Square, and then the two Semi-circles, and
adding them together, it gives the Content.

Thus the Length a b, or c d, 10c Foot,
multiply’d by a c, or b d, 60 is 600, and the
Semi-circles 196 Foot, make in all 796 Foot
fuperficial in the Area of that Compound Fi-
gure.

I (hall now finilh this Chapter with a (hort
Sketch of a Meafuring-Book Abftrad, and of
a Bill, or Computation of Work to be done
by any Gardener, <&c. which are the origi-
nal Foundation of Minutes for a Bill, or
Contrad, and for the Scheme and Schedule
thereto commonly annex’d.

You are then, upon the Paper, if it be for
an Efiimate, or upon the Ground, if the Work
be done, and it be a Bill, and not an Eflti-
mate, to meafure the Length and Breadth of
every Particular 3 and cart up, and place , all
the Dimenfions in a corred Method, that you
may the ealier abftrad them into general

E 2 Heads,

5 i Numerical Infractions

Heads, and caft them up into a Bill: You
are like wife to place the Sketch, or Draught
of the principal Part of your Garden upon
a very f mall Scale, (Vide Plate 22) that there-
on you may place Letters to refer to upon a-
ny Occalion, and to demonftrate the Place
where fuch Work was done, and the feveral
Diftances that Earth was mov’d y for other-
wife, fliould there happen to be a Suit of
Law, (which is the Cafe too often) the Mat-
ter can't be fo well underftood.

The Nature of a Meafuring-Book.

Firft divide your Octavo Leaf into fix Parts,
or Folds, one w’hereof is for the Margin, one
for the Dimenfion taken, one for the Con-
tents, and the other to explain the Place and
Diftance of every particular Work. This be-
ing done, title your Book thus :

Sept. 14, 1714. The Menfuration of feve-
ral Works done (or to be done) for the Right

Honourable the E — of — , at Belleau in

Com. Line.

F.

The Earth fleec’d off the"1
Plan of the Courts Building,
and Terrace-Walks,and cart- J
ed to a Leftal at A, the mean pg
Diftance of carting being ’’ ^ 0
from B to A, Plate 23, Fig.

1, 1000 Foot.

I.

ol

1 o

F.
^8726

I.

o

j

The

for Gardeners, &c.

The levelling and ca r-~
yingaway of the hilly
Ground from the Lawn
at N, Fig. 2, Plate 22, 5*
to theTerraces on each j
Side the mean Diftance, I
j 00 Foot: J

The filling up a large!

Pit in the Garden markt I
P, with Clay dug, and j1 150 6"!
brought from the Foun- r» 103 2>

dations of the Houfe, j 6 2 )
the mean Diftance be-
ing 100 Foot. J

The rough levelling !(2)200 o~)
of the two Courts L > 100 o >

and N. J 1 0/

The rough levelling ! 2200"!

the Garden mark’d M, > 107 3

Fig. 1, Plate 23. J 10 )

The rough levelling
of the great Court be-
fore the Houfe North-
ward, mark’d B.

230 o
210 o
2 6

}

The rough levelling
of the great Terrace-
Walk on the South Side
of the Houfe, mark'd 0.

E 3

53

F. I.

86400 o

95745 o

64OOO o

38-340 ©

2075P c

94CCC o

The

54 Numerical Inftruttions

The rough levelling^ F. I.
of the upper Parterref 240 o') F. I.

on the South Side off 200 o f 72000 o

the Houfe, mark’d Q. ) 16

The rough levelling
the lower La wn,or Par-1
terre, on the South Side!
of the Houfe, mark'd R.

►

:}

250 o

180 o > 45000
I o.

The trenching the
Quarters mark’d SS,< ,

&c. and throwing the V-2' °° °'l2i6ooo 0
Mold out of the Walks' lBo 03
two Spit deep.

The earthing, raking,
and, turfing the Par-C (2)210 07 .

terre Quarters, mark’d^ 70 oj
a a a a.

The earthing, raking, y
and turfing the Lawn, ( 2 50 01

or lower Parterre off* 180 0/

Grafs. J

The tur fi ng the S ide v ✓

Terrace- Walks, mark’d > ' \ 86800 o

bbb. S 700 s

The middle Gravel-
Walk.

} H40 0} 56oco 0

The

55

for Gardeners, &c.

F. J.

The gravelling the-> 640 01 F. I.

great Terrace. S 40 cm 25600 o

The Gravel- Walk at
the lower End of the
Parterre.

200 o~i
30 0/

6000 o

There are many other Dimenfions that
occur in an Undertaking ^ but thefe, I think,
are fufficient Specimens of what I would pre-
tend to teach by this . Sedion. I fhall now
proceed to abftrad thofe Dimenfions into ge-
neral Heads $ wherein I muff obferve, that all
Dimenfions of Clay, or any other Material in
Gardening, are brought into one Head, if
the Diftance of Carriage be the fame^ as is
alfo rough levelling, turfing, &c. when they
are of one and the fame Kind.

Divide, then, a Page, or Pages, at the End
of your Book, into fix Folds, one more or
lefsmaydo, but fo as they may contain the
Contents of any of the foregoing Dimenfions,
and proceed thus, beginning at the Beginning
of your' Dimenfions,

E 4 f ' An

An Abstract of the fever al Particulars of this Menfuration :

5 6 Numerical InflruBions

cd

$

<u
>
a S

o

fcX)

fcxQ

r-t C'

.5 &0f43
a c j-

*-» *r: 3
J- *-»

rs

0 0 0 0

O

0000

O

0000

O

. O VO OJ O

00

U-| VO VS os VO

VO

On O w

-d"

k— 4

- K

<u

oa-

v'tc

1-1

<L>

cu

• TJ

CTj —

«-• s

Co

CD

OOO

O

Urn

C3

OOO

O

C*

000

O

M

d-OOO

04

Os

Os ^ MD

*■*

Os

c* -d-co

VO

t— 1

CD

<D

-G

cj

1-4

<L>

CU

t\
ON
i rs

to

G

-G

O

G

<U

Sh

tH

O

o

ta vo

t—

<N

CD

T3

o *3

<43
O *-
o w

SL%

C*

V CtJ

i~ • — 4

, <u o

+ n u

Os so Cui

^ £<3

r. <L>

to

a

> *4 O O O O O

O

folid

<5

— » 00000

O

Q

^ c n

OS-X3

XJ 0 0

Os

04 ty

$£> _ . os r^s 0 O 0

VO

0

G WH OO O d n ^

CO

0 or\ n as ts d*

*•4

!C^ +4

CO (

o

“ §

O

2 £2 . vo

j-, [v, <n

^ cc ^ r^.

^ ° oo

OS

*T3

G

ca

C .
w b4

CD

T5

>H

rs

c m>8

D u

Q O

O

"3

0 ^

vs

x

Q_) r

C3 TO

0 -d-

-d"

CYN

"d-

k-4

04

ccs q

VO ITS

04

CO

1

O ^ w

00 s

OO Os

CO

»-<

The

6746

for Gardeners, &c. 5.

The feveral Sums being thug brought into
proper Heads, thefe Heads are the Articles
for an Eftimate, or Bill, and, after that, for
Articles ; and, as foon as they are plac’d in
Order, and call: (as before) the Contents in
Feet is then given ; and then, being divided,
is brought into folid or fuperficial Yards, or
into Perches $ which three Meafures are, for ‘
the moll Part, what the Gardeners reduce
their Work to 5 and for that Reafon I (hall
here fubjoin a Table, viz.

9 Foot is a fuperficial or fquare Yard.

27 Foot is a folid Yard.

272 Foot 4- a fuperficial Perch.

As for folid Perches vve ufe them not.

f'kk

There are, indeed, in feveral Counties of
England , Meafures that differ from thefe al-
ready nam’d 3 the North Country Fall.orRood,
is 7 Yards, or 21 Foot, and that a fourth
Part of their Acre, as they call it, viz. 28
Yards -j but there is little Occafion for me to
run into thefe Divifions, fi nee they areeafily
brought to bear with thofe afore-mention’d.

Of a Bill , or EJlimate.

A Bill, or Eftimate, depends on the Na-
ture of the Earth, or Clay, &c. you have to
work on, and on the Diftance you move it ;
as for Depths, they are adjuffed in calling
up the Dimen (tons 5 and as for the Diftance

58 Numerical InflruFtions

of Carriage, when we fay a mean Diftance,
’tis a Length taken from the Middle of the
Place where we take it from, ro the Middle
of the Place where we carry it to.

The Form of a Bill , or EJlimate.

A Bill of feveral Works done for the Right

Honourable the E — of — , at Belleau

in Com. Line. 1715.

For 323 folid Yards of good^ /.
Mold, fleec’d off from the Sur-
face of the Buildings, Court-
Yards, <&c. and carry ’d to a Le- ^ 10
ftal 1000 Foot Diftance, at 8 d
per Yard. 7 _

j.

H

d.

8

For 6746 folid Yards of coarfe~

Earth and Clay, dug out of the
Foundations of the Houfe, and
other Places, and carry ’d to a
large Pit in the Weft Court, and 1*224 17 4

to raife the Terraces at each Side
of the Parterre $ the mean Di-
ftance of carting being 100 Foot,
at 8 d. per Yard. — —

For 14029 folid Yards of^
Ground rough Ievell’d, and fomeC ^ g
of it carry’d 20, 30, or 40 Footf
Diftance, at 2 d. f per Yard.- —

For

for Gardeners, &c.
For 794 Perches and an half\ /.
fuperficial of trenching at two(

Spit deep, leaving the Crumbs,^ 1 3
at 4 cl. per Perch. — )

59

J. d.

4 io

For 597 Perches of Turf, or
Swath Grafs, (laid down at the
Work) accounting molding, ra-
king, laying, and cutting it, at
joj. pe r Perch. .■

24 1 7

6

For fpreading, laying, raking,
and rolling fix times over of 540
Perches of Gravel, at 6d. per
Perch, the Gravel being ready
dug and carted.

13 10

9

I might in this very Section have been ve-
ry large and copious 5 but I could not fee the
Neceffity of it, feeing thefe fmall Intimati-
ons will be fufficient for any Perfon that has
any Thing of a Genius 5 as for thofe that
have not, though they are Gardeners, other
Kind of Works are more proper for them 5
fo I proceed to the next Chapter of this Trea-
tife, viz, Injlrumental InflruSions for Garde-
ners.

CHA-P.

6o Inftrumental Inflruttions

#■ & & M &

t5& tSf|> £8? A& ^3? $j<3

& ig. M & '

S3)S3i

CHAP. III.

0/ the Ufe of Surveying
Instruments.

& *!• v *!• ?!■ *J ?J? $• v *2? v «5* v v v v v rj* *J? «5* v & v *1* «J» «g ig jjw ig ;j; # $r

Gunter’i' Chain.

H I S is the Chain that is gene-
rally made Ufe of by Survey-
ors, and contains in Length four
Poles, or 66 Feet, and is divi-
ded into ioo Links ^ each Link is therefore
7t£~ Inches. This Chain is, for greater Eafe
in reckoning, divided into ten Farts, by pro-
per Brailes, denoting io, 30, 30, 40, 50
Links, and back again from 50 to 10 Links.

52c^^c52c5$cjj5f $

The Surveying Scales.

i 1 G. 1.] rT-' H E Scale more particularly
X adapted to Surveying, is on
one Side divided into fix equal Parts, each of
which Parts anfvvers to a Gunters Chain of
100 Links: At the End of this Scale is an

equal

' >

\

v

V

1

(

for Gardeners, &c. 6i

equal Part, divided by Diagonal Lines into
ten Parts 5 each of which correfpond with the
Divifions of ten Links in the Chain. This
Subdivifion is number’d on the Sides, 2 , 4,
6, 8, and in the fame Manner on Top. if
you imagine the Top Figures to denote Units,
and thofe on the Side 1'ens, ’tis then plain,
that, if the Compares be extended from the
Point where the fixth Line interfeds that no-
ted 3, to the Point where the Line denoting
70 is interfeded by the fa id 6 th Line, that
Diftance (hall be three Chains, 76 Links.
This appears yet more plainly by the Dots
made in each Point. Thofe who would projed
a Field in a fourth Part of the Compafs by
which it might be laid down by the aforefaid
Scale, may lay the other Edge of it before
them, where they may fee the five former
Divifions divided into 10, and at the End one
of them Decimally divided, as one of the
other was . For Example, If you would take
the Diltance of 7 Chains, 52 Links, extend
the Compafies from the Point where the 2d
Line interfeds the 7th, to the Point where
the Line denoting 50 is interfeded by the faid
7th Line. This appears plainer Hill by the
Dots.

Fig. 2.3 There are alfo other Lines of
equal Parts, which may be us’d in Surveying,
as Fig. 2 $ One of them is divided into 180
Parts, and has before it a Part Decimally divi-
^5 and it js figur’d 30, intimating that 30
of thofe Decimal Parts are equal to an Inch.

Hence

6z Instrumental Inflruttions

Hence the Line is call'd the Line of 20 in an
Inch .

Thefe Lines may be made Ufe of where you -
have a large Piece of Ground to protrad, be- -
caufe each Divifion is equal to 10 Yards* j
Feet, or Chains, &c. Thus you fee, that the !
Meafure of 20 Chains, 60 Links, extends from
the Dot on 20 to the 6th Divifion in the Part I
Decimally divided. Bur, as thefe Lines are \
more immediately ufeful in laying down and
meafuring Lines for Triangles, I pafs them
over, with this farther Remark, That agamft
the other three Lines are figur’d 24, 20, 16, !
denoting that one of their Parts is decimally
divided to 24, 20, 16 Parts in an Inch.

m

Protractors.

1

Fig. 3. * I 'HESE Inftruments are of two
JL Sorts: one reprefen ts a Semi-
circle, or half Theodolite $ the other, a Pa-
rallelogram, or long Square.

The Protrador reprefenting a Semicircle, is
divided in the Limb, or Semicircle, into 180
equal Parts, or Degrees $ thofe Degrees are
number’d backwards and forwards, from x to
180, in two Semicircles ^ the Center of thefe
Divifions is a little Notch, or Hole, made in
the Line paffing thro’ the two Points of 180
Degrees 5 and therefore ’tis eafy to imagine,
that the two femicircular Dtvifions reprefent

4

for Gardeners, &c. 6 $

the whole Theodolite 3 and the three Points
of 90 and 180 Degrees, by moving the Inftru-
ment about its Center, may give the four Car-
dinal Points of Eaft, South, Weft, and North,
ad libitum. Within the two Semicircles is a
third, having feveral Divifions number’d from
the Point of 90, on both Sides 4, 5, 6, &c.
to 12. Their Ufe is for the ready Divifion
of a Circle into 4, 5, or 6 Parts, &c.

Fig. 4. Let ADB be the Semicircle, ACB
its Diameter, C the Central Point. On C B
I would make an Angle of 60 Deg. *tis eafy to
fee that the Diameter of the Inftrument muft
be plac’d on C B, and its Center at the Point
of the Angle 3 if you count 60 Degrees from

B, and prick 'em off in your Paper 3 and thro’

C, and that fmall Hole, draw C 60 3 60 C B
fliall be an Angle of 60 Degrees, if you would
have the fame Angle to the left of your In-
ftrument, it remaining in the fame Pofture,
prick off 60 Degrees from A, and draw C D.

But where the Theodolite gives the Angle
in another Circle A E B, ’tis alfo eafy to fee
that ACB reprefents the Diameter of the
Inftrument, and A E B the Semicircle 3 and,
admitting the Index of the Theodolite cut 240
Degrees, reckon’d from A, that Quantity be-
ing 60 Degrees above a Semicircle A D B 3
prick off 60 Degrees, reckon’d from B or A,
(according to the Circumftance of your Work)
and draw C F, or C G.

If

for Gardeners, &c.

the whole Theodolite $ and the three Points
of 90 and 180 Degrees, by moving the Inftru-
ment about its Center, may give the four Car-
dinal Points of Eaft, South, Weft, and North,
ad libitum. Within the two Semicircles is a
third, having feveral Divifions number’d from
the Point of 90, on both Sides 4, 5, 6, &c.
to 12. Their Ufe is for the ready Divifion
of a Circle into 4, 5, or 6 Parts, &c.

Fig. 4. Let ADB be the Semicircle, ACB
its Diameter, C the Central Point. On C B
I would make an Angle of 60 Deg. *tis eafy to
fee that the Diameter of the Inftrument muft
be plac’d on C B, and its Center at the Point
of the Angle 5 if you count 60 Degrees from

B, and prick 'em off in your Papery and thro’

C, and that fmall Hole, draw C 60 5 60 C B
fhall be an Angle of 60 Degrees, if you would
have the fame Angle to the left of your In-
ftrument, it remaining in the fame Pofture,
prick off 60 Degrees from A, and draw C D.

But where the Theodolite gives the Angle
in another Circle A E B, ’tis alfo eafy to fee
that ACB reprefents the Diameter of the
Inftrument, and A E B the Semicircle 5 and,
admitting the Index of the Theodolite cut 240
Degrees, reckon’d from A, that Quantity be-
ing 60 Degrees above a Semicircle A D B 5
prick off 60 Degrees, reckon’d from B or A,
(according to the Circumftance of your Work)
and draw C F, or C G.

6 4 Inflruraental Infir utliohs

Jf xroil would divide a Circle, fuppofe into
fix h tS, the Diameter of tlie Iriftrutrient be-
it.g j id on any Line, A C B, and irs Center
on C, prick an Hoie againft the two Divifi-
ons noted 6 , on both c*ides, and ’tis done.

The Plain Table.

THIS Inftrurftentis ufually 15 Inches
long, and 12 broad, and is made to fix
on three Legs, by a Ball and Socket fitted to a
Nofil in the Table. On the jointed Frame on
both Sides of it are feveral Lines. On one
Side the Line;, next the Table, is an Inch-Di-
vifion $ the next, a Tangent Line, confifting
of 4 Ninety’s, cent’ring in the Brafs Hole in
the Middle of the Inftrument ^ and the outer-
moft Line is alfo a Tangent Line, divided in-
to 360 Parts or Degrees, and each 10 Degrees
to 30 Minutes $ and has the fame Center as
the preceding Line. On the other Side of the
jointed Frame, the Divifion next the Inftru-
ment, is alfo an Inch-Divifion, decimally di-
vided ^ and the two next are Tangent Lines,
confifting of 180 Degrees, and the outermoft
of them decimally divided, and each Degree
into two thirty’s of Minutes. Thefe Lines
have for their Center a Brafs Hole, inclining
to a Side of the Table $ and therefore in the
Ufe of them, the Frame muft be fo plac’d,
that a Line palling from the Beginning to the

End

for Gar d e n e r s, &g 6\
End of them, Iball alfo cut the faid Brafi
Hole.

Box and Needle.

To one of the Sides of the Inftrument is
fix’d a Box, with a Chart containing a circu-
lar Divifion of 360 Degrees, fubdivided into
the 32 Rhumbs, or Points of the Compafs,
and againft each Point is its Name. The mag-
netic Needle plays on a Pin in the Center of
the Chart. This Needle, when well touch’d
by the Load-flone, always regarding the North
and South Points $ you are therefore to move
your Inftrument about, ’til you obferve the
Needle to hang over the North and South
Line of the Chart, and then is your Table
due Eaft and Weft, North and South.

The Inftrument being thus truly plac’d, you
are then enabled to take the Number of De
grees, which any Object makes with yom
Center in the Inftrment, and to protrafl: them
at any Time, in Cafe the Weather be bad
when you Survey.

The Index.

’Tis a Piece of Wood of two Foot long,
and about one Inch broad, having a fiduci-
al Edge, for better drawing Lines with Ink 5
to each End belongs a perpendicular Sight, for
cutting Objefts with, and finding Angles. On
this Inftrument are ufually laid down Lines of
Chords to two Radii ; and next thofe. Lines

F of

66 Inflrumental Infractions

of equal Parts, fuch as we have defcrib’d $
and next them a Surveying Scale, fuch an one
as is alfo defcrib’d. The Edge of this Inftru-
ment is to go thro’ the Centers before fpoken
of, or any affign’d Center on the Table.

The XJfe of the Plain Table.

The Figure that is mod ufually produced,
on taking a Survey, is an irregular Polygon,
having no Side parallel to its Oppofite, nor
any Side or Angle, correfponding with any o-
ther Side or Angle, and is call’d a Trapezium.

Fig. 5. Let the irregular Polygon or Tra-
pezium A B C D, be a Field to be furvey’d.

Place your Table horizontally, (or paral-
lel with the Earth) in any Part of the
Feild, as at E$ fo that {landing there, you
can fee to each Angle ABC D3 having a
Sheet of clean Paper on your Table, and aiTu-
raing any Point thereon, imagine it E, in E
fix a Pin, and placing the Edge of the Index
clofe thereto, direft your Sights to Angle A,
and then draw the occult Line EA; do fo
by the other Angles, and draw E B, EC, and
E D. This being done, let two Perfons fet
out with the Chain from E towards A, the
Foremoft provided with fix, or more.fharpen’d
Sticks or Irons of a Foot long each, and let
them meafure E Asthus. Caufe the foremoft
Perfon to go one Extent of the Chain $ fuppofe

to

Vv

for Gardeners, &c. 67

to F, let him move about to the right or left,
’til you handing at your Inftrument, and look-
ing thro’ the Sights to A; obferve the Man
to come to Poinr 6, in the Line E A 5 E O
being -one Chain, let him place a Stick there,
and proceed on towards A, imagine to H,
where being hopp'd by the hinder Perfon’s Ar-
rival at G, let the hinder Perfon take up the
Stick, and being brought as before to I, in
Line E A; let him place a Stick, the hinder-
moh Perfon takes up the Stick at G, and then
fuffers the foremoh to proceed A$ which is
another Chain’s Length, fo that E G, G I,
and I A, are juh three Chains.

Set againh A, Column wife in this Man-
ner three Chains.

Angles

Meafures.

Ch.

Lines.

A

3

B

2

14

C

2

51

D

I

90

Lines E B, EC, and E D, being meafur’d in
the fame Manner, fuppofe E B 2Ch. 14. Li.
E C 2 Ch. 51. Li. and E D 1 Ch. 90 Li.
Tabulate them as above.

Now repair to your Surveying Scale, and, as
has been taught, take off 3 Chains, and fet
that Diftance from E to A ^ fet 2 Ch. 14 Li.
from E to B, and draw A B $ fet 2 Ch. 51.

F 2 Li,

6 8 Instrumental Infir unions

Li. from E to C, and x Cb. 90 Li. from E
to D, and draw B C, C D, and D A. Laft-
ly, direffing the Sights, the Edge of the Ru-
ler on E, to the Middle of the Gate of the
Field} draw E K, and on A D, draw the Gate
at K : In the fame Manner may any other ob-
fervable in the Hedges be laid down.

To find the Content of this Trapezium.

From the two Angles moft remote from each
other, A C, draw the Bafe Line A C, take
it in your Compaffes, and fetting it on your
Scale, ’twill reach from the Point of 5 Chains
to the Point of 25 Links among!! the Diago-
nals. Set 5 Chains, 25 Links on A C, draw
B S, and D S, perpendicular to A C } B S ta-
ken from the Scale is, 1 Ch. 25 Li. and DS
is alfo 2 Ch. 56 Li.

To find the Content of this Field.

Multiply half the Bafe A C, by the Sum
of the two Perpendiculars B S, and S D, with-
out having any Regard to their being Deci-
mals, and cutting off 5 Figures of the Produff
to the right (becaufe i,oooco fquare Links
makes an Acre) the remaining Figures are
Acres.

Multiply thofe 5 Figures by 4, (4 Poles be-
ing an Acre) and cutting off 5 Figures, as be-
fore, the remaining Figures are Roods} mul-
tiply thofe 5 Figures by 40, cutting off 5 Fi-
gures

for Gardeners, &c. 69

gures as before, and the remaining Figures are
Perches.

Operation.

Bafe AC- — 5 25 Perpendiculars f i 2 5 B S

i-2 5 6 DS

T 2 62

3 81
2 6 2

7^2
2286 •

762

.f&Tif.r . 99822

4

3)99288

'40

Perches 39(71520

So that the fuperficial Content of the Trape-
zium, is o Acres, 3 Roods, 39 Perches, -^of
a Perch.

If you would know the North and South
Lines of this Field, The Inftrument remain-
ing in Point E, place the Table, fo that
the Needle hang diredly over the Points of
North and South in the Box, then is the Ta-
ble in the fame Pofitionj and if, thro’ Point E,
you by the Help of any Line, on the Frame
draw a Line parallel to that Line, it fhall al-
fo lie parallel with the Needle, and be the

F 3 tru6

70 Infir umental Inflruclions

true North and South Line 5 to this Line at
right Angles, at Point E draw another Line,
for the Line of Eaft and Weft.

>y,s SJ./X \w\v// \'V/VV/ v-'A w vv/ xvvv vv \w NV«vy/x.v«

T/;£ Theodolite.

AS the Horizon (which is a great Circle of
the Sphere) is, according to the beft of
Oblervarions, divilible into 360 equal Parts
call’d Degrees, each Degree containing 60 0-
ther Parts call’d Minutes : So the Theodolite
is a round Inftrument, reprefenting the Hori-
zon, and divided into 360 Degrees number’d
at every tenth Degree, and each Degree fub-
divided into Halves and Quarters anfwering to
3oand 15 Minutes. It has two Diameters crof-
ting each otherat right Angles, whofe Extremi-
ties reprefent the 4 Cardinals Points N. E. S.
W. On the Center of thefe plays a moveable
Diameter, whofe Ufe is to give any intermedi-
ate Number of Degrees, with one of the fix’d
Diameters, where the Quantity is lefs, or
more than 90.

The Line, which reprefents North and South,
paffes thro’ the Points of 180 and 360, and
that Line (and, confequently, the Inftrument)
is rightly plac’d, when, by moving about the
Inftrument, the Needle in the Box plac’d in
the Center, lies on the fame Points.

To the fix’d Diameter, cutting into 180
and 360 Degrees, and to the moveable one
(which for the Future we will call 7 be Index )

are

V

for Gardeners, Szc. 71

are fix’d perpendicular Sights for cutting Ob-
Objeds. The whole Inftrument is fuftain’d,
as a plain Table is, and its Lfe follows in the
Survey of Field A B C D, preceding.

Place the Inftrument at Point E, the Index
lying on the Diameter, cutting i3o and 360
Degrees, and turn it about horizontally, ’til
the Needle hang due North and South, and
the two fix’d Diameters fhall then anfwer the
Lines N. S. and W. E,

Meafure from Station E, to the four Angles,
as has been taught, then direct the Sights of
the Index to Point A, which will cut 6 Deg.
30 Min. (reckon’d from the Weft Point of the
central Line of the Diameter, reprefenting, E.
and W.) Point B will cut 69 Deg. reckon’d
from the aforefaid Pointy Point C will cut
151 Deg. 30 Min. reckon’d from the fame
Point 5 but Point D will cut 95 Deg. which,be-
ing in another Semicircle, you are therefore to
reckon from the Point of Eaft in the Inftru-
ment.

Thefe Sides and Angles being thus found,
your E'leld-Book will ftand as follows.

Angles

D.

M.

C.

L

A

B

C

D

6

69

151

95

3°

30

0 1
3

2

2

X

5i

90

From

7 z Instrumental Infir uttions

From whence plot your Field, in this Man-
ner. In any Part of your Paper draw a Line
N S, for your North and South Line, or Me-
ridian Line 5 crofs it, at right Angles, in any
Point, let it be at Point E, and draw the
Line W E for your Eaft and Welt Line $ fo
fhall thofe two Lines reprefent the two fix’d
Diameters of the Inftrument. On W E lay
the Diameter of the Protraftor, with its Cen-
ter on E, (the Point of meeting of the two
Lines N S and W E) Angle A being 6 De-
grees. 30 Minutes 5 make a Dot in the Pa-
per, againft that Quantity, and from Point
E, thro’ that Dor, draw an occult Line
E A at Pleafure, diftance E A, being 3 Ch. fet
3 Ch from E A; Angle B is 69 Deg. which
prick off your Protraftor, and draw the occult
Line E B, which being 2 Ch. 14 Li. fet that
Quantity from E to B, and draw A B$ Angle
C being 1 5 1 Deg. 30 Min. prick it off, and
draw E C, which being 2 Ch. 5 1 Li. fet that
Quant.from E to C,and draw B C$ Ang.D is 95
Deg. which being in another Semicircle, place
your Protraftor on W. E. with the Semicircle
downwards, and pricking off 95 Deg. draw
the occult Line E D, which being x Ch. 90
Li. fet it off from E to D, and draw A D.

This Survey imagines the Field to be a Le-
vel, but in Regard the Surveyor may be to
feek when he meets with an hilly one, let A
B C D be fuch a Feild, and therein the Hill
O. Fig. VI.

Place

a

i

I

for Gardeners, &c. 73

Place the Inftrument in any Angle thereof,
A, and the Needle regarding North and
South $ let the Index cut a Mark at B, in 47
Deg. N. E. (reckon’d from the North Point
in the Inftrument.) Meafure A B. 6 Ch. 35
Li. Meafure alfo to the Foot of the Hill A g

3 Ch. 35 Li. cut a Man, or Mark, at g, in
70 Deg. N. E.

Your Inftrument at B, the Index cuts C in
85 Deg. 30 Min S. E. (from the South Point
of the Inftrument ) meafure B C 1 Ch. 50
Li. meafure B s 65 Li. cut a Man at S, in 1 5
Deg. 30 Min. S E.

The Inftrument at C, the Index cuts a Man
atD, in 17 Deg. 30 Min. S. E. (from the
South Point of the Inftrument ) meafure CD

4 Ch. 10 Li. meafure C w 85 Li. cut a Man
at w, in 41 Deg. S. W.

Meafure D A 7 Ch. 44 Li. meafure D u
1 Ch. 72 Li. cut a Man at u, in 55 Degrees
N. W.

From whence this is your Field-Book.

Angles, j

D.M,

\ Hearings

Sides,

C. L.

Offetl
to the

Hill

C.lJ

!

D.M.

1

Bear.

ings.

A

47

NE

AB

6

85

A g

3

35

70

.

NE

B

85

30

SE

BC

1

50

B s

65

15

30

S E

C

17

30

SE

CD

4

i°

C w

—

85

41

S W

D

•— 1

— -

iDA

7

44

D u

I

72

55

—

N W

Pro -

74

Inftrumental Jnflruclions

ProtraBion of this Work.

Draw an Eaft and Weft Line, A R, at
Pleafure 5 place t he Diameter of the Frotra&or
therein, and its Center on any Point therein
A : prick off 47 Deg. (reckon’d from the
Point of 90 Degrees in the Inftrnment) N. E.
and draw A B : fet 6 Ch. 35 Li. from A to B.

Make an Eaft, and Weft Line to run thro’
B, place the Diameter thereon, and its Center
in B : prick off 85 Degrees go Minutes (reck-
on’d from the Point of 90 Degrees, S. E.) and
draw B C 3 fet 1 Ch. 50 Li. from B to C.

Make an Eaft and Weft Line to run thro’ C,
place the Diameter thereon, and its Center on
G: prick off 17 Degrees go Minutes, (reck-
on’d from the Point of 90 Degres S. E.) and
draw CD: fet 4 Ch. 10 Li. from C to D.

Draw DA of Courfe, which will appearto
be 7 Ch. 44 Li.

T.hus have you the Shape of the Field, and,
in Order to get that of the Hill, the Inftru-
ment being in Point A, the Bearing to g, the
Foot of the Hill, was 70 Degrees N. E. which
prick off, and draw A g 3 fet g Ch. g5 Lines
from A to g, the other Points, S w u, being
found as eafily by referring to the Field-book.
I make the Foot of the Hill to run through
gS w u, and fhadow it, as in the Figure, to
denote that it is an Hill.

To

for Gardener s, &c. 7 5

To find the Contents of this Field, draw
the Bafe-Line A C 7 Ch. 45, and Perpendi-
culars B w 95 Li. D w 3 Ch. 95 Li, and then
the Work will ftand as follows :

BafeAC- 7 45 perp.{° 95 B w
^03 95 D w

4- 3 73

4 90
3 72

980

3430

1470

Acre 1)82280
4

Roods 3)29120
40

Perches 11)64800

The aforefaid Method of finding the Shape
of a Field, by going about the fame, being of
great Ufe, 1 advife the Surveyor to note it
well.

Numerical Inflruclions

To plot a Field, whofe Largenefs and Irregula-
rity will not permit its being taken at one
Station.

By the Plain Table.

Fig. 7. T ET the irregular Polygon A B
I , C D E F be fuch a Field, and
the firft Station at Point G. Your Inftru-
ment being plac’d and prepar’d, as has been
directed, direct your Index and Sights to A,
and draw G A, meafure G A 2 ch. 93 li,
cut B, and draw G B, meafure G B 2 ch. 65
li. ; cut C, and draw G C, meafure GC
0 ch. 8 li. 5 cut F, and draw G F, meafure
G F 2 ch. 47 li. ; draw A B, B C, and F A.

At G dired your Sights and Index to any
Point, or Perfon, Handing in any Point* R,
and draw G R, meafure G R 3 ch. 4 6 li.

Point R is rny fecond Station, where, pla-
cing my Iuftrument, I put the Index on the
Line G R, and move it about, ’til I cut a
Mark or Perfon Handing at G, and there
fcrewing it faH, ’tis prepar’d for taking the
reH of the Field.

Dired your Index and Sights to D, and
draw R D, meafure R D 2 ch. 50 li. ; cut Ajir
gle E, and draw RE, meafure RE 1 ch. 83
li.; cut F, and draw RF, meafure RF 3 ch.

. 25

rig-, vn .

for Gardeners, &c.’ f j

25 li. Now draw CD, D E, EF, and the
Shape of the Field appears.

This figure is divilible into the Trapezium
A B C F, by the Line C F, and the Refidue
into the Triangle F D E, by the fame Line.

Draw the Bafe-Line B F, which on your
Scale is 5 ch. xo li. : draw the Perpendicu-
lar C Q, which is 1 ch. 85 li. : draw the Per-
pendicular A O, which is 2 ch. 87 li. $ fet
thefe feveral Diftances on their proper Lines.

As for the Triangle FDE, its Bafe is al-
ways its longeft Side F D, F D is on the Scales
5 ch. 5 li. $ from E draw the Perpendicular
E K, which is 3 ch. 5 fet thefe Diftances on
their proper Lines. They who are curious
to fee the Entries of thefe Diftances into the
Field-Book, may take it as follows :

Angles •

Me a f iires.

ift G atG

C.

L.

A

2

93

B

2

65

C

2

8

F

2

47

2d © at R

Stationary

Diftance.

3 ch. 46 li.

D

2

50

E

1

83

F

25

7 8 Inflrumental InflruSlions

To find the Content of this Field \

As in Trapezia we multiply half the
Bafe by the Sum of the two Perpendiculars,
fo in Triangles, F D E, we multiply the
Bafe F D by the Perpendicular E K, and
take half the Produd for its fuperficiai Con-
tent.

Here note, that, where a Field confifts of
two or more Trapezia, and Triangles, you
muft make a feparate Work for each, and the
Sum of thofe Operations will be the Content
of the Field.

See the Work of the Field before us :

Trapezium-Bafe B F 5 io P/, c2 87 AO

rerp,ii 85 CQ.

f 2 55

4 72

2 55

2360

2360

944

Acre 1)20360
4

/ Roods 0)81440

40

Perches 32)57600

Triangle

for Gardeners, &c. 79

Triangle — - Bafe F D 5 5 Perp. E K 3 o

3 o

Acres 1650
4

Roods 6600
40

Perches 2)64000

Acre. Roods. Fere.

C»-nt of. he °

32

2

Content of the whole Field-7
A B C D E F S 1 0 34

By the Theodolite.

Place the Inftrument at firft Station G,
the Index on the Diameter cutting 180 and
360 Degrees, and the Needle on the Line of
North and South $ meafure from Station G to
Angles A B C F, as has been taught $ then
direft the Index to A, and it will cut 6 Deg.
(reckon’d from the Weft Point of the Inftru-
ment) to B 77 Deg. to C 177 Deg. and to F
70 Deg. 30 Min. which being in another Se-
micircle, mull be reckon'd from the Point of
Eaft in the Inftrument. Thus much for the
Trapezium, now for the Triangle.

The

8o Inftrument al InftruEiions

The fecond Station being R, I alfo direct
the Index to R, which cuts 6 Degrees, which,
being in the lower Semicircle, muft be reck-
kon’d from the Point of Eaft. The Inftru-
ment being at R, move the whole Inftrument,
(not the Index) ’til the Needle hang over the
North and South Line, as before 5 direct the
Index to D, and it will cut 86 Deg. to E 179
Deg. and to F 145 Deg. (which being in ano-
ther Semicircle, muft be reckon'd from the
Point of Eaft in the Inftrument.)

From whence your Entries in the Field-
Book will ftand as follows :

Angles.

D.

M.

c.

L.

ift © at G

A

6

2

93

B

77

2

65

G

177

2

8

F

Stationary

70

30

2

47

Declina-

tion —

6

Stationary
Diftance —

3

46

D

86

—

2

5°

E

1 79

—

1

83

F

145

—

3

25

From whence pro trad the Field in this
Manner: In any Part of your Paper draw a
Line N S, for your North and South Line,

or

for Gardeners, &■ c. 8 1

or Meridian Line of the Trapezium ; crofs it
at right Angles in any Point, let it be at
Point G, and draw the Line W E for your
Eaft and Well Line : On W E lay the Dia-
meter of the Protractor, with its Center on
G, Angle A being 6 Degrees, B'77 Degrees,
C 177 Degrees; prick them off, and draw G
A, G B, G C ; but Angle F being in another
Semicircle, place the Semicircle downwards
on W E , prick off 70 Degrees 30 Minutes,
and draw GF; at the fame Time draw the
ftationary Declination 6 Degrees, and draw
G R. On G A fet oft 2 ch. 93 li.; on G B
5 ch. 10 li. and draw AB; on G C 2 ch. 8
li. and draw B C 5 and on G F 2 ch. 47 li. and
draw F A.

The ftationary Diftance being 3 ch. 4 6 If.
fet it from G to R, in which Point R draw-
ing a new. Meridian Line N S, crofs’d at
right Angles in Point R, with the new Eaft
and Weft Line WE; onWE place your Prc-
tradtor with the Center of its Diameter on R,
Angle D being 86 Degrees, E 179 Degrees;
prick them off, and draw RD, RE; Angle F
being in another Semicircle, place the Semi-
circle downwards, and then prick off Angle
F 145 Degrees, and draw offRF: On RD
fet off 2 ch. 50 li. ; on RE 1 ch 83 li. and
draw D E, and on R F 3 ch. 25 li. and draw
E F, which compleats the Field.

To

G

8 z Infir umental Inflruttions

To ffieafiire a Wood, which , by Reafon of the

Thicknefs of Trees , can only be me a fur d on

the Out fide.

F i g* 8i np H E Truth of this Work
X depending wholly on the Ex-
adnefs of Angles, I fhall ufe the Theodolite

only-

Let the irregular Polygon A B C D E F be
fuch a Wood $ place the inftrument at A, and
turn it about, ’til thro’ the fix’d Sights you
efpy Angle B, and then fcrew it faft. Dired
the Index to F, the Index will then cut 104
Degrees j remove to B, meafuring A B 3 ch.
35 li. At B let the fix’d Sights cut Angle C,
•and the Index Angle A 80 Degrees, fo fhall
Angle B be 80 Degrees. Remove to C, mea-
luring B G 2 ch. 5U. ^ at G let the fix’d Sights
cut Angle D, and the Index Angle B 200 De-
grees, which exceeding a Semicircle, or 180
Degrees, is therefore an outward Angle, and
mull: be noted thus > . Remove to D, mea-
furing G D 1 ch. 44 li. $ at D let the fix’d
Sights cut Angle E, and the Index Angle C,
97 Degrees 30 Minutes, fo fhall Angle D be
97 Degrees 30 Minutes. Remove to E, mea- i
furing DE 2 ch. li.$ at E let the fix’d
Sights cut Angle F, and the Index Angle D, :
120 Degrees ‘30 Minutes, fo fhall Angle E bs
1 20 Degrees 30 Minutes. Remove to F, mea-
furing EF 1 ch. 75 li. j at F let the fix’d
Sights cut Angle A, and the Index Angle E,
r 124

O

>

<r

for Gardeners, &c.

124 Degrees, which is the Quantity of An-
gle F. Meafure F A 3 ch.

From whence the Field-Book will Hand
thus-*

Angles.

D.

M.

Sides

c.

L.

A

104

—

A B

3

25

B ,

80

—

B C

‘2

5

C

2 00

C D

1

'44

D

97

30

DE

2

65

E

120

3°

EF

1

75

F

124

—

FA

3

To protraB this Work.

Draw a Line at Pleafure, as A B, on which
apply the Diameter of your Protractor, with
its Center on A, Angle A being 104 Degrees^
(to be reckon’d from the left End of the Dia-
meter, which, for the future, 1 fhall call the
North End, as the oppofite End will be the
South) prick off that Quantity, and draw A
F, which, with A B, conftitutes your Angle
A 5 fet 3 ch. 25 li. from A to B. Angle B
being 80 Degrees, place the Center of the Di-
ameter on B, and move the Inftrument about,
’til A B cut 80 Degrees, to be reckon'd from
the North End of the Diameter $ prick off a
Line by the Help of the Diameter^ and draw
B C. From B to C fet 2 ch. 5 li. Angle C is
G 2 noted

84 Infinmental Inftruffions

noted to be an outward one, or more than 180
Degrees, viz. 200 Degrees ^ therefore, in or- i
der to protrad it, apply the Center of the Di- !
airieter on C, and againft 20 Degrees, (the Ex- i
cefs above a Semicircle) to be reckon’d from
the South End, make a Mark ^ then bring the
Diameter of the Inftrument to that Mark, (its I
Center {till on C) and at the North End prick
a Mark, and draw CD; fet 1 ch. 45 li. from ;
C to D, fo lhall Angle C be 200 Degrees. An- 1
gle D is 97 Degrees 3c Minutes ; place the ;
Center of the Diameter on D, and move the
Inftrument about, ’til 97 Degrees 30 Minutes, ]
reckon’d from the North End, cut C D, ex- j
tended for this Purpofe to O; at the faid 1
North End of the Diameter make a Mark, and
draw D E, fo ftiall Angle D be 97 Degrees 30
Minutes. Set 2 ch. 65 li. from D to E, An-
gle E is 1 2C Degrees 30 Minutes, the Center
of the Diameter on E$ move it about ’til 120
Degrees 30 Minutes (reckon’d from the North
End) cut D E, extended for this Purpofe to S. I
The Diameter will then cut A F in F, fo
fhall A F become 124 Degrees, and E F 1 ch.
75 li. FA will be alfo 3 ch.

for Gardeners, &c. 85

The VVood, thus protrafled, is divifible in-
to two Trapeziums, A B C F, and C D E F,
by pteans of the Line C F 3 and the Bafes and
Perptndiculars of each being drawn and mea-
fur’d, the Work will Hand as follows.

BafeBF ^90 perpend; £1 45

* 2 45 —

3 33

■ . • 2 45

1665

1332

666

Acres . ^81585
4

Roods 3)26340

Perches 10)53600

26 Inflrumental Inflrucliom
Bafc DF 3J55 Perpeud.{ \f .

I 92

2 90
I 92

580

2610

290

Acres .)5568o

4

Roods 2)22720 |]

40

Perches 9)08800

Acr.Roo.Perc.

1 ft Trapezium o 3 10 4-

2d Trapezium 029

Content of the Wood 1 1 19

To take the Plot of a Field by the plain Tab l
by means of the Angles only.

F I g. 9. T E T the Field, to be furvey'
1 a be A B C D5 place the joint*
Frame, which is divided into 360 Degre<

' r' '/?/

*

for Gardeners, &c. 87

with that Face upwards, with the Point of
360 Degrees next you j the Center of thofe
Divifions will therefore be the Hole in the
Middle of the Inftrument: In any Part of the
Field, as at O, place the Inftrument, and
move it about, ’til the Needle lie on the
North and South Line of the Chart, and then
fcrew the Table fall, fixing a Pin in the
aforefaid Hole $ dired the Index and Sights
thereby to A, and the Quantity cut on the
Frame, will be 25 Degrees $ to B 97 Degrees
30 Minutes, to C 165 Degrees 30 Minutes,
and to D 254 Degrees 30 Minutes. Meafure
O A 2 ch. 25 li., OB 3 ch. 18 1L, O C 2 eh.
40 li., and O D 2 ch. 70 li. 5 and then thefe
will be your Field-Notes ;

Angles*

D.

M.

Lengths

a

Lj

A

25

O A

2 !

1 25

B

97

30

© B

3

[ 18

C

165

3°

© c

2

1 40

D

254

3°

© D

2

70

From whence protrad the Work thus:
Draw the Lines W E and N S at right An-
gles 5 becaufe the Line N S reprefents the
Line palling thro’ the Points of 360 and 180
Degrees in the Table, the Diameter of the
Inftrument mult therefore be plac’d on S N,
and its Center in O $ and then prick off the
Angles, A 25 Degrees, B 97 Degrees, C 16%

G 4 Degrees

83 Inflrumental Inflruciions

Degrees 30 Minutes: As for D, it being above
a Semicircle, viz. 254 Degrees 30 Minutes,
you nrnft move the Semicircle round on O ’til -
the Diameter come again on N S : prick off
74 Degrees 30 Minutes, Supplement to 254
Degrees 30 Minutes, and draw © A, © B, 1
© C, © D, on which Lines fet off the Quan-
tities noted in the Field-Book, and draw A B, :
B C, C D, and D A.

6

fit. & Wi

^*T OgT H** 'If* ■»»* ■,»» -,,t

.*» '** « >-» •;*,

a- ,;<■

Til ftrvey a Road by the Theodolite.

Fig. ip. r ET SCRO and NEFG be
I , a Road to be furvey’d: Begin at
either End, fuppofe A, where place the In-
ftrument, the Needle hanging over the Points
of North and South in the Chart -5 let a Man
go as far as you can fee, or the next Bend of
the Road, B, and direct your Index to cut
him in 1 1 Degrees 30 Minutes, N W. Mea-
fure the Off-fet to tire Left, A S, 661 i., and
the Off-fet to the Right, A G, 75 li. Mea-
fure A B r ch. 90 li. an ffoufe to the Right at
A.

Place the Inftrument at B, in its former .
Pofition ^ let a Man go to C, another Bend 5
cut. him with the Index in 10 Degrees, NE;
meafure B C (the ftationary Distance) 2 ch.
32 li. meafure alfe the Off-fet to the Left,
B O, 58 li, j and tp the Right, B F, 85 li, !

Remove

'<?/ & .

JPay.St? .

. .

for Gar deners, &c. 89

Remove to C, placing the Inftrument as be-
fore : Let the Man remove to D, the End of
the Road $ cut him with the Index in 30 De-
grees, N. VV. 5 meafure CD 2 ch. 55 li. ^
meafure alfo the Off-fet to the Left, C R, 58
Ji., and C E, Off-fet to the Right, 85 li. at C,
an Houfe to the Left, and to the Right a Lane
tending thus, At D meafure the Off-fets
D©6oli., andDN65li. , and draw R O
and E N. From whence may arife this Ta-
ble:

Angles and Obfervations.

Stationary

Diftances.

C. L.

_ a r f left 66 ft-

©A Off-fet {right7J

An Houfe to the Right.

■■G B, N. W. 11 Deg. 30 Min.

1

9 0

Off-fet { lefL t8 \u
c right 85 It.

© C, N. E. 10 Degrees. .

Off-fet {lcf< J? J|-
t-right 85 li.

An Houfe to the Left, a Road
to the Right fs

To the End D, 2 Deg. N. W.

Off-fet {Jef? 6° !'•

Iright 85 li.

2

2

32

55

I

90 Inflrumental Inflruttions

> *.

I reckon the Quantity of thefe Angles from
the Point of North in the Inftrument $ they
who pleafe, may reckon their Complements
to 90° from the Points orEaft or Weft, and
’twill be the fame Thing. If you would know
the Length of this Road, add up the feveral
ftationary Diftances, apd their Sum is 5 ch.
77 li. 5 which, from 'he following Table, ap-
pears to be 126 Yards, hr of a Yard, which
is fomewhat more than half a quarter -of a
|4ile, as isalfo evident from the Table,

J

for GARDENER’S, &C. $)l

(A T A B L E, reducing
Chains and Links into!
Yards and Parts ; and
contrary, from -V of a
Yardto 2200 Yards, and
from i Link to ioo Ch.

Tards. Parts Li

1

2
5

1 1

22

44

66

88

1 io

2 20

44°

66o

88o

xioo

1320

1540

17 60
1980
2200

.22

•45

.68

•37

•75

•5

1

2

3

4

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

1

2

3

62

2.5

25

50

The

\

C) Z Infirumental InJiruSiions

The life of the foregoing TABLE.

' What is the Length of 5 Chains 77 Links ?

Yards.

Againfl 5 Chains is • — 1 10

50 Links 11

25 Links — 5 5 '

2 Links o 45

Sum 126 95

Contrary: In 126 Yards r%., how many
Chains and Links?

Cb. Li.

Againft no Yards is- 5 o

x i Yards p — o 50

5 Yards — o 25

| 6 Parts o 3

2 Parts o 1

5 79

To protraB the aforefaid Road.

Thro’ any Point, as A, draw an Eaft and
Weft Line, S A G, the Diameter lying with
its Center on A and S A G, cutting 90 De-
grees in the Limb or Semicircle j I fay the Di-
ameter fhall then reprefent the North and
South Line 5 and becaufe Station B cuts 11
Degrees 30 Minutes North Weft, let the Se-
micircle lye to the Weft from the upper or
North End of the Diameter, reckon 11 Deg.
go Minutes, which prick off, and draw the

occult

ppr? ' ' "

/

i

I

Fay. #3

/oL‘2,

Tig*. XI.

V V

%

-^Fafcr.

for Gardeners, &c. 93

occult Line A B, of any Length, at Plea fure.
Set 66 li. from A to S, and 75 li. from A to
G $ fet alfo x ch. 90 li. from A to B $ from B
to Off-fet C fet 58 li. , and to F 85 li. 5 draw
S C and G F 5 at G draw an Houle.

Thro1 B draw another Eaft and Weft Line,
C B F, whereon place the Inftrument as be-
fore ^ but in regard the Angle at B, made by
C, is 10 Degrees North Eaft, let the Semi-
circle lie to the Eaft, and from theNorthEnd
of the Diameter reckon xo Degrees, which
prick off, and draw the occult Line B G :
Set 2 ch. 32 li. from B to C $ fet 58 li. from
C to R, and 85 li. from C to E, and draw C
R and F E 5 at R draw an Houfe, and at E
draw a Lane, tending thus,

Thro’ C draw an Eaft and Weft Line, R G
E, as before ^ and becatife Objed D cuts 2
Degrees, N. W. place the Inftrument as you
did at A, and prick off 2 Degrees ^ draw C D,
whereon fet 2 ch. 55 li. ^ at D to O fet 60 li.
and to N 85 li., and draw R O and E N.

To take a Dijlance accejjible or inacceffible .

F10. n.TT’ROM E or F, I would know the
iP Diftance to the Wind-mill at G.

Being at Point E, fet up a Mark at Point F,
meafure E F 1 Ch. 16 Li. your Theodolite
at E5 bring the Needle to the North and South
Points of the Chart, and fcrew the Inftru-
ment faft $ dired the moveable Index to cut
the Wind-mill in 94 Deg. reckon'd from the
Point of Weft, Remove

94 Infir umental Infir uB ions

Remove any fmall Diftance as to Point
F, where bringing the Needle to the North
and South Points, as before, fcrew the Inftru-
ment fall, and direft the moveable Index to
cut the fame Wind mill in 75 Deg. reckon’d
from the Point of Eafi. Set 1 Ch. 16 Li;
from E to F, and then you may find the oc-
cult Triangle EFG, and alfo either Diftance
1’ G, or E G, thus :

Draw a Line at Pleafure F E, for an Eafi
and Weft Line, aiTume therein the Point E
for your firft Place of Obfervation 5 and fet-
ting 1 Ch. 16 Li. from E to F Points, F is
your fecond Place of Obfervation.

Place the Diameter of your Protractor on
F E, with its Center on E 3 prick off 94 Deg.
reckon’d from the Weft, or left End of the
Diameter, and draw a Line at Pleafure E G.

The Diamerer of the Inftrument being ftill
on E F, but its Center on F, prick off 75
Deg. reckon’d from the Eaft, or right End of
the Diameter, and draw F G3 the Interfeftion
of the two Lines E G and F G, gives
Point G, the Place of ftanding of the Wind-
mill.

The Diftance of E G, taken from the Scale
by which you fet off E F, will appear to be
6 Ch. 35 Li. F G, taken from the fame Scale,
will be 6 Ch. 55 Li.

We by this Time fuppofe the PracHtionef
tolerably acquainted with the Methods of
Purveying, protrafting, and adjufting the
Contents of ariy (ingle Field 3 and alfo of Pur-
veying,

for Gardeners, &c. 95

veying, protracting, and finding the Length
of a Road $ therefore we will conclude this
Fart, by letting him into the Method of ta-
king and protrading a whole Mannour.

Walk over the Mannour two or three times,
the better to know where to begin, and how
to proceed in your Works to the belt Advan-
tage ; at which Time you may take fuch
Notes and Memorandums, as you think pro-
per, of all Roads, Lanes, Butting-hedges,
Waters, Houfes, &c. The Truth of this
'Survey depending on the exad taking of An-
gles, and it confiding of fo many Parts as we
imagine cannot be taken in the Fields, on one
.Piece of Paper, our Inftrument fhall be the
Theodolite.

Fig. 12. Ixing the Theodolite at A, and

the Needle hanging over the

Meridian Line, let a Man Hand at the firffe
Bend of the Road B, dired your Index to him,
and it will cut 9 Degrees N. E. which note
down in your Field-Book, with thisMark 0 A
9 Degrees N. E. $ meafure the Off-fets to the
right A G 32 li., left AO 3 5 li., and note
them in your Book. Meafure AB4 ch. 5 li.
The Inftrument fix'd at B, as before it was at
A, with the Index cut a Man at the next Bend
C 1 5 Degrees, Off-fets to the left, BO, 35
li*$ to the right, B Q., 35 li. a butting Hedge

on

9 6 Tnftrumental InflruSlions

on each Side, B. Meafure B C 3 ch. 45 In i
at 1 ch. 89 li. from B, viz. at I, a Bend to
the left, 84 li., to the right 4 6 li. 3 at C Oft'-
fets to the left 45 li., to the right 32 li., a
But Hedge to the right and left.

The Inftrument fix’d at C, let the Index
cut a Man at D, in 15 Degrees 30 Minutes
N. E. Meafure C D 1 ch. 72 li., at D Off-fets
to the left 35 li., to the right 35 li. * at D a
But-Hedge to the right.

The Inftrument fix’d at D, let the Index
cut a Man at E, in 13 Degrees N. W. Mea-
fure D E 1 ch. 46 li. * at E Off-fets to the
right 45 li., to the*left 47 li. 3 at E a But-
Hedge to the left.

The Inftrument fix’d at E, cut the Center
of the Gate at M in 18 Degrees 30 Minutes
N. E. Meafure E M 2 ch. 18 1: , Oft-fets to
the right 50 li-, to the left 4 By this _

Means one or more Sides of each Field, on
each Side the Road, will, on Protraftion, ap-|
pear to be given 3 which fliortening the Work,

I (hall not enter the Fields themfelves, ’til the
Lane to the left of the Road be furvey’d. In
order wb^eto, at A, your firft Station,
placing your Inftrument as you did original- ■
ly, let fome high Qbjcd be plac’d at E, the
Enteranceof the Lane, which cutting with
your Index in 78 Degrees N. W. meafure A E
(if you can) 7 ch. 34 li. 3 becaufe on Protra-
dion, the Point E will be thereby found.

I

The

for Gardeners, &zc. $$

The Inttrument fix’d at E, the Index cuts
ft in 7 Degrees N. E ; Offfets to the right 23
li., to the left 14 li. E R is 3 ch. 35. li. 5 at
R the Index cuts S in 31 Degrees 30 Minutes
N. W5 OfF-fets to the left 15 li., to the right
20 lis AtR a But- Hedge to the right, RS

2 ch. 60 li.

At S the Index cuts T in 7 Degrees N. E. ^
OfF-fets to the right and left 20 li. each 5 S T

3 ch; 55 li..

At T the Index cuts O in 7 Deg. A7. W. OfF-
fets to the right and left 20 li. each ; TO 2
ch. 70 li. 5 at T two But-Hedges meeting in a
Point to the right.

At O, where the OfF-fet left is 23 li , the
Index cuts Z in 70 Degrees N. E 5 OZ is 5 ch.
63 li. At Z the OfF-fets, right and left, are
12 li. each.

In furveying up O Z, I obferv’d a Windmill
in Windmill field, to find the Point where-
on it (lands, at Z I place my Inflrumenr,
with the Needle on the North and South Line,
as before, and the Sights will cut it in 49 De-
grees S. W. (reckon’d from the Point of Wefi)
At O the Index cuts the fame Windmill, in 6
Degrees S. E. reckon’d from the Point of Eafh

By furveying this Lane, we have one or
more Sides of each Field on one Side of it given.

We now enter the Fields themfelves, begin-
ning with

Hunt’s Field.

In meafuring the Road-Side G Q_was given.
To find a Station for your Inftrument, work
H thus ;

5 6 Infir umental Infiruttions

thus : Meafure 50 Ji. from G to W 5 let two
Men ftand, one at G, the other at W, each
holding an End of the Chain $ let the Survey*
our take the Middle of the Chain, and ftretch
it out ftrait to r (thus w r is 40 li., and G r
60 li.) i, at r place the Inftrument, the Index
on the Diameter 5 turn the whole Inftrument
about, ’til thro’ the Sights you cut Angle G,
(fo is the Inftrument fix’d) then direft the
Index to Angle N, and the Degrees cut {hall
be 29, 30 (reckon’d from the North End of
the Diameter) 5 meafure r N 6 ch. 20 li. 5
meafure N, G 6ch. 75 li. 5 meafure N W (a
Side alfo of Outer-field) 3 ch 53 li* 5 meafure
W Q_ (alfo a Side of Grub-field ) 3 ch. 65 li. f,
G Q_the fame as A B, which is already noted
to be 40'h. 5 li.

Outer-field. Side W N is given, meafure
N X 6 ch. 92 li., X Y 3 ch. 47 li., Y VV 2 ch.

80 li. 4

Grub-field. Sides Q_N, Q,W, and W Y ,
given, meafure NY 4 ch. 40 li-

Star-field. Sides N W and N Y given, mea-
fure Y K 3 ch. 32 li. (of which from Y to the
Center of the Wood-door, 1 ch. 66 li.) and
W K 3 ch. 16 li.

Well-pond field. Where, in meafuring Star-
field, we had Part of Side W S given, viz. W
K 3 ch. 16 li. $ meafure the Remainder K S 3
ch. 24 ii-i therefore W S is 6 ch. 40 li. K S
bounds the Wood. Meafure S T 2 ch. 30 li.
T O bounds the River at O come to a fmall
Cut into the Pond j meafure TOi ch. 60 li

for Gardeners, &c. 97

S is the other Side of the Cut $ meafure S P i
ch. 80 ii. 5 at P come to the Gate and Road $
therefore P Z and Z W' (equal to E M and E
are already given. On a Line W O ftands
a Well, 1 ch. 35 li. from W 5 from the Well
to the Brink of the Pond 1 ch. 10 li. 5 from K
(in Side W S) to the Pond 70 li. 5 from Angle
S to the Pond 2 ch. 15 li. ; Length of the Cut
into the Pond, 65 li. Breadth 17 li.

The Wildernefs. S K, K Y, and Y X, given,
meafure S X 3 ch. 20 li.

Fields on the left Side of the Ro&d.

Had not Point E of the Lane been found’, #hen
we were at Point A of the Road, we muff, oil
entering Brick-field , have proceeded to ' find a
Station for the Inftrument, as we did at r in
Hunt’ s field.

Brickfield. Side O O given ^ meal are OX
3 ch. 40 li. ^ meafure X T 2 ch. 45 li. •, mea-
fure T O 4 ch. 60 li.

Lane-field. Side TX given, meafure X C
3 ch. 65 li. C S is given, (being equal to E
R) meafure S T.

Clay-field, Sides, ST, TO, O H, H L,
given, meafure L S, from L to D a But-
Hedge, 3 ch. 50 li., and from D to S 2 ch.
82 li. $ therefore L S 6 ch. 32 li.

Here we fhall obferve, that tho’ the Sides,
OH, H L, are more than B C, and therefore
fhould be meafur’d, yet, being enabled by the
Off-fet I H to give the Point H, I can draw

H 2 HL

9? In fir ament al InflruUions

L H and G H, and ’tis done 5 but they who
pleafe may, for more Certainty, meafure
rhofe two Sides, and fet them down amongft
the reft.

Lamb-field. Sides, S D, S R, R B, given,
meafure b E 3 ch. 23 li., and ED 2 ch. 73

li.

Caw-field. Sides, Y S, S L, L D, and
D E, given, meafure E Y 4 ch. 85 ii.

Mutton-field. Sides given, BE, E Y, Y O, :
meafure OS 1 ch. 55 li. and SB 6 ch. 93 li.
O S bends fomewhat, and bounds the Lane or
Pafiage; Breadth of the Lane, or Paflage 25
li.

Windmill-field. Sides Z O, OB, and B S.
meafure Z S 2 ch. 92 li. In this Field a Wind 1
mill, of which more on Protraftion. ZS j!
little bending. Breadth of the River 63 li. : 1
over it a boarded Bridge to the Manfion
Houfe 5 Breadth of the Manfion-Houfc 1 ch
40 li. Trees planted dofe to the River, ant
on each Side of the Houfe.

From all which Work your Field-Book ma}
ftand as follows.

I

I

Station

for Gardeners, &c. 99

Stations and Remarks.

Road to the Houfe.

ift. © A, N. E. * — —

0ff-f«{!o,hekf !,ii.

AB

2d. © B, N. W. — - —

Oflrr-.i’to the left 35 li.
Ott'let1.to the right 35 li.

At 1 ch. 89 li. from B. Off-fet
to the left 84 li. to the right
4 6 li.

B C — *

3d. G C, N. E. —

offf .cto the left 45 li.
Utt'letito the right 32 li.

CD

4th. ©D,N.W.

OfF-fetf t0 ^ lef\ 35 H.
E to the right 35 li.

DE

5th. © E, N. E.

off.fetf “ ;!;e « |i-

Eto the left 47 li.

E M comes to the Gate <?f the
Houfe —

Offfet4*to the ri§ht 5oIi*
letlto the left 45 li.

A fmall winding Lane to the left

* 3t M. H 3

D.M.

15

15

*3

18

30

30

c. l.

45

72

46

18

\ 00

Inftrwmental Inflruttions

Stations and Remarks. |D. jW.

Lane. ,

At © A (of the Road) cut Enter-
ance of the Lane, N. W

A E, Diftance between the tvvoj
Entries of the Road and Lane
ift oE, N. E.

78]

Off-fet{t0 the rig-ht 25 1l

ER

to the left 14 li.

ad. G R, N. W.

RS

C.l.

3d. © S, N. E.

ST

4th. ©T, N.W.

TO

5 th. © O, N. E.

Off-fet{le* 16 )u
‘-right 21 ii.

OZ

i

31]

1

30

■ 7

•

• 7

1

-7°

i

At Z Off-fet right and left 1 2 li.
Turn down to the Houfe by the
River.

At, O a Windmill in WindmiU-
field bore S. E. 6 Degrees,

84

S'

2 6c

/or Gardeners, &c. ioi

Stations and R ema rk s. I D.MJC.L:

At Z the fame Windmill bore S.
W. 42 Degrees.

Fields on the right Side of the Road.
Hunt's Field.

BelongingfG w — 50 li. onGQ
to the< w r — • 40
Station (Gr 60

© at r - — -

r N

NG

29

N W, bounding Outer -field
W Q,, bounding Grub field —
G Q., bounding the Road —

Outer-field.

W N, bounding Hunt's Field
N X, bounding a Common - —
X Y, bounding the Wildernefs
Y W, bounding Grub- field

30

Grub-field.

W Y, bounding Outer-field —
Q.W, bounding Hunt's Field-

H 4

20

75

53

65

5

53

92

47

80

80

,65

Q.N,

102 Inflrumental InflruSlh

Stations and Remarks.

Q_N, bounding the Road to the

Houfe —

N Y, bounding Star-field - — —

D.

Star field.

N Y, bounding Grub field

From Y to the Gate of the Wil-
dernefs, i ch. 66 ii.

Y K, bounding the Wildernefs

w K, bounding Well-pond-field —
W N, bounding the Road

Well-pond field.

W K, bounding Star-field , 3 ch.
16 Ji. K S, bounding the Wood

3 ch. 24 ii. therefore W S

S T, bounding the Common

From T to O, the Cut of the Ri-
ver into the Pond . —

From S, the other Side of the faid
Cut, to Angle P, to wit, S P
(at P, the Gate of the Houfe.)-

P Z, bounding the Road

Z W,alfo bounding the Road

Breadth of the Cut — .

Length of the Cut

for Gardeners, &c.

Stations apd Remarks.

From W on a Line, to O the Cut,

a Well at

From S to the Oval Pond

From W to the Pond

D.M.

The Wildernefs.

YZ, bounding Outer- field

KY, bounding Star-field

i ch .66 li. from Y to the Gate.

K S, bounding Pond-field — ?

S X, bounding the Common

Fields on the left Side of the Road ,
between it and the Lane.

Brickfield.

O O, bounding the Road

O X, bounding the Common

X T, bounding Lane-field

TO, bounding Clay field

Lane-field.

X C, bounding the Common

C S, bounding the Lane — r

104 Instrumental Infir unions

Stations and Remarks.

D.M.

ST, bounding Clay-field •

X T, bounding Brickfield

Clay-field,

T O, bounding Brickfield

S T, bounding the Lane

S L, bounding Lamb and Cow-
fields , 6 ch. 32 li. (a But-Hedge
at 3 ch. 50 li. from S to D.)
Angle at S runs up to the Lane.

Lamb-field.

S D, bounding Part of Clay field—

R S, bounding the Lane

R B, bounding the Lane

BE, bounding Mutton-field •

A But-Hedge at Angle E
ED, bounding Cow-field

Cow-field.

ED, bounding Lamb- field

D L (Remainder of S L, 6 ch, 32
li.) viz. S D is 3 ch. 50 li.

therefore D L is .

L S, bounding the Road—— — —

Stations and Remarks.

D.

S Y ditto

Y E, bounding Mutton-field

Mutton-field.

B E, bounding Lamb-field,
running up to the Lane —

E Y, bounding Cow-field-

Y O, bounding the Road

and

— 7 U

OS, a fmall Bend, bounding the
PalTage coming in at the upper

End of the Road — - —

Breadth of the fa id Paffage

B S, bounding Windmill field

Windmill-field.

S B, bounding Mutton-field j

It runs up to the lane.

B O, bounding the Lane

O Z, bounding the Lane, and
running up the Path by the River

O Z bends fomewhat

Z S, Part of the Path running by

the River *

A Windmill in the Field, whofe
Bearing was taken in meafuring
the Lane O Z, which vide.

io 6 Inflrttmental Inflrutlions

Stations and Remarks.

Along the Path to the Houfe, Z S
and SO, a River 63 li. broad :
Over it a boarded Bridge, ad-
joining to the Manfion-Houfe.

Trees planted clofe to the other
Side of the River, on each Side
the Houfe.

Rreadth of the Houfe ■ —

D.M.

■ 1

C.L.

40

The practical Surveyor will, perhaps, think
thefe Notes much too bulky ; but a Beginner
may want them, and he is at Liberty to Ihort-
en them, as he increafes his Knowledge.

To protracl the Work of this Mannour.

In this, as in the former Work, I make the
Point of 90 Degrees to pafs thro? the Eaft and
Weft Line in my Paper 5 and therefore the
Diameter becomes the North and South Line,
from which Diameter I reckon the Degrees
and Minutes of any Angle.

lour field- Book being before you, on a
Sheet of Paper draw a right Line, in any
convenient Place thereof, as O A S 5 Tor an
Eaft and Weft Line, afiume Point A therein
for your firft Station $ whereon placing the
Protractor, as aforefaid, prick off 9 Degrees,
N. E. and draw A B, of any Length j fet 4
ch. 5 li. from A to B. Thro"

for Gardeners, & c. 107

Thro’ B, the fecond Station, draw an Eaft
and Weft Line } whereon placing the Inftru-
ment, prick off 1 5 Degrees, N. \V. and draw
B C $ fet 3 ch. 45 li. from B to C.

Thro’ C, the third Station, draw an Eaft
and Weft Line} whereon placing the Inftru-
ment, prick off 15 Degrees 30 Minutes, N. E.
and draw C D 5 fet 1 ch. 72 li. from C to D.

Thro’ D, the fourth Station, draw an Eaft
and Weft Line} place the Inftrument, and
prick off 13 Degrees, N. W. and draw DEj
fet 1 ch. 46 li. from D to E.

Thro’ E, the fifth Station, draw an Eaft
and Weft Line } place the Inftrument, and
prick off 18 Degrees 30 Minutes, N. E. and
draw EM; fet 2 ch. 18 li. from E to M,
where I am come to the Gate.

Off-fets in this Road.

Firft Station, A, Off- fet to the right 32 li;
to the left 35 li., which fet from A, on each
Side, accordingly.

Second Station, B, Off- fet to the left 35 li.,
to the right 35 li. 5, draw O O and G Q.

Between the fecond and third Stations, at 1
ch. 89 li. from B Off- fet to the left 84 li., to
the right 4 6 li. } draw O H and Q.X.

Third Station, C, Off-fet to the left 45 li,,
to the right 32 li. 5 draw H L and X N.

Fourth Station, D, Off-fet to the left 35
li., to the right 35 li. j draw L S and N W.

Fifth

io8 Infer umental Infer uSt ions

Fifth Station, E, Off-fet to the right 45 li.,
to the left 47 li. 5 draw S Y and W Z.

At M, the Gate, Off fet to the right 50 li.,
to the left 45 li. } draw Y O and Z P.

We would now have begun with the Fields,
but as the Lane ftands next in Order in the
Field-Notes, we will firft difpatch that.

At Point A with the Index cut Point E, in
the Road, 78 Degrees } fix the Center of the
Protrador on A, and its Diameter to repre-
fent North and South ; and then prick off 78
Degrees, and draw A E } fet 7 ch. 34 li. from
A to E.

Point E being found, it is my firft Station.

Thro1 E draw an Eaft and Weft Line 3
whereon placing the Protrador, prick off 7
Degrees, N. 'E. and draw E R: fet 2 ch. 25
li. from E to R.

Thro’ R draw an Eaft and Weft Line ;
place the Protrador, and prick off gi Degrees
30 Minutes, N. W. and draw R S 5 fet 2 ch.
60 li. from R to S.

Thro’ S draw an Eaft and Weft Line 3 place
the Protrador, and prick off 7 Degrees, N. E.
and draw S T} fet 3 ch. 1 5 li. from S to T.

Thro’ T draw an Eaft and Weft Line 3
place the Protrador, and prick off 7 Degrees,
W. W, . and draw TO: fet 2 ch. 70 li. from T
toO.

Vo’ O draw an Eaft and Weft Line }
place the Protrador, and prick off 70 De-
grees,

for Gardeners, &c. 109

grees, N. E. $ draw O Z, and fet 5 ch. 6 3 li.
from O to Z.

Off-fets in the Lane.

Firft Station, E, Off-fet to the right 23 li.,
which fet from E to C5 to the left 14 li.,
which fet from E to L.

Second Station, R, Off-fets to the right
and left 1 5 li. each} draw L P and C S. Two
But-Hedges to the right.

Third Station, S, Off-fets to the right and
left ao li. each } draw P T and S R.

Fourth Station, T, Off-fets to the right
and left 20 li. each j draw T N and R B. Two
But-Hedges to the right.

Fifth Station, O, Off-fet to the left 16 li., .
to the right 21 li. } draw N U and B O.

At Z Off-fets to the right and left 1 2 li. 5
draw U A and O B.

In meafuring O Z, I obferv’d a Windmill
in Windmill- field, which, now I am about that
Part, I will place down, tho’ the Field be not
fully drawn.

At O I obferv’d, by my Theodolite, that it
bore S. E. 6 Degrees } wherefore place the
Protra&or at O, as you did before, and fet off
96 Degrees, which is 6 Degrees, S. E. from
the Point of Eaft, and draw O X.

At Z I make the fame Obfervation, and
finding the Windmill bears 42 Degrees, 5. W.
place the Protrador, and prick off 42 Degrees,
and draw Z X. The Interfedion of thefe two

Lines

i 1 8 inflrumental Inflruttions

Lines gives the Point of the Windmill, X 5
draw the Windmill according to its Shape.

Fields to the right of the Road.

Hmt’s-field. Herein your Station was found
at r, thus : G QJs already drawn 5 fet 50 li.
from G to W ; on W ftrike an Arch, with the
Diftance of 40 li., and on G interfed it with
60 li. : Then draw G r, which becoming the
Line whereon you lay the Diameter of the
Protrador,with its Center on r, and pricking off
29 Degrees 30 Minutes 5 (the Quantity of An-
gle N, taken at r) draw the occult Line r N 5
fet 6 ch. 20 li. from r to N 5 and then draw
G N, which is 6 ch. 75 li. N. W. being 3 ch.
53 li. : Take 3 ch. 53 li. from your Scale in
your Compaffes, and on N ftrike an Arch to-
wards W, Q.W being 3 ch. 65 li. 5 take that
Diftance from your Scale, and on Q, interfed
your former Arch, which will give Point W $
draw N W and W Q. In the Field Book I
have fet down, a fecond time, all the Sides of
each Field, which were before given, on pro-
trading any other Field, for the Surveyor’s
more fure Guide in the Profecution of his
Work 5 but he may omit it if he pleafes.

Outer-field. This Field cannot be protra-
ded, (as it will appear on Tryal) ’til we have
difparch’d Grub field 5 therefore go to

Grub-field. Sides Q_N, and Q,W, are pro-
traded. On N fweep 4 ch. 40 li. towards Y $

on

for Gardeners, &c* i i i
on W fweep 2 ch. 80 li. towards Y 5 to the
Interfedion at Y draw N Y and W Y.

Outer field. Sides YW and WN given*
On N fweep 6 ch. 92 li. towards X 5 on Y
fweep 3 ch. 47 li. towards X 5 to the Interfe-
dion at X draw Y X and N X.

Star-field . Sides NY and NW are pro-
traded. On W fweep 3 ch. 16 li. ^ towards
K and on Y fweep 3 ch. 32 li. towards K : To
the Interfedion at K draw VV K and Y K. Y
K bounding the Wildernefs, take I ch. 66 li.,
and fet it from Y to the Point of the Gate of
the fa id Wildernefs •

The Wilder?iefs. Sides W X and K Y are
protraded. On K, towards S, ftrike an Arch
with 3 ch. 24 li., towards S 5 and on X ftrike
an Arch with 3 ch. 20 li. towards S 5 to the
Interfedion at S draw K S and X S.

Well pond field. Sides S W, W Z, and Z
P, are protraded. On S, towards T, ftrike
an Arch, with the Diftance of 2 ch. 30 li. 3
P S is 1 ch. 80 li. ; Breadth of the Cut 17 li.,
and T O i ch. 60 ii.5 therefore P T is 3 ch.
57 li. On P, towards T9 ftrike an Arch
with 3 ch. 57 li., and draw S T 5 fet 1 ch.
60 li. from T to O, and 17 li. from O to S,
and 65 li. for its Length, and draw the Cut.
Meafure 2 ch. j 5 li. from Angle S, (next the
Wildernefs ) and 2 ch. 70 li. from Angle VV,
in a Line, towards O, which will give you
the two Ends of the Pond. From VV to the
Well 1 ch. 35 li.

I

Fields

1 1 z Inftrumental Inflruttions

Fields to the left of the Road, between it and
and the Lane .

Brick-field. Sides O O. On O, towards

X, fweep 3 ch. 40 li. On C (in Lane- field j
fweep 3 ch. 6 5 li. towards X j to the lnterfe-
dion draw OX in Brickfield , and CX in
Lane-field. Oh O, towards T, fweep 4 ch.
60 li., and on X, towards T, 2 ch. 45 li. -y
to the Interfedion at T draw OT and X T.

Lane field. Sides T X, X C, and C S, are
given. On S, towards T, ftrike 3 ch. 93 li.
or (which is the fame Thing) draw S T.

Clay field. Sides S T, T O, OH, H L,
given. DrawS DL. A But- Hedge to D, at
3 ch. 50 li. from S.

Lamb field. Sides SD, SR, RB, given.
On B fweep 3 ch. 23 li. towards E$ on D
fweep 2 ch. 73 li. towards E$ to the Inter-
fedion at E draw B E and D E.

Cawfield. Sides EL), DL, LS, and S

Y, given. Draw E Y, which will be found
to be 4 ch. 8 5 li.

Mutton-field. Sides BE, E Y, and Y O,
given. O S is a fmall Bend $ on O fweep I
ch. 55 li. towards S, and on B lweep 6 ch.

93

li. towards S ; to the Interfedion at S

draw O S fomewhat bending, and B S.

Windmill-field. The Point of the Windmill
has been already given, and fo have Sides ZO,
O B, and BS. On B fweep 6 ch. 93 li. to-
wards S > or (which is the feme Thing) draw

BS

t

\

. 13 .

Oyn^a^d^m, ot-S nLara menfr erf-^Jfa

for Gardeners, &c. i i 3
B S 6 ch. 93 li. a little bending, to anfwer
SO.

The Field Book implies the Grounds, which
fetch in this Mannour, to be a Common 5
wherefore the Word Common may be written
in convenient Places accordingly.

He who would give the Contents of this
Mannour in Acres, may reduce the feveral
Fields, the Road, and Lane, into Trapezia
and Triangles, and work according to the
Method I have before plainly laid down 5
and the x\nfwers of all the Operations, added
together, (ball be his grand Anfwer.

You may, if you pleafe, infert, as I have
done, the Scale by which you meafurd, toge-
ther with the Name of the Mannour, in a fair
Compartment : It may alfo, for more Beauty,
be adorn’d with tranfparent Water-Colours,
painting all Trees and Hedges of a pretty deep
green, Fields of a pale green. Waters blue.
Roads, &c* yellowy infert alfo each Field’s
Name.

A Mannour, fo drawn, may be drawn in a
b’gger or lefs Compafs, by fquaring your
Draught, and making your new Paper of the
fame Number of Squares, and then by put-
ting all into one Square, which you fee in
the Square correfpondmg with it ^ your new
Draft (hall be exafl in all Particulars.

This has been the ufual Method of contra-
fling or enlarging any Map or Plott of a Field,
or Eftare^ but the quickelt, and, I think, the
eafieft Method, is as follows which, for

I 2 more

1

1 3 4 Inflrumental InflruSlions

more Certainty and Clearnefs, I have illuftra-
ted by a Scheme in the next PJate, Fig. 13.

If you would enlarge your Map, place your
little Draught on the Middle of your Paper,
whereon you defign to draw it larger ^ and,
fixing upon one common Center, (no great
Matter where, but fomewhere in the Middle)
and extend the Angles, or radiant Lines,
with your black Lead Pencil, every where
throughout your Plott ^ as you fee the Lines
ABC, &c. are in the 13th Figure of the
the next Plate.

There are Compares to be bought, that are
larger at one End than the other, and by that
Means moreexpeditioully perform this Work 5
but if fuch are wanting, it is done by altering
the CompalTes from one Scale to another.

This, then, is the Method you are to take,
after you have extended the Radins-Umzs :
Or you may do it by the Side of the Rule on-
ly, without drawing thefe Lines ^ and, as in
the Example, the Lines A B be ico Foot,
Perches, or Chains, or any other Number,!
drawn on a Scale of 2co or xoo to an Inch y
and you are to enlarge it to 50, which is an
ufual Scale in Gardening, tho’ Learners oft:
ufe 24 or 30 Parts in an Inch.

It is very obvious, how the fame is to be
fet off upon that, and all the other Radiant
Lines ^ and by marking the Angles with 1, 2,
3, 4, &c. in Pencil, that it may be after-
ward rubb’d out, you, when all the Points
are laid down, draw the Line. But the whole

Pro-

for Gardeners, &c. ii$

Proceeding is fo plain on the Paper, that l
need not enlarge on it in Words.

And the fame Method that is taken in the
enlarging a Map, is taken in the contracting
thereof.

In order to have the more Room to begin
one’s Work, clear off ail Lines wrought, to fix
the Center in the largeft Field in the whole
Plan, be it either on one Side or the other,
fo will the Lines, in more Probability, be
clear of the little Draught $ but if they are not
clear of it, ’tis eafy, by Infpedion from given
Lines, to lay down the Angles and Interfefti-
ons, and from thence the Lines that are hid
under that Paper.

See the Method in Figure 12 of the next
Plate.

I might, in this Chapter of Inftruments,
have given the Cutts of the feveral lnftruments
to be us’d in Surveying and Gardenings but
they are now fo very well known, that I
think it needlefs 5 and all that I fhall add to
this Chapter, is concerning the Square Level
and Boning-Staves, Arrows, &c. made Ufe
pf in Gardening. It would be ridiculous for
me to give an Account of the Make, Fafhion,
and Ufe of a Rake, or Spade, 0-c. but thefe
are not fo well known 5 and I t<ike Mr. James's
Tranflation to be deficient in that Kind.

i 1 6 Inflrumental Inflruttions

The Defer ipt ion and Ufe of the Meaf tiring*
Rods , Square-Level , Bon/ng-Staves ,

&c. made Ufe of in fetting out Gar-
dens.

THE ift is a Meafuring-Rod of io Foot long,
divided into Feet, Halves, and Quarters ;
and a Foot at one End into the 12 Inches:
This is very light and commodious for meafu-
ring Ihort Lengths (as the Chain is in meafu-
ring great Diftances) and even a Gentleman
himfelf ought to have one of five Foot long,
to carry in his Hand among!! his Work- men,
to be ever and anon meafuring and proving
their Work by it. They are both commonly
made of Deal, the firft an Inch and an half or
two Inches fquare ; the latter an Inch fquare,
both tapering from the Middle to the lop.

The next is a Level of xo Foot long, and
a Piece of Deal, fram’d exaefy into the Mid-
dle; and at- right Angles with the Bottom, a
Raze made therein, and a Hole made at the
Bottom for a Lead-FJumb (faften’d from a
Line at the Top) to play in that Hole, by
which we know when ’tis level, But this
ought to be often prov’d, becaufe it will cart
lying and being us’d Abroad ; and when you
are ufing it, to fee that you don’t miftake, you
are to try it. End for End, on the Heads of
your Stakes. But this Inftrument is fo com-

for Gardeners, Szc. i i 7
mon amongfl all Sorts of Workmen, that f
need fay no more of it.

The next are what we call Boning or Le-
velling Staves. They are all four Foot and
an half long} and there are three of them,
one to be carry’d by the Gardener, the other
by a ftrong Labourer that can drive Stakes in,
and the third by a Boy, on the Top of whofe
Staff there ought to be ty’d a Piece of white
Paper, and a fquare black Board on the Top,
nail'd hoping on the Back-fide of it, to retain
the Strength of the white Paper the better.

TheUfe of all thefe will better appear
hereafter, when we come tp fpeak of letting
out Gardens.

Of dividing Lands,

§. a.np HE dividing of Lauds well, and
J_ with Difpatch, is fo elTential to
our prefent Purpofe, that I could not but be-
llow this Sedion on that Subjed, taken from
a very ingenious Author, whofe Name 1 have
mention’d in the Preface.

flow to divide a Triangle feveral Ways.

Suppofe ABC (Fig. j. of the next Plate)
to be a triangular Piece of Land containing

1 4 6°

1 1 8 Inftrumental Injlruttions

60 Acres, to be divided between two Men $
the one to have 40 Acres cut off towards A,
and the other 20 Acres towards C, and the
Line of Divifion to proceed from the Angle
B. Firft meafure the Bafe A C, viz. 50
Chains no Links ^ then fay, by the Rule of
Three , If the whole Content, 60 Acres, give
50 Chains for its Bafe, what (hall 40 Acres
give? Multiply and divide, the Quotient
will be 33 ch. 33 li. 3 which fet off upon the
Bafe* from A to D, and draw the Line B D,
which fhall divide the Triangle, as was re-
quir’d. If it had been requir’d to have divi-
ded the fame into 3, 4. 5, or more unequal
Parts, you muff, in like Manner as Mer-
chants part their Gain, by the Rule of Pel-
lowjhip.

There are fever-al Ways of doing this by
Geometry, without the Help of Arithmetic^
but my Bufinefsis not to (hew you what may
be done, but to (hew how to do it the moft
eafy and practicable Way .

How to divide a triangular Piece of Land into
any Humber of equal and unequal Paris , by
Lines proceeding from any Point affignd in
any Side thereof

Let A B C (Fig. 2. of the next Plate) be
the triangular Piece of Land, containing 60
Acres, to be divided between three Men 5 the
firft to have 15 Acres, the fecond ao, and the
third 25 Acres, and the Lines of Divifion to

pro-

I

for Gardeners, Sec. 119
proceed from D. Firft meafure the Bafe into
three Parts, as you have been before taught,
by faying, If 60 give 50, what fhall 15 give?
Anfwer, 12 Chains 50 Links for the firft
Man’s Bafe $ which fet off from A to E. A-
gain, fay. If 60 give 50, what fhall 20 give ?
Anfwer, 16 Chains 66 Links for the fecond
Man’s Bafe, which fet off from E to F * t hen,
confequently, the third Man’s Bafe, viz. from
F to C, muft be 20 Chains 84 Links. This
done, draw an obfcure Line from the Point
affign’d D to the oppofite Angle B^ and from
E and F draw the Lines EH and F G paral-
lel to B D. Laftly, from D draw the Lines
D H, D G, which fhall divide the Triangle
into three fuch Parts as was requir’d.

How to divide a triangular Piece of Land ac-
cording to any Proportion given , by a Line
parallel to one of the Sides.

A B C is the triangular Piece of Land, (vide
Fig. 3. of the next Plate) containing 60 Acres,
the Bafe is 50 Chains $ this Piece of Land is •
to be divided between two Men, by a Line pa-
rallel to B C, in fuch Proportion, that one
have 40 Acres, the other 20.

Firft, divide the Bafe, as has been before
taught, and the Point of Divifion will fall in
D, A D being 33 Chains 33 Links, and DC
16 Chains 67 Links. Secondly, find a mean
Proportion between A D and A C, by multi-
plying the whole Bafe 50 by AD 33, 33 the

Ptoduft

i 20 Inflrumental Inflruflions

Product is 16665000 ^ of which Sum extra#
the Root, which is 40 Chains 82 Links,which
fet off from A to E. Laftly, From E draw a
Line parallel to B C, as in the Lines E F,
which divides the Triangle, as demanded.

Of dividing four- ft Jed Figures , or Trapezia.

Before I begin to teach you how to divide
Pieces of Land of four Sides, it is convenient
firlt to (hew you how to change any four-fided
Figure into a Triangle 5 which done, the Work
will be the fame as in dividing Triangles.

How to reduce a Trapezium into a Triangle ,

by Lines drawn from any Angle thereof.

Let ABCD (Fig. 4 of the next Plate) be
the Trapezium to be reduced into a Triangle,
and B the Angle aflign’d 5 draw the dark Line
B D, and from C make a Line parallel there-
to, as C E ; extend alfo the Bafe A D, 'til
it meet C E in E^ then draw the Line BE,
which (hall make the Triangle ABE equal to
the Trapezium ABCD.

Now, todivide this Trapezium according to
any aflign’d Proportion, is no more but to di-
vide the Triangle A B E, as before tanght 5
which will alfo divide the Trapezium.

Example.

/<»/• a.

-P'Cttf'.J.lK?

for Gardeners, &c. in

Example.

Suppofe the Trapezium ABC D, containing
124 Acres, 3 Roods, and 8 Perches, is to be
divided between two Men; the firft to have
50 Acres, 2 Roods, and 3 Perches ; the other,
74 Acres, 1 Rood, and 5 Perches ; and the
Line of Divifion to proceed from B. Firft,
reduce all the Acres and Roods into Perches 5
then will the Content of the Trapezium be
19968 Perches; the firft Man’s Share 8083
Perches, the fecond Man’s 1 1885. Secondly,
meafure the Bafe of the Triangle, viz. 70
Chains no Links: Then fay, If 19968, the
whole Content, give for its Bafe 78 Chains
no Links, what (hall 8083, the firft Man’s
Part, give? Anfwer, 31 Chains, 52 Links,
which fet off from A to F, and drawing the
Line F B,you divide the Trapezium as defir’d ;
the Triangle ABF being the firft Man’s Por-
tion, and the Trapezium B C F D the fecond’s.

How to reduce a Trapezium into a Triangle , by
Lines drawn from a Point ajfignd in any Side
thereof.

A B C D (Fig. 5 of the next Plate) is the
Trapezium ; Ethe Point afiign’d, from’ whence
to reduce it into a Triangle, and run the Di-
vifion-Line,the Trapezium is of the fame Con-
tent as the former, viz. 19968 Perches ; and
it is to be divided as before, viz. one Man to

have

12 2 Injlrumental InJlruBions

have 8083 Perches, and the other 11885,
Firft, to reduce it into a Triangle, draw the
Lines ED, EC, and from A and B make
Lines parallel to them, asAF, BG; then
draw the Lines EG, E F, and the Triangle
C F G, will be equal to the Trapezium A B C D,
which is divided as before ^ for when you have
found, by the Rule of Proportion , what the
firft Man’s Bafe rnuft be, ‘viz. 31 Chains 52
Links, fet it from F to H, and draw the
Line H E, which fhall divide the Trapezium
according to the former Proportion.

How to reduce an irregular jive- fided Figure in-
to a Triangle , and to divide the fame.

Let A B C D E (Fig. 6 of the next Plate)
be the five -fided Figure^ to reduce which into
a Triangle, draw the Lines AC, AD, and
parallel thereto B F, E G, extending the Bafe
from C to F, and from D to G$ then draw
the Lines A F, A G, which will make the
Triangle A F G equal to the five-fided Figure.
|f this was to be divided into two equal Parts,
take the half of the Bafeof the Triangle, which
is FH, and from H draw the Line H A, which
divides the Figure ABODE into two equal
Parts. The like you may do for any other
Proportion,

V

\

: i

for Gardeners, &c.

123

If in dividing the Plott of a Field, there be out-
ward Angles , you may change them after the
following Manner.

S' npofe A B C D E (Fig. 7 of the next
Pla.v be the Plot of a Field, and B the out-
ward Angle, draw the Line C A, and paral-
lel thereto the Line B F. Laftly, the Line
C F (hall be of as much more Force as the
Lines C B and B A $ fo is that five Tided Fi-
gure, having one outward Angle, reduc’d into
afour-fidediFigure, or Trapezium 5 which you
may again reduce into a Triangle, as has been
before taught.

Howto divide an irregular Plot, of any Hum-
ber of Sides, according to any given Propor-
tion, by a ft r ait Line thro' it.

A B C D E F G H I (Fig. 7 of the next Plate)
is a Field to be divided between 2 Men, equal
Halfs, by a ftrait Line proceeding from A.
Firft, confider how to divide the Field into
five-fided Figures, and Trapezia, thatyoumay
the better reduce it into Triangles : As by-
drawing the Line K L, you cut off the five-
fided Figure, A B C H I, which reduce into
the Triangle AKL, and meafuring half the
Bafe thereof, which will fall at Q_, draw the
Line Q.A.

Secondly , Draw the Line M N, and from
the Point Qjeduce the Trapezium, C D G H,

into

tzq Inflrumental Inflriittions

into the Triangle M N Q_$ which again di-
vide into half, and draw the Line Q_R.

Thirdly. From the Point R reduce the Tra-
pezium D E F G into the Triangle ROP; and
taking half the Bafe thereof, draw the Line
R S, and then have you divided this irregu-
lar Figure into two equal Parts, by the three
Lines, A Q,, Q.R, R S.

Fourthly. Draw the Line A R, alfo Q_T
parallel thereto 5 draw alfo A T, and then
you have turn’d two of the Lines into one.

Fifthly. From T draw the Line T S, and
parallel thereto the Line R V ^ draw alfo T
V 5 then is your Figure divided into two e-
qual Parts, by the two Lines A T and T V.

Lajlly. Draw the Line A V, and parallel
thereto T W j draw alfo A W, which will
cut the Figure into two equal Parts, by a
/trait Line, as was requir’d. You may, if
you pleafe, divide fuch a Figure all into Tri-
angles, and then divide each Triangle from
the Point where the Divifion of the lift fell,
and then will your Figure be divided by a
crooked Line, which you may bring into a
ftrait one, as above. This above is a good
Way of dividing Lands$ but Surveyors fel-
dom take fo much Pains about it $ 1 /hall
therefore (hew you how they commonly ab-
breviate their Work, and is, indeed.

An

for Gardeners, &c. 125

An eaj) Way of dividing Lands .

Admit the following Figure, ABODE,
(Fig. 8 in the next Plate) contains 46 Acres,
to be divided in Halves between two Men, by
a Line proceeding from A, Draw, firft, a
Line, by Guefs, thro’ the Figure, as the Line
A F 5 then call: up the Content of either Half,
and fee what it wants, or what it is more than
the true Half Ihould be 5 as for Fxample, I
call up the Content of A E G, and find it to
be but 15 Acres, whereas the true Half is 23
Acres 3 8 Acres being in the Part A B C D G
more A E G ^ therefore l make a Triangle,
containing 8 Acres, and add to it A E G, as
the Triangle A G I5 then the Line A I parts
the Figures into equal Halves.

But more plainly how to make thisTrian-
gle 3 meafure, firft, the Line AG, which is
23 Chains 60 Links 5 double the 8 Acres,
they make 165 to which add five Cyphers, to
turn them into Chains and Links, and then
they make 16000005 which divide by A G
2360, the Quotient is 6 Chains 77 Links.
For the Perpendicular, H I, take from your
Scale 6 Chains 77 Links, and fet it fo from
the Bafe A G F, that the End of the Perpen-
dicular may juft touch the Line E D, which
will be at I Then draw the Line A I, which
makes the Triangle A G l juft 8 Acres, and
divides the whole Figure, as defir’d.

If it had been requir'd to have fet off the
Perpendicular the other Way, you muft ft ill

have

1 z 6 Tnflrumental Inflruftions

have the End of it but juft touch the Line
ED, as L K does $ for the Triangle A K G, is
equal to the Triangle A G L, each 8 Acres.
And thus you may divide any Piece of Land
of never fo many Sides and Angles, according
to any Proportion, by ftrait Lines through it,
with as much Certainty, and more Eafe, than
the former Way.

fr3_ You might alfo have drawn the Line
A D, and meafur’d the Triangle A G D, and
afterwards have divided the Bafe G D, accor-
ding to Proportion, in the Point I, which I’ll
make more plain in this following Example.

Suppofe the following Field, (Fig. 9 of the
next Plate) containing 27 Acres, is to be di-
vided between three Men, each to have nine
Acres 3 and in the Lines of Divifion, to run
from a Pond in the Field, fo that every one
may have the Benefit of the Water, without
going over one another’s Ground.

Firft, from the Pond © draw Lines to eve-
ry Angle, as 0 A, © B, © C, 0 D, © E,'
and then is the Figure divided into five Tri-
angles, each of which meafure, and put the
Contents down feverally; which Contents re-
duce all into Perches 3 fo will the Triangle

A © B -v (■ 674 -v
B © C/ V 390/

C © Dy be >123 8^ Perches ;

D © E V ) 91 A
E © A ' f 1107'

the whole Content being 4320 Perches, or 27
Acres 3 each Man’s Proportion 1440 Perches.

From

for Gardeners, &c.' 129

From © to any Angle draw a Line, for the
firft Divifion-Line, as 0 A; then confider
that the firft Angle A © B is but 674 Perches,
and the fecond B © C 390, both, together
1064 Perches lefs by 376 than 1440, one
Man’s Proportion : You muft therefore) cut off
from the third Angle, C © D, 376 Perches
for the firft Man’s Dividing-Line 5 which
thus you may do : The Bafe DC is 18 Ch.
the Content of the Triangle 1238 Perches;
fay then, If 1238 Perches give Bafe 18 Ch.
no Links, what lhall 37 6 Perches give > An-
fwer, 5 Chains 45 Links, which fet off from
C to F, and drawing the Line © F, you have
the firft Man’s Part, viz. A © F.

Secondly , See what remains of the Triangle
C 0 D, 37 6 being taken out, and you will
find it to be 862 Perches, which is lefs by
578 than 1440. Therefore from theTriangle
D © E cut off 578 Perches, and the Point of
Divifion will fall in G; draw the Line © G,
which, with © A and © F, divides the Figure
into three equal Parts.

How tb divide a Circle , according to any Pro-
portion, by a Line concentrick with the jirjl.

AH Circles are in Proportion to one another,
as the Squares of their Diameters; therefore,
if you divide the Square of the Diameter or Se-
midiameter, and extrad the Root, you will
have your Defire,

K

Example.

*30

Infirmnental Inftruttions

Example.

Let A B C D be a Circle, to be equally di-
vided between two Men.

The Diameter whereof is 3 Chains, the
Semi-diameter i Chain, or ioo Links ; the
Square thereof 10.106, half the Square 5050,
the Root of the Half 71 Links, which take
from your Scale, and upon the fame Center
draw the Circle G E H F, which divides the
Circle A B C D into equal Parts.

Of laying out new Lands.

A certain Quantity of Acres being given, how
to lay out the fame in a Square-Figure.

ANnextothe Number of Acres given 5
Cyphers, which will turn the Acres in-
to Links; then from the Number thus increas’d
extraft the Root, which (hall be the Side of
the propos’d Square.

bx ample

Suppofe the Number given be 100 Acres,
which I am to lay out in a Square Figure, , I
join to the 100 5 Cyphers, and then ’til
1 oo,coooo fquare Links, the Root of which is
2162 neareft, or 31 Chains 62 Links, the
4 Length

V

for Garden ers, &c. i ^ %

Length of one Side of the Square. Again, if
i.t were to cut out of a Corn-Field one fquare
Acre, I add to one five Cyphers, and then ’t:s
icoooo, the Root of which is 3 Chains 16
Links, and fotnething more, for the Side of
that Acre.

How to lay out any given Quantity of Acres
in a Parallelogram , whereof one Side is
given -

Turn, firft, the Acres into Links, by ad-
ding, as before, 5 Cyphers 5 that Number
thus increas’d, divide by the given Side, the
Quotient-, will be the other Side.

Example.

It is requir’d to lay out ico Acres in a Pai
raHelograin,. one Side of .wfikh ihaii be. >20
Chains 00 Links: Fir li, to the icq, Acres
I add 5 Cyphers, and it is iocococo, which
I divide by 20 Chains no Links; the Quotient
is 50 Chains no Links, for the other Side of
the Parallelogram.

t J ■ ■ X. . .

C '

How to lay out a Parallelogram that fall be 4,
5, 6, or 7, e\c. times longer than pis broad.

To do which, firft, above taught, turn
the given Qpanrity of Acres into Links, by
annexing 5 Cyphers, which Sum divide by
the Number given for the Proportion, between

K 2 tbe

1 3 s Of Court-Yard

the Length and Breadth, as 4, 5, 6, 7, &e.
the Root of the Quotient will fhew the fhor-
teft Side of fuch a Parallelogram.

Example.

Admit it were to be requir’d of me, to lay
out too Acres in a Parallelogram, that
fhould be five times as long as broad : Firft, to
the xoo Acres I add 5 Cyphers, that makes
it ioccoooo, which Sum 1 divide by 5, the
Quotient is aocoooo, the Root of which is
neareft 14 Chains 14 Links ^ and that, I fay,
lhall be the fhort Side of fuch a Parallelogram,
and by multiplying that 1414 by 5, Ihews
me the longeft Side thereof to be 70 Chains
70 Links.

How to make a Triangle , that flat/ contain any
Humber of Acres , being confin'd to a certain
Bafe.

Double the given Number of Acres (to which
annex, firft, 5 Cyphers) divide by the Bafe,
the Quotient will be the Length of the Per-
pendicular.

Example.

Upon a Bafe (Fig. 1 1. of the next Plate) gi-
ven, that is in Length 40 Chains no Links,
I am to make a Triangle that lhall contain
100 Acres : Firft, I double the 100 Acres,
and annexing 5 Cyphers thereto, it makes

20000000,

for Ga JR. PEN ERs, Szc. 133

20000000, which I divide by 40 Chains no
Links, the limited Bafe 5 the Quotient is 50
Chains no Links, for the Height of the Per-
pendicular, as in this Figure: A B is the gi-
ven Bafe 40, upon any Part of which Bafe I
fet the Perpendicular 50, as at C $ then the
Perpendicular is C D$ therefore I draw the
Lines DA, D B, which make the Triangle
D A B to contain juft 100 Acres, as requir'd :
Or if I had fet the Perpendicular at E, then
would E F have been the Perpendicular 50 $
and by drawing the Lines FAB, containing
100 Acres, the fame as D A B. If you con-
fider this well, when you are laying out a
new Piece of Land, of any given Content, in
any Place, although you in your Way want
100 Lines and Angles, yet you may, by ma-
king a Triangle to the firft Station you began
at, cut off any Quantity requir’d.

How to find the Length of the Diameter of a
Circle , which (hail contain any Number of
Acres requir'd.

t

Say, as it is to 14, fo will the Number of
Acres given be to the Square of the Diameter
pf the Circle requir’d.

K 3

Example.

1 54 Instrumental Inflruttions

Example.

What is the Length of a Diameter of a
Circle, whofe fuperficial Content lhall be
ico Acres? Add five Cyphers to the 100,
and it makes iccooooo Links; which, mul-
tiply’d by 14, facit 140000000; which, di-
vided by 11, gives for Quotient 1 2727272,
the Root of which is 55 Chains 67 Links,
and better, almoft 68 Links ; and fo much
(hall be the Diameter of the requir’d Circle. '

I

CHAP.

: i

!S 5

CHAP, IV.

Of Court-Yards.

0/ the fever al Parts of which Gardens
are compos’d.

EFORE I enter upon the main De-
fig" of this Work, viz. Rural and
Extenfive Gardenings it will be requi-
re to examine into the fevera] Parts
and Proportions of which Gardens are com-
pos d, that fo thofe feveral Parts, and the par-
ticular Proportions of each being adjufted and
lome Defigns at large given for the interior
Renters and Divifions of Wood, and other
Parts of a Garden, the letter Part may be un-
derltood with more Eafe $ for that being of an
extenfive Nature, and the Scale very fmall
tis lmpoflible to ihew thefe Particulars to any
K 4 great

1 3 6 Inftrument al Inftruftions

great Nicety, fo as to recommend them to
Ufe, and the Pradice of Gardeners and De-
ligners.

Mr. James's Tranflation, indeed, goes be-
fore$ and, befides, he has had the moft mag-
nificent Gardens of all France to view, and
he has certainly chofe the very Mar-
row and Beauty of all thofe excellent De-
figns; fothat, in this Point, I mull exped to
fall very far Ihort of him $ which will be, I
hope, excus’d, when ’tis confider’d, that I
have writ this Treatife in a Country that does
not yet abound with fuch truly noble Gar-
dens as France does, tho’ we are by Nature fo
much better enabled to do it. But this will,
’tis hop’d, tempt fome of our curious Planome-
trians , in Time to come, to finilh what is here
fo imperfedly begun.

And for the reft, if Providence permits, I
hope, on the Spot, in thefe Countries, to col-
led what may yet farther advance us in the
Knowledge and Improvements of Horticulture,
and other rural Amufements.

Of Court-Yards.

Court-Yards are by the Latins call’d
Area^ quia ibi arefcunt fruges , fays Var-
ro, an ancient Writer of Husbandry amongft
the Romans $ and with us. Court -Yards 5 Courts
from the French , and Yard, a Term of our
own, and is, in its proper Signification, an

open

Of Court-Yards. 137

open, airy Drying-Place, quia exaruerit , as
the Dictionary expreffeth it, and bounded
with a, Wall, Hedge, or Pale, or fome Cir-
cumscription, as Courts of Law and Juftice
are5 but when particularly apply’d to the Mat-
ter in Hand, fignifies thole little Divifions
that lye contiguous to a Gentleman’s Houfe,
and other his Offices of Convenience.

But to the Work itfelf, viz. To the Pro-
portion and Defign, and to the Manner of
making of them.

Where-ever, then, the Defign admits of,
or requires but one Angle Court, the Length
thereof need be no more than once and an half
or twice the Width between Terrace and Ter-
race. But in very great Edifices and Defigns,
a double Court feems to add a great Magnifi-
cence thereto; tis there that Grandeur is ab-
solutely neceflary, when in Buildings ofa
lefs Account, a Angle Court, according to our
allotted Proportion, will very well anfwer
the Purpofe.

I have, in Plates the ill and 2d, given fuch
plain Diredions, as have occurr’d in the Dif-
pofition and making of Court- Yards, whether
publick or private, of their Ufe, and the Beau-
ty and Convenience they add to any Edifice.

In the firft Place it is requir’d, that Court-
lards ffiquld have a depending Level, at leaft
an Inch in ten Foot, for the quick carrying off
®f Water, and that it may lye dry, as much
as poiiible. To that End, there will be found
jn l late the 25th a circular Line, to which

all

138 O/Court-Yaros.'

all the reft of the Court ftiould lye rounding,
tinder which there ought to be Drains for the
Conveyance of the Water. This Declenfion,
that is juft mention’d, is not only of life,
imt is alfo of confiderable Advantage in the
elevating the Houfe, and giving a good
Profpect to the diftant Beholder, which is
what many Houfes want. And ’tis not of
the leaft, but, on the contrary, the great-
eft Beauty, Advantage, and Conveniency
imaginable, to have a Terrace- Walk round,
or by the Side of, a Court 5 for by it
the Houfe is {till elevated the higher to any
Perfon that comes in upon the grand Level
of the Court-Yard, be he either on Foot or
Horfe-back 5 befides the Cleannefs, Decency,
and Convenience there is for Servants and
others, that pafs on Foot from one Office to
another. In Truth, it ought to be the chief
Care of any Surveyor, to give his Houfe all
the Elevation he can 3 but of that more by,-!
and-by.

In the 2d Place, the Foundation of a Court-
Yard, or, to fpeak more intelligibly, the
pitching, ought to be firmly fix’d in the Earth.

' But thefe being the Employs of a particular
Trade, I ffiall leave it to them.

A Defcnption of the 25 th Plate , (of Court - *

Yards.)

The principal Part of my Defign in this
Plate, is to (hew my Reader (by Way of Pre-f

; ■ liminary)

Of C o u r t- Y a rds. 139

' liminary) the Ndture ofa grand Court, which
may ferve as a Specimen in a very large De-
fign, as it is here particularly calculated for a
middling one. I have not been (neither.indeed)
is it my Bufinefs to be) very exad, either in
the Magnitude or Diftribution of the feveral
Rooms in a Buildings but every Gardener
ought to know the Difpofition of the Building
in general, that he may condud his Defign
accordingly. But as this Plate has chiefly Re-
lation to the great Court, there is no Occafion
to expatiate at prefent upon thofe Matters,
but leave them to be treated of, or defcrib’d,
in fome other Plate or Place.

The Perufer may then colled by the Scale,
that the Width between the Wings is about
2 30 Foot, and the Breadth of the Wings 50
Foot, which make 28c Foot 5 but, as we ge-
nerally account the Meafure between the two
Wings for the Breadth, ’tis there I fix my
Standard; and have therefore made the Length
from the great Hall- Door to the Gate-way
near 330 Foot ; which is near what I propos’d
to allow for the Proportion of a Court-Yard
fuppofing there is to be allow’d (as, indeed*
there ought to be) a large Parade without the
Gates, which, with all other contiguous
Yards and Courts, will be defcrib’d in a parti-
cular Plate, upon a lefs Scale in its due
place.

In the mean while,' as to the farther Dg-
fcription of this, there is in this Defign not on-
ly round the Building, but alfo quite round
' ' “ £he

140 Of Court- Y a r ds.

the Court, a Terrace-Walk, which is what,
in my humble Opinion, is very deficient in all
Books and Defigns that I have feen 3 for it is
not only a dry clean Pavement to walk round,
and view the Edifice, but alfo thereby the
Buildingitfelf appears confiderably the higher.
And tho' it may be obje&ed, that the Terrace
at the farther End will flop the View, I lhall
advife, that this Terrace is only to be us’d,
where a handfom depending Level can be had,
(as it is here fuppos’d it may) for which Rea-
fon here is fuppos’d 3 Foot 6 Inches fall in
the Court itfelf, from A to B, the Height
of the Terrace above A is two Foot, and the
Bafement is higher than the Terrace at the
Entry into the Hall, five Foot, befides the
Height of a Man, which is at leaft 5 Foot
more, is in all id Foot and an half 3 and this
is (allowing two Foot and an half for the
Height of the Parapet above the Terrace- Walk)
full 3 Foot higher than the Terrace-Walk at
the End of the Court, In order to take away
all Obje&ion, I have likewife, at the Bottom
of the Offices, at C, fall’n two Foot more 3
fo that then the Floor of the Hall is full five
Foot above the Parapet of the Terrace at the
End of the Court 3 and if to that be added 5
Foot, the common Height of a Man, I can’t
conceive that any Objection can be made to
this Way of Defign.

In Addition to the foremention’d Conveni-
ency of a Terrace-Walk round a Court, let
me mention, that it likewife difpofeth of all

Stuff

0/ Court- Yard s.' 141

Stuff that is dug out of Cellars, and the other
Foundations of a Houfe, and all other wafte
Rubbifh, and Clay, as ufelefs Ground, that
would be to cart away 5 and therefore it is re-
commended on that Account : And the Reafon
why a Terrace-Walk at the End is urg’d, is
the Expence it faves in Iron- Work, which, at
beft, is but a Kind of Net-Work, I had almoft
faid, contriv'd on Purpofeto catch thofe Per-
fons in, who are fo unwife as to run to that
great and unneceffary Expence.

If therefore the Ground Ihould rife from the
Houfe, inftead of fall, one ought by all means
to fink it, and for a Fence to dig a Graft, or
Ditch, on the Out-fide, (of which much
more will be faid, when we come to the fen-
cing in of a Garden) for the effedual Securi-
ty of this main Court, and the other Offices,
&c. But in this whole Matter, viz. in pla-
cing the Terrace-Walk and Bafement ofa new
Building, there ought to be a great deal of
Care. Come we now to fpeak of the Superfi-
cies of this and all fuch Courts.

And here it muff be obferv’d, that, for the
Conveniency of coming in for a Coach and
Horfes, 1 have given 70 Foot Diftance from
the Edge of the Terrace, at the Bottom of the
Court, to the Edge of the Oval 5 and the other
End is not above 16 Foot from the Steps of
the Terrace, at the upper End next the Houfe,
mark’d A ; for 'tis eafy to conceive the Diffi-
culty a Coach and Six would meet with at
the Entrance, were it any otherwife.

It

t4 i Of Court-Yards.

It has formerly been the Method, to place a
Fountain in the Middle of Court-Yards, or to
make, in its Room, a large circular or oval
Plott 5 but this is altogether difus’d at prefect,
fince thereby, when there are a great Num-
ber of Coaches, it would be no fmall Trouble
for them to ftand at Quiet, in fo narrow a
circular Way, as is commonly allow’d^ when
by this Means, thofe that are unemploy’d may
eafily move out of the Way, upon this Oval,
(or any fuch like Figure) and there remain,
’till they have Oceafion to move. In Confe-'
quence of this ’tis therefore now the Manner*
to pave the grand Court all over 5 and that
they may appear (as all other, fuperficial Orna-
ments about Country-Seats do, or ought to
do) with fome Variety, they are commonly
pitch’d Chequer and Star-wife, or circular, or
in fuch Form as the ingenious Artift pleafes,
with different-coloufd Stones. The Method
here taken is more eafily discover'd by infped-
ing the Plate, than by many Words.

The laft Thing I (hall mention, as worth
our Notice, is the particular Level which is
given to this Court, in order to carry off the
Water the better, and the Method of fetting
them.

The Center of the Oval is exadly a dead
Level from A 5 fo that after you have fix’d
thofe two, and mark’d out the great Circle, or
Gutter, (under which there ought to be a
Drain, two Foot fquare, with Grates at every
twenty Foot Diftance) then, I fay, for its

Level,

0/ Co U-RT- Yards; 143

Level, you mud at every ten Foot fix in a
Stake 5 or, becaufe of the Drain, Jet it be ra-
ther of Brick or Tiles laid upon one another,
’til they are at their proper Level, allowing'
an Inch and an half Fall to every ten Foot!
and that will make the true Level, all theother
Lines fwimming (as we commonly term it)'
from the Plinth of the Terrace- Wall that is on
each Side the Court, and from the Center of
the Oval down to that Level in the Hollow,
Gutter, or Drain.

As the Court is thus pitch’d, and of a de-
pending Level, if it be a Stone Country, all
the Terraces round fliould be pav’d, and even
that that is at the farther End of the Court.
And this Terrace muft of Neceflity be of a
dead Level, that it may anfwer the Bafement
and Plinth of the main Build ing and likewife
the Wall, or Parapet, that fupports the Ter-
race, all the Lines lying fwimming from ir,
down to the Hollow, as has been before ob!
ferv’d.

It is eafy to conceive the Neatnefs, Beauty,
and Cleannefs, that there is in Courts of this
Kind, more than in thofe whcfe Horfe and
Foot go together. Befides, that this little E-
levation is of Advantage to the Heighth of a
Building, every Body will, I dare fay, readi-
ly own ^ fo that a Terrace-Walk round the
Court of a magnificent, or even of any fmail
Rate of Building, is abfolutely necefTary, if
the Owner would keep his Foot-Pa flages clean,
and give a proper Elevation to his Building.

I

144 °f Court-Yards.

I hope 1 fhall be excus’d preffing of this fo
much, becaufe we are every Day feeing the
contrary j except in Buildings that are under
the Management of fome of the top Architects,
amongft which may be defervedly plac’d Sir
John Vanbrugh , and Mr. Hawkfmore.

J I fhall do no more in this Chapter, but add
fome few explanatory Notes upon the general
Difpofition of the Plan of this Edifice, which
does in a great Meafure determine the Nature
of all the adjacent Courts. ^

1. The great Hall.

2. The Salloon Room.

2. The great Dining-Room.

a. The little Dining-Room.

5. The Green-Houfe, or Gallery.

There feems to be no Occafion of marking
any of the reft, they being either private A-
partments or Offices * and the little Gardens
that lye contiguous thereto, may be eafily ob-
ferv’d to anfwer their Defigns and Ufe, which
is Decency and Plainnefs^ but if any ffiould
be fo curious, as to defire them to be drawn
into Borders, or Box-Works, they may apply
themfelves to feveral Patterns in this and o-
ther Books j and the Truth is, tis in that moft

Gardeners are excellent, and fo need little In-
troduction, their Endeavours fcarce reaching
any farther.

And

Of Court-Ya R D 8. 1 4,5

And, in order to exemplify the whole De-
fign, in one of the following Plates will be
epitomiz’d the feveral Parts in one Defign, •
with their Manner of laying out, &c.

A Description of Plate the 2 6th.

Altho’ the firft Defign be truly noble ip its
Kind, yet it muft be allow’d to be very ex-
penfive withaj} befides, in Foreft or Hunting
Seats (as well as the Seats of the more inferior
Part of the Gentry) where the Nobility pafs
away in Happinefs Part of their Time, a lit-
tle more Rurality, and lefs Expence, will do
as well, or better. I can’t, indeed, tell how
far a Perfon of my Profefiion may be allow’d
the Liberty of cenfuring or reproving any Ex-
travagancy of Defign in fome of inferior
Rank of our own Country 3 but it is certain-
ly too true, that fome of them do very much
exceed the Limits of their Honour, as they
do alfo of their Eftates, in great Defigns of
Building, and a very expen five Way of Gar-
dening likewife. And whoever takes a Sur-
vey of thefe Kingdom will find, that to this
is owing the many confus’d, unfinifh’d Schemes
fo very common in feveral Parts thereof.

And, in Truth, this firft fetting out, is ge-
nerally the Rock that all Mankind fplit upon 3
for fuch Expences are, generally fpeaking, in-
creas'd double to what they were computed at,
and by that Means the Owner’s ready Money
is commonly expended, before he hath half
“ “ ' ' L finiih’c*

'i 46' Of Court-Ya r d s.

finiffi’d the Defign $ and the Remainder is too
often, by unavoidable Necelliry, left in the
utinoft Confufion.

J fay then, in the firft Place, Perfonsofatl
inferior Rank ought to be very moderate in
their Defigns, for building Court- Yards, Offi-
ces, <&c. that there may the more remain
for the Embelliffiinent of the adjacent Fields,
Wood, &c. lince this will add much more to
their Satisfa&ion and Profit, than the moft
fumptuous Palace can do. One is (as an in-
genious Author obferves) from the Moment
of its Erection, haftening to its Ruin, while
the other is continually improving upon his
Hands, and furniffiing him with all Necefla-
ries of Life 5 every Day fupplying him with
new Objefts and Variety to hisTaite, Smell,
Sight, &c.

A private Gentleman ought therefore (in
Wifdom) not to begin his Houfe much larger
than what is in this Defign 5 he ought to be
very moderate and plain in the Furniture of
his Building, and of the Magnificence of his
adjacent Gardens and Court- Yards.

This may, perhaps, be thought an impro-
per Chapter for the Inculcation of thefe Mat-l
ters $ but,as I am going thro’ a general Courfe 3
of Country- Bufinefs, I can't pafs this Place ;
without it, being, generally, the very Spot
and Time, from whichall injudicious Under- 1
takers do commonly date their Ruin or Dif-
grace, and from which the more confiderate
and frugal commence the greateft Happi-

Of Court- Yards: 147

nefs, that they are (next to the divine Peace
and Tranquility of their own Minds) capable
of procuring for themfelves in this World.

But to go on. The Length of the South
Garden Front is about 80 Foot, and the
Breadth 355 but, by contra&ing the Scale,
the whole Defign may be enlarg'd. And if
the Owner can with Convenience, it would
do ftill better, if the Garden Front could be
100 Foot 5 but this may do, tho’ the Rooms
are but fmall, which is in thefe Times very
well approv’d of.

A, in Plate the 26th, is the Hall, B the
Dining-Room ^ CCCC are Drawings, or
Bed-chambers, and D D D D are Clofets.

I don’t pretend to be exaft as to the Build-
ing Part 5 but fomething like this is what ma-
ny Surveyors recommend 3 and this I leave to
better Judgment.

I would always advife againft building ma-
ny Court-Walls, where Frugality is requir’d 5
they foon run up to a great deal of Money ;
but ’tis hard to avoid making fome few, to
enclofe thefe Court or Wood Yards, and to
keep Cattel and Deer from running into the
very Houfe^ but if any Perfon would content
himfelf with Elm-Hedges, or, which is bet-
ter, (but flower of Growth) Holly-Hedge,
this would be an impenetrable Fence, would
break all the Winds better than Walls, and
would always appear in a Foreft Manner, and
conduft the Eye as well as a Wall.

1 4g 0/ Court-Yards.

To effeft this the better, you are to plant a
fmall Holly Hedge, or (if near London ,
where Yews and Hollies can be got large) a
Hedge four, five, or fix Foot high, in the
very Line where you might have intended
your Wall, viz. ranging from the Angles of
your Building, as in all Defigns they do, or
ought to do. But, if the Holly Hedge be not
above a Foot higb,it does,by that means, make
no Manner of Show at prefent $ and therefore
there ought to be plac’d, about 3 or 4 Foot
behind it, a Row of Hedge-Elms, and thofe
will make an Appearance at once, will fhrowc
the Holly ’til it is grown up, and will them
felves, after that, be fit to prune into Stand
ards, or to plant promifcuoufly in our rura
Plantations.

But it muft be noted, that this can’t b
done near or in Town, but only in theCoun
try ; the Town requires high Walls quit
round it, but the Country may be more ope
and lefs guarded. And now let us follow on
Defcription.

A is the Hall,B the great Dining- Room, C '
CC are all Drawing-Rooms, or Bed-chamber
and D D D D are Clofe's 5 E is the commc
Veil ibule for Perfons that come about Bufinel
F the Kitchen, and G the Laundry-Offices.

This is all I take to be neceiTary to fay as
Court-Yards, or the little Gardens adjoinit
to the Building. Tis obvious enough to eve
Body, that the other little ones are either
be pav’d, or to be laid with Grafs and Grave

2

Of Court-Yards. i 49

according as they are either defign’d for Ufe
or Beauty. If they are adjoining to the pri-
vate Apartments of Ladies and Gentlemen,
then Flowers, and Edgings, of Thyme,
according to the common Method, or their
particular Defire ^ but if adjoining to the
Kitchen, for thofeKind of Herbs that the Cook
is wanting on all Occafions : If to the Laun-
dry, a Bleaching-Yard 3 and if to the Stables,
with Paving, <&c.

And with this I (hall finifh what I have to
fay in Relation to Court-Yards. What I would
advife chiefly, is, by all Means to avoid the
Expence of long Court-Walls, efpecially in
Rural and Foreft Seats. You are but juft en-
ter’d upon your Work, and you mu ft confider,
that you have a great many Things to do with
your Money $ but if you do build in a Town,
you muft in fome Meafure fubmit to it.

But before I quit this Seftion, I obferve,
that as foon as ever you are out of Doors, you
are in a Foreft. This a good Defigner would
defire by all Means : Wood is of fo charming
a Nature, as well as Ufe, that no Man would
cut any of it down, except he could not pofii-
bly help it, and would only clear it away,
that he may have an open Breathing-Place be-
fore him, with Ridings thro’ it. Neverthe-
lefs, if it be not already grown, it may be
plac’d farther $ but of this more anon.

CHAP. V.

Of T errace-Walks.

H E Terrace feems to have been us’d
a confiderable Time fince, the Latins
terming it Agger, or Aggejlus , as
may be {oppos’d from ad and gero,
to colled or gather together of an Heap 5 Vi-
truvius (that celebrated Roman Archited)
and Suetonius, call it by the Name of Pul-
vinus , a Garden-Bed, or rais’d Walk of Gra-
vel ; Macrobius, by Solarium, a Sunny Bank,
or Walk : But the neareft ol our Derivations
in Englijb, is from the French, Terrace, or
TerraJJe $ and they from the Italians, (from
whom they, and almoft all Europe, derive
their Terms of Art relating to Building, Gar-
dening, &c.) Terraza, Terrazare, fignifying
with them the removing and banking up of
Earth, from one Place into another.

But be the Derivation as it will, it is very
well known in thefe European Countries, and
particularly with us, to be a fmall Bank of
Earth, laid out and trimm’d according to Line
and Level, being neceflary for the proper E-

levation

Of T E R R A C E - W A L K S. I 5 I

levation of any Perfon that walks round his
Garden, to view all that lyes round him. And
this Elevation is fo neceftary, that all Gar-
dens muft be efteem’d very deficient, that have
them not : And, to be plain, I think it the
greateft Fault imaginable in the Author of the
Theory and PraEiice of Gardenings that he has
not been more particular in that Refpeft, ef-
pecially that he has not defign’d them next to
his main Building, where they are fo abfo-
Jutely neceffary, both as to Ufe and Beauty,
that I dare pronounce a Seat of no Value with-
out them 3 and,befides,where-ever the Houfe is
to be new built, there is no Poflibility of dif-
pofing of the Earth, Clay, Rubbifh, &c. that
necefTarily comes out of the Cellars and Foun-
dation thereof, but this s, which we mull 0-
therwife fuppofe (amidft a thoufand need-
lefs Works) is to be carted away, to fill up
fome Hollow or other, which had been bet-
ter left undone perhaps likewife.

Of Terrace-Walks there are feveral Kinds,
as they are particularly us’d.

The iff, is that great Terrace that lies
next the Houfe.

The 2d, Side, or Middle Terrace, that is
commonly rais’d or cut out above the Level
of the Parterre, Lawn, &c.

The 3d, Thofe that encompafs a Garden 3
and

L 4

The

I?*' Of Terrace-WAlkS.

The 4th, Many that lye under one another",
as being cut out of a large high Hill ; thefe
are differing, in fome RefpeCt or other, from
one another. I fhall, in the enfuing Plates,
give the Reader the Plan and Ufe of them
all, with fiich Obfervations and Directions’ as
are made thereon.

I fhall only make fome general Obfer-
vations thereon, before I come to the Plate it
felf $ fuch are thofe concerning the Height,
Breadth, but little of the Length of Terraces,
fince that depends on Pleafure. As to the
Breadth of all Side-Terraces, ’tis, generally
fpeaking, decided by its Correfpondence with
fome Pavilion, fome little Jettee of Building,
but molt of all by the Quantity of Stuff we
have to fpare for fuch Purpofes. As the Side-
Terrace in a Garden, ought to be never lefs
than twenty Foot, fo there is little Occafion
to make it wider than forty ^ but for the
Height, which is the chief Occafion of this
Paragraph, we may note the Practice of feveral
has been fomething different one from another 5
fome allowing it to be five Foot high, (which
is altogether extravagant) and others more or
lefs, according to their refpeftive Fancies,
without any certain Rule.

But the befl and moft exaCt Practitioners al-
low no more than three Foot and an half, and
in a narrow Terrace-Walk, and a fmall Gar-
den, three Foot, and fometimes two Foot and
an half higher, are fufficient for a Terrace 5
then for a Terrace of 20 Foot wide, two Foot

Of Terrace- Walks.

and half an Inch, or two Foot nine Inches, is
fufficient $ but when it is 30 or 40 Foot, and
the Garden proportionably large, 3 Foot, or
3 Foot and an half, is abfolutely requir’d.

As to the general Proportion of great Ter-
races, I refer you to the Scheme and Scale of
Plate 27, Fig. 6, by which it appears, that the
Terrace is near 100 Foot wide. The Reafon
why I make it thus large, is, becaufe 1 have
often (I may fay always) thought that the
Terrace-Walks under Buildings, in almoft all
the Defigns I have feen in England , are too
narrow, fo narrow, that one can’t, without a
great deal of Inconvenience and Pain, view
the Buildings as one walks along. And what
gave me the firft Jmpreffion of this Kind, was
that truly magnificent and noble Terrace-
Walk belonging to fhe Right Honourable the
Earl of Nottingham, at Burleigh on the Hill
in the County of Rutland j any Perfon that
has once feen this, can’t but be mightily
lhock’d to fee little creeping narrow Terraces
under great Buildings. For my own Part, I
mull confefs, that that Defign creates an Idea
in my Mind greater than I am well able to
exprefs j and tho’ every Perfon that builds,has
not fo noble an Elevation and View, yet Per-
fons in a more level Country, may help them-
felves very much, and therefore there is the
more Occafion forfuch an Elevation. And this
refledts (till more upon Mr. James' s Tranflati-
on, where there is no fuch Care taken at all,

nor

i54 Of Terrace-Walks.

nor any Elevation, but what Nature has re-
folvedly thrown into the Way $ and, in Truth,
it looks very mean, to come out of a Building
upon the grand Flat of a Lawn or Parterre $
and is a very great Difadvantage to the Gardens
at Hampton-Court , if it could have been avoided.

Obfervation on Plate the 26th.

Figure the iff is the natural Fall of a Hill.

Figure the 2d (hews the Defcent from the
Bafementj and it alfo demonftrates how eafi-
ly Gentlemen may, with a little Care at firft,
give their Buildings an handfome Elevation.

Fig. 3 is the Profile at the End of the Par-
terre $ and Fig. 4 and 5 are the Boundaries of
a Garden by a Terrace- Walk and Graff, and
by a Terrace-Walk and Water. Fig. 6 is the
Plan of the great Terrace, with Groves of
Elms at each End.

To purfue the Thread of our Directions.

When you firft begin to build, and make
Gardens, the Gardener and Builder ought to
go Hand in Hand, and to confult together $
becaufe the Gardener has often Occafion, in
the Courfe of his Works, to make Ufe of all
the wafte Stuff that the Mafon or Brick-layer
digs out of the Foundation of the Houfe$
and 'tis a very great Fault, and likewife an
Expence, when Perfons (as 'tis the com-
mon Method) firft, dig the Earth out of the
Foundations, and throw it out in promifcuous
Heaps, and after that have it to remove again,

to

0/ Terrace-Walks.' iyy

to till Cart, fhoot down, and fpread again,
all which Works aggrandize the Expence of
an Undertaking, when there is no Occafion
for it, when at the fame Time it is dug out of
the Foundations, it might be carry 'd away
and thot down in the very Place where it is
wanted, without any more to do. And to this
End, the Gardeners Scheme ought to be laid
at the fame Time the Building is carrying on,
and, in Truth, to be finifh’d out of Hand*
that it may be growing while the Edifice is
carrying up.

1 can’t chufe but prefs again this Care of dif-
pofing of the Stuff as foon as it’s dug out of the
Foundation of the Houfe 5 for People are ge-
nerally in fuch a Hurry and Amaze, and Gar-
deners take fo little Notice of this one Parti-
cular, that I have often feen thefe coarfe hea-
vy Materials tumbled backward and forward *
and I dare aver, in a Defign now carrying on*
near 500/. has been thrown away in thisone
Article of tumbling their Earth backward and
forward, when it might have been difpos’d
in its proper Place at once 5 the Fellows all
the while muddling on, as if they were a-
maz’d $ as for Labourers, they care little for
that, tho’ fome of them often fee it $ it Ihould
therefore be the peculiar Care of the Gentle-
man or his Gardener.

To return to our more immediate Rules in
Praftice. You are to chufe as high a Mold or
Plan as you can, to fix your Houfe 0115
and there, after the whole Defign is cock-

fpitted

i5 6 Of Terrace -Wakls*

fpitted out, (as will be taught more by-and-
by) the Mafon, or Brick-layer, is at the Cen-
ter of the Garden-Front, to ereft a Square
Peer, or Bafe of rough Stone, (as the Bafe A,
Fig. i) on the Top of which he is to lay a
fmooth flat Free-ftone Cap, and to make it ex-
adly level, that by laying thereon a long
Rule, you may at any Time turn it about,
and take a general Survey of all your Levels.
This Stone, with its Cap, fhould be juft the
Height of the Top of the Bafement, being the
Level of the grand Floor y or, tofpeakmore
plainly, the Level of the Great Hall, Dining-
Room, &c. and the Rooms that lye contigu-
ous thereto.

This Bafe-Peer ought to be fix’d with Judg-
ment, according to the Nature of the Ground,
and the Height you intend the firft and grand
Floor fhould be ^ which, generally fpeaking,
ought to be 7 or 8 Foot above the natural
Ground, allowing three Foot and an half for
the Height of your grand Terrace, and four
Foot, or four foot and an half for the Height
of your Bafement above that grand Terrace $
which four Foot, or four Foot and an half,
we fuppofe to make eight or nine Steps, for
the Number of Steps going up from off the
great Terrace, to the Level of the Hall-Floor.

This pitching the grand Floor fo high, be-
fides the Elevation it gives the Houfe, is ve-
ry convenient, in as much as thereby the Cel-
lars are lefs damp and moift 5 and where-ever
Springs are apt to rife, it is attended with the

greateft

0/ Terrace- Walks. 157

greatefl Advantage imaginable. Befides which
the Expence of digging the Cellars, is confide*
rably lefien’d ^ only fo low it ought to be
fix’d, that the Cellars may afford Stuff enough
therefrom, and from the main Foundations, to
make the Terrace-Walks, and fuch like Emi-
nences, that are proje&ed, and which the Na-
ture of your Ground abfolutely requires.

And before I go any farther, I can’t but re-
commend the carting out all this Earth or
day, rather than wheeling, becaufe one is
a very great Charge more than the other ;
I have obferv’d, that one ought never to
wheel above 15 or 20 Yards at moft, except
it be in fome Cafes, where there is not a good
Supply of Stuff, or where fix or eight Men
can’t ftand to work, to keep the Carts always
moving : In this Cafe, in order ro forward
the Work as much as poffible, let one Cart al-
ways be {landing, with two Horfes ready har-
nefs’d, and another always going $ and this
makes an incredible Difpatch, if you have fix,
eight, ten, or twelve Men always digging
and filling, and three or four fpreading and
levelling it, as it is carry’d out into the Ter-
race-Walk, or other Hill.

The Terrace-Walk, or Mount, being al-
ready flak’d out, and Care taken that they
do not lay the Earth or Clay, fo taken out,
too high, allowing always 8 or 10 Inches for
good Mold, Turf, or Gravel, and in the finifh-
ing the Plan or Surface of this Walk.

Let

"i 58 Of Terrace-Walks.

Let us come now more particularly to the
Profile. The Pillar being fix’d, as before di-
refted, we allow five Foot, or five Foot and
an half, for the Height of the Bafement above
the Terrace, and three Foot, or three Foot
and an half, for the Height of the Terrace
above the grand Plan of the Lawn or Parterre,
as appears by the Scheme 5 we then allow an
Inch, or an Inch and an half, in ten Foot
Fall, for the Defcent of that Place, or if the
Ground be riling, lefs will ferve; but one
would by no means allow lefs than a quarter
of an Inch in ten Foot Fall $ altho’ Sir Jonas
Moore , and other Artifts, in their Water-
Levels, are, upon other Occafions, content
with lefs.

The Length of the Parterre being then
500 Foot, we need not make the whole Fall
(except oblig’d by the Defcent of the Ground)
lefs than three Foot and an half, or four
Foot 5 nor ought we to make it more than fix
Foot. And this laft is what I have obferv’d
in the Profile.

If the grand Walk continue thro’ a Wood,
or on a Plain, it ought to be carry ’d with the
fame Defcent $ tho’ after one is got 2 or geo'
Yards Diftance from the Houfe, one may take
the Liberty to fwerve from it $ but it fhould
be rather a rolling Level, than a lira it Hiff
one, than which nothing looks more cramping
and ridiculous, and is a Blemilh in a great
Defign that might be nam’d. Where- ever, in
that Cafe, the Ground falls oft too quick, the

Level

Of Terrace- Walks. 159

Level ought to fwim, as it were, over Hill
and Dale $ or if it be a ftrait Line, it ought
to fall at once, by a Slope, with fuch Divifi-
ons to anfwer it as the Nature of the Place re-
quires. This is to be feen at Letter Dj and.
the rolling Level appears at Letters e e e. In
this, neverthelefs, the Walk ought to be a
dead Level, crofs-wife. To Ann up all, the
Fall from the Ground-Floor of the Houfe (in
this Profile) to the Extent of the Park- Wall,
or of the grand Walk, as far as one would have
it appear a Garden, is 24 Foot 6 Inches,
which is a very proper Fall, and is thus ac-
counted.

The Bafement

The Fall from the great Terrace

The Fall of the Parterre

The Fall at Letter D

The Fall of the rolling Level —

F.

5

3

6

3

6

7

o

6

o

6

6

24 6

Obfervatiom on Fig. 3, in the 3 d Plate.

This Figure is put to demonftrate the Pro-
file of a Parterre, crofs-wife, with the Ter-
race-Walks on each Side 5 and is what in ge-
neral is, or ought to be, near upon a flat or
dead Level, fince it is to anfwer the Length
of the grand Terrace, the Level and Plinth of
the Houfe, &c. And this Scheme fully Ihews
where it ought to be flat, and where convex 5 as

3lfo

i6o Of Terrace-Walks.

alfo the Width of the 'Terrace and other
Walks, and the horizontal, perpendicular,
and hypothenufal Lines thereof.

And this is fuppofing the Terrace be rais’d
(entirely of Earth, Clay, &c. brought from
other Places $ for where-ever it is cut out of
whole Ground, it is in it felf much the cheap-
er. But Terrace-Walks are fo very ufeful, as
well as beautiful, that one would by no means
fail of having thefe Side-ones $ lince if there
is not Stuff to fpare out of the Foundations of
a Houfe, or if the Houfe be already an old
Qiie, or built but fome Time lince, by link-
ing the Levels in the Parterre or Lawn, ’tis
an eafy Matter to procure Stuff enough for
any Occafion, efpecially this 5 and we may
add thereto the Nearnefs of its Movement,
which is not a fmall Article- «

When, therefore, in order to proceed regu-
larly in the Conduct of our Garden, theTer-
race is done, or flak’d out only, you are to go
to the Parterre, and at the Head thereof you
fink your Level three Foot and an half for the
Fall of the Terrace, which, according to
two Foot and an half horizontal to one Foot
perpendicular in the Fall, you are to make the
Bafe of your Slope eight Foot nine Inches ho-
rizontal1, We do, in many Places, allow
three Foot horizontal to one Foot perpendicu-
lar j but this there is not always Room for 5
but lefs than two we never ought, nor
more thau three we need not 5 but this I have
mention’d elfewhere : For tho’ there are fome

Of Terrace-Walks. 161

that are indifcreet enough to make but one
Foot and an half, nay, fome not above one
Foot, horizontal to the fame Perpendicular,
it muft be a very great Fault} for if the Slope
be deep, there is no ftanding to mow upon it 5
neither if the Ground is tolerably good, will
the Grafs profper well, much lefs if it be
hot, burning, gravelly Land} but for rolling,
there is not Room for fuppofing any fuch
Thing, which is what makes our Slopes the
fineft of any Ordering or Dreffing we can be-
llow upon them, next to mowing.

And I muft digrefs to obferve, amongft
thofe that have either by PraClice or Writing
inculcated this Error, in that Book of Mr.
James's, in which, in his Directions for cut-
ting of Terrace-Walks out of all Hills, he
has, in feveral Slopes, not allow’d above one
Foot horizontal to one Foot perpendicular*
which muft be very ill Advice, and I could
not but caution the World againft it.

But to re-affume our Practice in the flaking
out and levelling this Profile Line} fixing the
Level at D, turn it long-ways of this Line,
which will crop the Head of the Parterre j
and fixing Stakes in at L, you have the Bot-
tom of your Side-Terraces, from which, after
you have meafur’d out eight Foot nine Inches,
the horizontal Line of the Slope, you may
raife the Height three Foot fix Inches, which
being done on each Side, you may foon level
the Tops of your Terrace-Walk, as alfo the
Bottom-Lines of your Parterre.

M Having

162 Of Terra c e - W a l k s;

Having thus done, you are to fall your fix
Foot ^ but if your Ground does not require
it, five or four Foot will be Fall enough, in
refpefl: to the Work it felf. The Method how
this is done, is fufficiently laid down in Di-
rections for ufing Garden- Inftmyients, <$cc, (p.
60) After you have thus fix’d the Stake to
its true Fall, at the lower End. of the Parterre
or Lawn, you are to repeat the fame Work
again as you did at the upper End, * by twin-
ing the Level a-crofs the Bottom of the Par~
terre$ and having thus finifh’d your Levels at.
the Bottom, as you did before- at the Head
thereof, you are fufficiently prepar'd with
your main Stakes ; and thefe ought to be at
leaft two Foot long, and drove down with
Beetles and Sledges, with all the Force ima-
ginable ; for that thefe Stakes, once mov’d,
will always put your Work into Diforder,
and make it unlevel 5 and there are fo many
Accidents that do, that you can’t be too care-
ful in the avoiding it.

I think I have gone thro’ the moft material
Parts both in the Defign and Execution of the
rough-levelling Terrace-Walks under the main
Body of the Houfe, in the Garden Side, as
alfo the Side-Terraces of a Lawn or Parterre $
and it would be needlefs for me to repeat the
Method of working, drefling, and carpetting
them, in as much as it will fall in more pro-
perly in other Places*

Ohferva -

Of Terrace- Walks. 163

Observations on Fig. 4, P late 16.

This fourth Figure properly relates to the
Fencing of Gardens • which, as it has been of
late done by a Terrace Walk in the infide,
and a Graff or Ditch: in the Outfide, may not
be improperly tranfiently handled, tho’ it be
more fully in another Place .

As for the Method that has been us’d fome
Years fince, in walling the Parterre with an
high Wall, what can be more ridiculous,
or expenfive? It may be aliedg’d, thefe
Walls are for Fruit $ but thefe Fruit Gardens
ought to be detach’d from the Houfe, fepa-
rate and private 5 fince by this Means no Bo-
dy dare walk but the Owner himfelf, for
Fear of doling his Fruity and that would be an
Inconvenience but few; generous Tempers
would create, efpeciaily in the Country,
where Extent is requir’d. But, to refume the
Obfervation,

This, without Doubt, is the nobleft ' Way
of fencing in a Garden (next to Water, which
can’t always be had) but I have given Profiles
of both, a Wall and Water 5 which, when
well underftood, will, I doubt not, be much
more put in Praft ice than'have yet beenT fince
upon thefe Terraces it is that one may look
either forward or backward, and view with
Pleafure the rude and diftant Scenes of Na-
ture, as well as the more elaborate Works of
Art.

M 2 The

1 64 Of T E R R A C E - W A L K S.

The Ditch, or GrafF, on the Outfide, be-
ing what fupplies the Infide, and railes up
the Terrace, was certainly a very good
Thought, tho* 1 prefume it has not been much
practis'd by us in England , and was firft deli-
t^er’d to us by a Gentleman, that is delervedly
honour’d with fome confiderable Polls belong-
ing to the Architectural Province, &c. in
his Majefty’s Works.

This Outfide, from which we are fupply’d
with Earth to raife the Terrace-Walk in the
Infide, is by the French call’d la Foffe, from
the Latin , Foffa, a Pit j by the Dutch, Graff,
and from them the fame by us 5 and ought to
be about 15 Foot wide at Bottom, five Foot
deep, and the Slope 15 Foot horizontal, which
is the Proportion allowable to Hoping, as be-
fore dire&ed.

The Wall is feven Foot and an half high,
from the Top to the Bottom of the GrafF,
which is five Foot below the Plinth of the
Terrace in the Infide 5 and two Foot and an
half the Height of the Parapet-Wall, which
is about Seat- high within, and gives one the
Liberty of all the Beauty that Nature affords
without. The Width of the Terrace may be
about 12 or 15 Foot more ^ and wider than 20
Foot it need never be in the greateft Defigns.
The Profile points every Particular out fo ve-
ry plain, that I need not take any more Pains
inwards.

Obferva-

Obfervation on Fig. 5, Plate 2 6.

This laft Figure in this Plate is the Me-
thod of making a Terrace-Walk at the End of
a Garden, or round the fame, where Water
can be had, and for fencing the Garden, Wil-
dernefs, &c.

__ And this is certainly the beautifulleft of all
Fences 5 and by digging the Canal, or Water-
courfe, you throw up the Earth that makes
the Fence. But this Terrace ought not to be
too high 5 two Foot nine Inches, or three
Foot, is full high enough, and two Foot and
an half will do $ but this Ihould likewife be
detach’d from the End of all Walks, that the
View may not be flopp’d into the Grounds
adjacent 5 and this is alfo the Reafon I would
advife them not to be made too high.

Obfervation on Fig. 6, Plate 2 6.

The laft we obferve in this Plate, is the
Plan of the grand Terrace we have already gi-
ven the Profile of. It is (as is already ob-
ferv’d) near 100 Foot wide 5 by which means
the Building may be view'd with Eafe and
Pleafure^ and has, befides, fomething in it
felf that looks grand.

For the Steps and Half-Pace coming out of
the Houfe, project 1 5 Foot,! 2 Foot whereof a re
allow’d for Gravel next the Houfe, and three
Foot the Width of half the Verge of Grafs,

M 3 the

1 66 Of Terrace- W a l k s.

the Lines of Trees, on the Terrace, ranging
in Line with the Pedefials at the Bottom of
the Steps, which makes the Verge of Grafs,
when it is at full Length, to be fix Foot.
This and the other Part of the Terrace is di-
vided as follows :

Ten Foot Gravel next the Houfe,or Cockle-
Shells.

Six Foot a Verge pf Grafs.

Ten Foot, a Counter-Gravel-Walk, or
Cockle-Shells.

Six Foot, another Verge of Grafs.

Three Foot of Sand, or Cockle Shells, be-
tween the Grafs and the Paving.

Forty five Foot, the Paving.

Three Foot of Sand, or Cockle-Shells, be-
tween the Paving and the Grafs.

Six Foot Grafs.

Ten Foot Gravel, or Cockle-Shells.

Six Foot Grafs.

Then conies the Slope.

Whether the Verges of Grafs before the Houfe
be left plain, or planted with Pyramid Yews
and Vafa s between them, I leave to the Dis-
cretion of the Owner. I muft confefs there’s
a becoming Decency and Grandeur in plain
Grafs only ; and of that Kind is the large Ter-
race in Bufhy Park, belonging to the Right
Honourable the late Earl of Hallifax , and
feems much more proper in a Foreft than elfe-
where.

I

0/ Terrace-Walks. 167

I have recommended Paving for the Middle
Walk of this grand Terrace, it being ve-
ry noble in its Kind $ and, befides, there
are Times (efpecially wet Weather) when
Gravel-Walksarenot fit to walk upon : In this
Cafe Pavement is of mighty Advantage 5 but
l only mention this en paffant.

The Side-Walks are of fine Gravely then
three Foot next the Paving of Cockle-Shells 5
the Fall into the Parterre is, next, which, to
avoid Expence, I would rather advife to be a
Slope of Grafs, than a Wall, in the Middle
of thefe Grafs Verges, except it be in the ve-
ry Front of the Houfe. Let us fuppofe Elm-
Trees for Shade, fince the nobleft Terrace,
as well as any other Part of a Garden, is very
deficient without it. And at the End, except
the View be open and noble, one would ad-
vife a little Grove, with fhady Arbours and
Recefles, at the End of which, on a Seat
plac’d, the Owner may view the Grandeur of
his Terrace, and have an oblique View like-
wife of two Fronts of his Building 5 but if it
be an open View (which is feldom to be had
at both Ends) then a Canal, Cafcade, or the
Continuance of thefe Lines, will be a noble
Termination. Thefe fnady Elms I very
much recommend, plac’d and detach’d (as they
are defign’d) from the Body and Wings of the
Edifice. And the Want of this feems to me
to befome Difconut to the Beauty, as well as
the Convenience of that noble Terrace I have
|n theSeries of this Chapter mention’d. Surely
M 4 no

i68 0/ Ter race- Walks.

no Seat can be faid to be compleat, where
there is not an immediate Shade, almoft as
loon as out of the Houfe. And the fame may
be faid of all other Side-Terraces, which
ought by all Means to be planted with good
Oak, or, which is of quicker and more regu-
lar Growth, Elm, rather than the more coft--
ly Yew and Holly, that muff always be clip-
ping, &c. befides the other are, in Reality,
of more Value, befide the noble Umbrage that
they afford the Owner. The Diftance of
thefe Elms a-crofs will be about 20 Foot, and
they may be plac’d at 30 Foot afunder in the
Lines ; the Quicknefs of their Growth, will,
his hop'd, foon gain Shade and Shelter to
the weary ’d and ftudious.

Amongft all that can be faid of the Beauti-
fulnefs and Noblenefs of Terrace- Walks, thofe
that are cut out of a natural Hill very much
exceed all others, plac’d upon which we view
the adjacent Country with the utmoft Delight,
and the Spirits ape by an unaccountable De-
light rais'd to the higheft Pitch that Nature
and fublunary Profpeds can poffibly advance
them : For who is there that ever faw thofe
noble Elevations of Belvoir , Nottingham , Bur-
leigh on the Hill , Winchejler , and many 0-
ther Places, would not think them appointed
by Nature for the Refidence of great and fub-
lime Spirits, and for the royal and mqft noble
ferfonages of the World.

Of Terrace- Walks. 169

But, to quit this exalted Thought for a
while, let us confider the bell Method of cut-
ting and dreffing any Hill into Slopes. I have,

I think, already, in the fixft Part of this Trea-
tife, mention’d fomething of the Calculations
that every Surveyor ought to make in the
dreffing and removing of unlevel Ground 5 and
in this Chapter it will be more fully handled.
Which that we may better do, we rauft have
an immediate Recourfe to the rough View of
the natural Hill, in Fig. 1, Plate 27, and to
the Scheme of the fame Hill cut into Slopes,
in Fig. 2 of the fame Plate.

Obfervations on Fig. 1 and 2, Plate 27.

When you firll begin dreffing of a Hilfyou
ought by all means to take its Level from the
Top to the Bottom (as will be more plain-
ly {hewn, when we come to take in the
Level of Spring-Heads) and to draw on Pa-
per the Hill, with its Bunches and Excrefcen-
cies $ fince ’tis by this that you mutt firft con-
duct your felf in the dividing it into Terraces -y
otherwife you may put the Owner to an im-
menfe unneceflary Charge, fince it is not re-
quir’d, that thofe Terraces that lye under one
another, be of an equal Height or Width, but
they ttiould be govern’d and determin’d by the
natural Line of the Hill.

In this Example I find the Perpendicular of
the Hill is 49 Foot, and the Horizontal from
the Perpendicular of the very Precipice of the

Hill,

170 Of Terrace-Walks.

Hill, at A, at the Top, or, more properly,
at the Bottom of the Perpendicular, at A to B,
is 182 Foot.

Now, in order to take a general View of
it in Numbers, we muft examine what Pro-
portion the Height of the Hill bears with the
horizontal Bafe, fince ’tis this that muft deter-
mine whether you are to divide your Hills by
Walls or by Slopes, or, which is a middle
Way, by Walls and Slopes mix'd, viz. one
Wall and Terrace, with a Slope between that
Wall and the next, as you may fee in Figure
the 9th, Plate the 27th. In order then to
eftabliih what I am going to lay down for our
Direction in jhis Cafe, we ought never to
make the Perpendicular of our Slopes above 1 $
Foot in the higheft and moft deep Hill ^
and the Bafe to that Perpendicular ought by
no means to be lefs than twice the Perpendi-
cular, It will therefore follow from

thence, that where-ever the Horizontal of a
Hill be not above twice the Perpendicular,
that there the Hill muft of Neceffity be fup-
porred by 1 errace-Walls, or Terrace-Walls
and Slopes mix’d together ; but where it is
more, that it may be done by Slopes, or by a
a Wall and Slope, as has* been already men-
tion’d.

To put what we have been advancing in-
to Praftice, the Perpendicular of the Hill be-
ing 49 Foot, multiply this 49 by 2, and- the
Product is 98 Foot 5 and fo much is requir’d
tor the Horizontal of all thefe Slopes. This

Of Terrace-Walks. 171

98 you muft then fubftraft from the whole Ho-
rizontal of the Hill, which, as appears before,
is 182 Foot.

See the Example.

49 the Perpendicular of the Hill,
mill tip. by 2 the allow'd Rule for the Bafe of

a Slope,

makes 98 as above :

182 The whole Horizontal of theHill,
98 as above, being fubflraft. from it,

leaves 84 for the Flats of all your Terraces,

which divided by 3 . ) 84 ( allows the Terrace
to be 28 Foot wide, which is a very good
Width $ and from this Examen we find this
Hill may be divided by Slopes, without a
Wall ^ which is much cheaper, and, in
Truth, more beautiful ; but this Point I fhall
fpeak to more by and by.

After this preliminary Examination is over,
we are to proceed in dividing the Hill into
Slopes and Terrace-Walks 3 and, for the Ad-
vantage of the Work, we muft cut three or
four, and fometimes five. Foot, into the Hill,
at the Fop 5 becaufe it gives fome Advantage
to the Hill it felf, and the Earth is eafiiy
tumbled down to the Foot thereof, ortomake
good any Deficiency in the Middle or other
Parts. This will readily inform us, that both
in thedefigning and executing of this Work,

we

i7* Of T errace-Wakls,

we ought to begin at the Top firft, and fo
work downward 5 for this Reafon, that the
Earth is very eafily tumbled down 5 on the
contrary, one can’t throw it upwards but with
the greateft Difficulty,

To go on then in our Work (which is
fontething difficult) you are to find wherea-
bouts your hypothenufal Line a b falls $
which hypothenufal Line being 35 Foot, you
are to divide by 5, and multiply it by
2, and that gives you the Perpendicular of
this Slope, and confequently the Horizontal.
See the fame illuftrated by Example.

The Length of the hypothenufal Line,
which the Gardener ought to have upon a
Line, and to fix it difcreetly in, fo as to hu-
mour the Nature of the Hill, (and the fame
does by Gompaffes on the Paper) being 35
Foot, do as underneath, viz. divide by 5, 3s
has been already taught 3

5)35(7

the Quotient being 7, multiply it by 2, and
that gives 14, which is the Perpendicular of
the Slope, equal to 35, the given Hypothe-
nufe 5 and this, by Confequence, makes the
Horizontal to be 28 Foot, according to the
lead Proportion we allow of the Horizontal
to the Perpendicular of a Slope.

To do this upon the Ground, fix a dead
Level at a, Fig. 2, Plate 4, as a c, which
we fuppofe to be two Stakes, upon which we

place

Of Terrace-Walks. 173

place, our Boning Staves, before defcrib’d, a-
boutfour Foot and an half long 5 and at the
End of the hypothenufal Line, at B b, fet up
a 20 Foot Rod, and place it exaftly upright,
by holding a Mafon’s Plumb-Rule to the Side
thereof 5 and as you have already found,
that your Perpendicular muft be 14 Foot, you
are therefore to tie a Piece of white Paper on
your twenty-Foot Rod, at the Meafure of 18
Foot and an half, (by which you allow 4 Foot
and an half for the Length of your Boning
Staff) and when the Paper is level with the
Heads of your two Boning Staves, you may
then conclude you are right ^ but you muft
obferve one Thing, viz. when you apply
your Hypothenufal a b to your twenty-Foot
Rod, and find you are to fink two or three
Foot deep into the Ground, you muft be fure
to make an Allowance, elfe you will over-
run your Hypothenufal or Slope Line.

This Point being determin’d, it will be ve-
ry eafy to meafure out, according to the Na-
ture of your Hill, the Width of the next
Flat, which, in my Defign, is 37 Foot ; from
the Extremity of which you are to repeat the
fame Procefs as you did in the other Slope,
having in this Flat made a fmall Allowance
for the Hang of it, in order to the carrying
ofF the Water, which Hang may be about an
Inch in 10 Foot, or fomething more 5 fo that
in this it may be about four Inches 5 and if it
were 6 or 8, it would ftill be the better, and
would in fome fmall Meafure help to take the

great

174 0/ Terrace-Walks.*

great Depth of the Slopes ; but this fhould be
carefully deduded out of every Perpendicular.
For Iiiftance, the Perpendiculars of the next
S!< Ype being 12 Foot, you ought to dedud rhefe
6 Inches, (lfyou allow fo much) and make it
but 11 Foot 6 Inches, (till allowing 24 Foot

for the Bate, of it 5 other wife youi Meafures
will not hit together at laft.

The middle Line of Stakes, from Top, to
Bottom, being fix’d, we come now to the ge-
neral Plan, and to the Care and Art that there
is requir’d in flaking it out.

Obfervation on Fig. 3, Flute 27.

It appears, by the Scheme, to be an Imita-
tion of Fortification, in which there feems to
be little Occafion to follow the exad Rules
thereof, but to ufe it chiefly fo, as that it
may the mod conduce to the Beauty and na-
tural Form of the Hill. I need fay little as
to the reducing Fortification into Gardening •
’tis what will, I believe, be very pleafing to
all the martial Genius’s of our Country 5 and
it feems fomewhat of Wonder, that it has not
been made Ufe of before now. The firfl that
was made Ufe of, of this Kind, was the Am-
bit o{ the Gardens at Blenheim $ but that is af-
ter the ancient Roman Manner : I fhall not, in
this Place, infift much thereon, leaving it ’til
I come to the Fencing in of Gardens , where
this Way of Fortification will come in very
opportunely, ajnd, I doubt not, be very agree-
able

Of T E RR-A C E * W A L K S. j y y

able to all fuch as love- Improvements in Arts
and Sciences.

At prefent let us obferve, that a Hill thus
regularly cut out, makes a kind of natural Per-
fpedive from the very Lines of the Plan:
And, indeed, there is no Figure in all the
Mathematicks, that fuits the natural Beauty
of an Hill fo well, efpecially -when it is a
round one 5 but were it to be a Hill In Length,
one would certainly, by cutting an Hollow -in *
the Middle, make thofe Baltions at each Angle
of an Houle, or any other Plan, at the lop
of an Hill 5 for there feems to be fomething
of a pleafing Air in the Breaking forward of
thofe Angles, fuch, indeed, as few or no Geo-
metrical Figures'will allow of, becaufe they
fpiay off, according to the Rules of Fortifica-
tion.

’Tis true, the Curtain or Flank Line, be-
tween the two Angles of the Hill or the Ba-
flions, is longer than is allow’d in Fortifica-
tion ; but that is not much to our Purpofe.
The Breaks of the Angles (be their Difiance
what they will) theExadnefs of the Slopes,
as they lye one under another, and the gene-
ral View of all is what, in this Cafe, is more
to -be preferr’d, than any exad Rules in the
military Science, fince 'tis not Ufe but Beauty
that we drive here for.

Our Defign being thus fix’d and refolv’d up-
on as to the Plan, and the middle Line being
divided, as is before direded, you are to turn
your Level length-ways of the Hill, at right

Angles,

i7 6 Of Terrace-Walk^.

Angles 5 or, if it will fuit with the Nature of
the Hill the better, you may deviate from the
great Exa&itude of a right Angle, and may
vary 6, 8, or io Degrees, without any Body’s
perceiving it. The chief Care fhould be in the
lirft fixing of the Edifice, or any other mate-
rial Line above the Hill, fince thefe lower
Slopes and Terraces ought by all Means to
run parallel thereto, in Refpect to Line as
•well as Level. And this is a great Fault, that
is eafily difcernible in the Slopes of a noble
Situation in the North Part of England,wheTt
the Slopes run neither parallel to the Line,
nor are they parallel as to the Level of the
Plinth, or, indeed, any of the Building*
which makes them look twilled, awry, and
not fo agreeable as they would otherwise be.

To finifh what we have begun, whether we
fix our Slopes at right Angles, or whether we
deviate either on the right or left, fix, eight,
or ten Degrees from the Rules already laid
down, of carrying a dead Level a-crofs the
Head of a Garden, Terrace Walks, &c. fix
in Stakes at all the Angles of the Baftions *
and being level, according to former Directi-
ons, there feems to remain nothing to do, but
to proceed to working thefe Slopes, the Me-
thod of which will appear in the next feveral
Figures.

Obferva -

Of T E R R A C E - W A L K S. I - 7

Observations on Fig. 5, 6, 7, in Plate 27.

You are to fix in the Stakes between the
Angles of the Baftions (firft] having the Stakes
drove down very firm, fo that no common
Accident may move them out of their Places,
or fink them below, or raife them ^bove,
their Level) betwixt the firft mid. 'le Line of
Stakes and thofe Angles, about 3c >t a fun-
der, you are to put in Stakes for 1 . minf
your Slope, as in Fig. 7, Plate 27. Which

Stakes being level I’d in, as is feen in the 5 th
Figure, you are to ftrain the Line, as in the
7th, Diagonal-ways 5, thirty foot is, indeed,
full long to ftrain a Line, but the Stake ought
to be well fix’d in, and then, by a f wift,
you may ftrain the Line as tight as you . will,
the Line being made of the ftrongeft - fmall
Cord, or large Twift5 or, .otherwjfe, you
may fct the Stakes in, at 15 Foot afundery
but this is to defcribe the Method in general.-
You are to begin (as is before direded) at
the Top of your Work, and are to.cur the
firft Slope quite out of whole Ground ,S that
the fuperfluous Ground, that is par’d off, may
be tumbled down, to make good any Defici-
ency that is underneath.

Multorum Manibus grande levatur Opus ,
That W ork grows light that many Hands employs:

is, in this Cafe, a very good Rule : .For the
Hill being all flak’d out, as faff as a Bymp.is

N taken

178 Of Terra c e - Wal k s"

taken off from one Place, ’tis receiv’d by Per-
fons working in fome Hollow near them,
where they are at the fame Time employing
themfelves in filling up and ramming thofe
Hollows. And, indeed, the fetting a great
many Hands at Work together, is of great Ufe
in this and raoft other Works.

In thefe Figures are therefore contain’d our
Englijb Method of levelling an Hill into Ter-
race-Walks and Slopes 5 how the fame is to
be particularly levell’d and lin’d out, and how
the Stuff is to be mov’d, and where plac’d :
By which Time we may fuppofe our Hill is
brought to what we call a rough Level 5 let
us now proceed to (hew how they are to re-
ceive their finifhing Stroke, how they are to
be planted, &c.

The Hill being, as is before fuppos’d,
brought alraoft to a Level, the Workmen be-
gin to ftrain their Line anew, and to take the
Rake in Hand, in order to make good their
Diagonal Lines 5 and that being done, the
Quarters betwixt them, as are the Quarters a
b c d e f, &c. the Work will begin to ap-
pear. And that the Lines may be the neater
made out, in the carrying on this Work there
ought to be a Referve of the top and belt
Mold, to coat the Slopes with, and fuch re-
ferv’d for the finilhing, as will rake fine, ei-
ther for the laying of Turf, or Sowing, which
will come to be fpoke of by-and-by.

I think the Method of levelling in the
Stakes, (training the Lines, Raking, and

Dreffing,

Of Terrace- Walks. 179

Drefling, is, by whac has been writ, and by
the Figure on Plate u 27th, fufficiemly
treated of. Ir now remains, that we fpeak
of Turfing, or fowing with Hay y the latter
will, by all, be allow’d to be the cheapeft,
tho’ the firft be the fineft, and moft immedi-
ately finifh’d and in its Perfection.

But in large rural Defigns, which is what
the Subjed of this Book is, and, to faye Ex-
pence, I very much advife fowing with Hay-
Seed 5 except you have fome Updand-Turf
that you can fleece off, that lies near at Hand,
on any Common, or enclos’d Ground, that is
intended to be plow’d ^ for by this you fave a
prodigious deal in Carriage.

1000 of Turf has formerly coft 10 Shillings
'racing, cutting, and rolling 5 (every Turf
being three Foot long, one Foot wide, and
two Inches thick) but they are now cut
cheaper 5 and I have computed, that the cut-
ting and laying of a Rod of Turf, fixteen
Foot and an half Square, will cofl: near 10 d.
by which any Gentleman may eafily reckon
up his Charge, when he knows the Dimenfi-
ons of his Work.

Certainly, for about that Money, or far
from London , at a cheaper Rate, 3tis pofli-
ble for a Gentleman both to rake and turf his
Terrace-Walks and Slopes 5 which amounts
to about 6 or 7 /. per Acre, and which is no
great Expence, and would encourage him
however to turf all thofe Parts that he is in
N 2 moft

iBo 0/ Terrace-Walks.

moft Hafte of feeing in Perfedion, and fow-
ing thofe that lye fartheft out of Sight.

The Sum of all, as to the Expence, is 2 j.
or 2 s. 6d. per Rod, at which Rate any Gentle- v
man may level thefe Works, and rake and
turf them, provided he goes not above one
Foot deep in the excrefcential Parts of it, or |
does not raife it above one Foot deep in the
Hollows, that is to fay, in plain Terms, that
can by his Care and Judgment fo manage it,
that what he takes off at one Place, may make
good another, and not more 3 which requires
fome Judgment and Care in calculating, and
is, indeed, a Province that very few arrive to
any Proficiency in, without a confiderable
deal of Experience. ’Tis in this refped that
many Gardeners run their Matters to an infi-*
nite Expence to no Purpofe, and make them*
pay foundly for the Negled of good Ad-
vice.

All that I have to add more on this Matter,
is, that 1 have made both the Steps and the
Lines of high Trees, that ftand upon the
Tops of the Slopes, to fplay off which I take
to be abfolutely necettary in Works of this
Kind, which by the Diminution of the vifu-
al Rays are apt to contrad the Vifta too
much 5 and 1 fhail finilh this Chapter by ad-
vifing, that whenever your Slopes be of a hot
burning Gravel, or Sand, you carefully pre-
ferve all your good Mold to line your Slopes
with, to keep them from burning in the
Summer-Time 5 and, if pofiible, you fhould

procure

Of Terrace-Walks^’ j 8 i
procure fome cool ftrong Land, with which
you may cover them three or four Inches, to
great Advantage t but the firft is eafily pro-
cur'd.

Observation an Fig. 9, Plate 27.

Figure the 9th contains the fame Hill cut
out into Terrace-Walks fupported by Walls -
and this truly looks very noble, but it is with-
al very expenfive, and is not fo rural as Slopes
of Grafs are. r

1 know there are feveral Perfons fond of
it, on the Account of the Walls for Fruity
but Experience Ihews, that the Trees being
expos’d to the Bleaknefs of the Winds, (as of
courle they muft in fuch high Situations) are
very much damag’d thereby. And to this we
may add, ^that if the Ground be wet and
cold, the Water foaks thro’ the Wall upon the
Roots of the Trees, and almoft deftroys them,
and this efpecially in Peach-Trees. This is
of fo ill a Confequence, that I believe no Bo-
dy, when they are appriz’d of it, will be
■fond of making thofe Walls on the Account of
Fruit, when it may be likewife objefted
that half a Wall is thereby loft, fince
were the Owner to build Walls on level
Ground, he may, in moft Cafes, plant both
Sides. And the Truth of the Matter is, the
Trees that ftand again!! thofe Terrace- Walks,
(efpecially the Peach Trees) are moft mifera-
ply maul’d every Spring, at the Seat of a
N 3 Right

ri8 2 Of Terrace-Walks.
Right Honourable Lord that I have had Oo
cation to mention already, notwithftanding a 113
tile Care imaginable has been taken to pre-

vent it. . c ,

I need fay little to demonftrate the Scheme,!

it is very plain in it felf $ but if any Gentle-I
man does proceed this W3y, he ought to have ,
Pieces of Timber, withSs at the End, laid
into the Terrace, to tye the Wall tight y tho y
in large Stone it may do without* Ana that?!
the Wall it felf may butterife inward, in or- j
der to difcharge the Weight the better, I would
rather advife, that rough Stone or Brick, ati
the Back-fide, be laid in Mortar, than dry $
fince one Way draws the Wet to the Face of
the Wall, which the other in fome Meafure
prevents.

CHAP.

CHAP. VI.

O F T H E

FARTER RE.

Arterre (fays the Author of The The-
ory and PraBice of Gardening , as he
has it from the Royal DiBionary ) is
deriv’d from the Latin Word partiri,
I fhall not abfolutely determine againft fo
great Authority 3 but it feems to have a nearer
Relation to Pars , or rather the Latin Com-
pound, par and Terra, a level, even Piece of
Land 3 neither does it feem to imply any par-
ticular Decoration or Embellilhment with
which it is furnifh’d, and is therefore, by
Miftake, fuppos’d purely to imply, in a limi-
ted Senfe only, that Divifion or Plat of
Ground, which with us (as well as in other
Countries where Gardening is in Efteem) is
call’d the Parterre , or Flower-Garden 3 is nee
the French have their Parterre d* Eau , or Par.

N 4 terr

[i 84 Of the Parter r e.

terre of Water, <&c. And Parterres them-
felves are divided into feveral Kinds, and
have an Epithet join’d to them, to exprefs
more fully their proper Diftin&ion. But
however general the Word is in its Conftru-
clion, ’tis what we underftand here in Eng-
land, by that level Divifion of Ground that,
generally fpeaking, faces the South and beft
Front of an Houfe, furnilh’d, as it has always
been with us, with Greens, Flowers, &c.
Thefe the French (as already hinted) divide
into feveral Kinds, as they are more or lefs,
and according to the Manner they are fet off
and adorn’d, viz. Bowling-green or plain
Parterres, the Method of which they own to
have receiv’d from England , and Parterres of
Embroidery, &c. The firft of thefe Kinds is
of the raoft Ufe, and is, above all, the beau-
tifulleft with us in England, on Account of
the Goodnefs of our Turf, and that Decency
and unaffected Simplicity which it affords to
the Eye of the Beholder. Of thefe Kinds I
have given fome Defigns, as alfo of others cut
into Shell and Scroll-Work, with Sand-Al-
leys between them. And thefe are the fineft
Kinds of Parterre Works in Efteem with us 3
and, indeed, were it not that Perfons differ
in their Judgment of what is really valuable
in each Kind, and in Compliance with that
Cuftom that has fo long prevail’d, that any
Author that publishes a Book of this Kind,
would look fingular, did he go farther 5 and
were it not for this, I fay, I Ihould have con-
tented

Of the Part erre. 185

tented my felf to have given only the Dimen-
fions and Proportion of a plain Parterre ^ but
for this Reafon I have, in the Plates at the
End of this Chapter, given fome Defigns that
have already been us’d, and very much ap-
prov’d of in England $ and others, that, I may
venture to fay, are entirely new.

Of the general Proportion of Parterres.

But before we come to the Plates and their
Defcription, it will be proper to fay fome-
thing as to the general Proportion of them,
and their Shape. Sir William Temple has,
long ago, obferv’d, that an Oblong, or long
Square, is the moll proper Figure for a Par-
terre, becaufe, by the Rules of Per fpeBive, or
the natural Declenfion of the vifual Rays in
Opticks, a long Square links almoft to a
Square 5 fo, confequently, an exaft Square
appears much Iefs than it when in a Plan,
than in Reality it is ^ and that the Eye is cove-
tous of Extent, and looking forward, is obvi-
ous to the meanefl Obferver.

Of the Length.

The Proportion that from thefe Obfervati-
ons we allow for the Length of a Parterre,
ought not to be lefs than twice the Length,
and is very feldom more than three times ;
and two times and an haif is a very good Pro-
portion.

Of

Of the Breadth.

Parterres generally receive their Width
from the Breadth of the Front of an Houfe j
and where-ever the Houfe is above 200 Foot
wide, we are oblig’d to follow it 3 but if the
Houfe be not above an hundred Foot, or,
fometimes, lefs, it would be too narrow for a
Parterre 3 and for that Reafon an exaft Mea-
fure ought, in this refped, to be fix’d 3 every
Perfon is at Liberty to chufe for himfelf j
but, according to the Obfervations J have
made on this Subjed, Parterres are, generally
fpeaking, too large, by which Means the Ex-
pence of Gardening is not a little rais’d,
and that which is the moft valuable of any
Part of a Garden, I mean Wood, and, confe-
quently. Shade, very much diminifh’d. As
one would therefore never make the Flat of a
Parterre, betwixt Terrace-Walk and Terrace-
Walk (which ought to be made on each Side,
for an Elevation proper for View) above 300
Foot, or 100 Yards, fo one can’t, by any
Means, make it lefs than 140 or 150 Foot 3
by which Means the Length, at two times
and an half the Width, wil l be 3 50 Foot, or
fomething more, which is certainly a very
handfome Proportion. I have been the more
particular as to this Length of a Parterre, in
as much as it is very often a Miftake in De-
■figners, to make their Parterre too wide, and,
tonfcqueiuly, they appear too Ihortj and in

this

mmg'

‘M-wA

Of the Parterre. 187

this Refped I think many of the French De-
figns (efpecially thofe that are in Mr. James’s
Book) are very blameable 5 for, as nothing is
more pleafing to the Eye than a contraded re-
gular Condud and View, as foon as one goes
out of an Houfe or Building ^ and a for-
ward dired View (as has been already hinted
at) is the bell, be it either Parterre, Lawn,
or any other open Space (double, treble, nay
fometimes, quadruple the Width) why may
we not juflly blame thofe Defigns that are
much wider than they are long , and
where, at our immediate Entrance into the
Garden, the Noblenefs of View isfpoil’d, the
Angles of Sight broke and confus’d, and, in
fhort, all that is valuable in Opticks made of
no Account. Let this then fuffice for a gene-
ral Examen of the Proportion of Parterres 5
come we now to the Plates themfelves.

An Explanation of Plate the 28th.

The firft Plate contains a Defign that was
a long Time fince compos’d for a private
Gentleman 5 but neither that nor any other
Defign is yet there perform’d 5 for which Rea-
fon I have given it without any Alteration.
The Parterre is defign’d for Grafs, Gravel,
and Sand, or Cockle-fhells interwoven one
with another, and is (unlel's it was to be en-
tirely plain) the neateft and cheapeft Way of
making Parterres 5 befides, it is always green,
pnd Winter and Summer it maintains its natu-
ral

1 88 Of the Parte r r e.

ral Verdure^ the'Expence of keeping is ftili
lefs than when there are Borders and Edgings
. mix’d therewith.

The Length is about 360 Foot, and the
Breadth i8q, which, indeed, is rather the
fhorteft, but is what we were oblig’d to, thro’
Fear of cutting away too much of the Wood
that fronts the End of the Sweep.

As for the Wood, or Wildernefs, I have but
little to remark, only that Care be taken to
avoid an Error too much run into by many
Defigners of Gardens, in making the two op-
pofite Sides direftly alike. This is, in Truth,
the having only half a Garden ^ (ince when-
ever the Sides are equally the fame, when one
has- feen and enjoy’d the one half, there is lit-
tle Occafion to view the fame over again 5 but
this proceeds from the Delufivenefs of a regu-
lar Draught on Paper. The large fquare Ba-
fin of Water was almoft ready by Nature, it
would therefore (in order to have made both
Sides alike) have been the greateft of Follies,
to have been at the Expence of filling it up,
iince it is likevvife in it felf the greateft of na-
tural Beauties and Conveniencies.

’Tis true, I can’t agree with fame, that
would have, even in the Parterre, irregular
and different Sides likewifej and I dare ven-
ture to lay it down as an Axiom in Garden-
ing, that whatever lies open to View, ought to
be regular , while, neverthelefs, whatever is f
within the Ambit of Wood, the more irregular ,
the more entertaining and diverting it is.

The s

Of the Parterre. 189

The oppofite Divifion is of another Kind,
and intended for a Kind of Labyrinth, fome-
thing of the Nature of that of Ferfeilles 5 yet
by no Means like fome others, that are made
of fingle Hedges ^ for thofe feem to be calcu-
lated for an inferior Clafs of People. Thefe
are the mod beautiful and mod retir’d of all,
and contrary to the Fafhion very common a-
mongft us of making their Wildernefs open
to all publick View 5 and to fuch a Degree
has this Fault been us’d, that in many Gar-
dens of Note, Tis hard to find (tho’ the great-
ed and mod eflential Requifite in any Gar-
den) fo much as one private Walk 5 but the
Owner, upon all Occasions, is liable to the
Noife and Impertinence of almod every Body.
It is very proper that fuch Divisions as thefe
fhould be enclos’d, and a Pallifado-Gate fix’d
at D, to keep it the more private.

At the End, and in the direct View of eve-
ry Walk, fix’d in the Efpalier Hedge, are de-
fign’d Statues, Urns, Paintings in Stone-Co-
lour, Grotefque and antique Figures, Tables,
&c . In fine, this, which by Meafure amounts
£0 no more than four Acres and an half (be-
fides the Kitchen Garden) is all that by any
Means a Gentleman of confiderable Fortune
(tho’ I fhall not intend to limit any Body)
would in Prudence make the interior Part of
his Garden. The exterior, and more pub-
lick, will follow in a few Pages 5 and Till
then 1 referve what I have mare to fay on that
Subject.

An

190 Of the Parterre.

An Explanation of Plate the 29th.

I had once made a Refolution not to have
given any Defigns of this Kind in Gardening,
intending to have confin’d ray felf to that
Ample, plain, and unaffefted Method I have
propos’d to my felf in the Delivery of what
I have to fay concerning Gardening 5 but
as the Opinions, and, indeed, the more folid
Judgments of Perfons, differ very much as to
Defign, I have (as before intimated) in Com-
pliance with the Expectations of fome curi-
ous Artifls in this Way, given one Plate of
that Kind.

And firft, of Figures the ift and 3d.

As to thefe firft and third Figures, they
are certainly the mod eligible, by Reafon of
their Length, which, as I have before ob-
ferv’d, is what is mod valuable in a Parterre,
fomething near thofe Schemes in the Parterre 1
at Ham pi or,- Co art, next the Water- fide 5 as is |
alfo that of Blenheim , and fome others, that
are accounted amongft the belt of their Kind 3
but in order to give them their full Length, j
’tis neceffary, at the Ends of thofe Quarters, I
to add a Sweep of Break, to carry the Parter- :
re to its proper Length ^ thefe Quarters ought
likewife to be full 80 Foot wide, and of a
proportionable Length, other wife the Work
in the In fide would be much too thick.

Whether

/&/<* ?/ 2?^ .

r ffo/rtrorr m^fdA^d/n/vrA

I i

CDe*/u//u Jdr jPart&7~re ^u^rU'rz .

Osi, Ao^dfaoiorre QuMOizfc Tiddo a, S^ofmtzim m>dio
crruddto, and t/id' Q tear t&nf of draff tfffieddnrorAt.

tf

Of the Par t e r r e. i 9 i

Whether thefe Quarters are fet off with
Lead or Stone, Urns and Statues, or with
Greens, as has been the prevailing Method 5
or whether the Borders (hould be of Grafs or
Earth, is left to the Choice of the Matter 5
and to this Plate I need fay but little more.

The 2d Figure, being entirely Dutch and
French, I leave to the Choice and Refufal of
all Defigners.

Obfervation on Plate 30.

I have already mention’d (and both the
Books, and other Accounts we have from
France, fhew) that the French have their Par-
terres of Water, as well as Grafs and Embroi-
dery 5 and it is, in Truth, feme of the beau-
tifulleft Furnitures of the belt Parterres.

This plain Defigti I drew fome Years fince,
for a Gentleman that had a Hoping Piece of
Ground, that lay Side-ways of his Houfe,
which Slope is apt to fpoil the direct View
from any Building, and ought not to be ad-
mitted, efpecially in any main Front 5 for
which Reafon I thought it incumbent on me,
to find out fome Method to regulate this great
Defeft in Nature $ and to that End, having a
great Command of Water, 1 defign’d this Par-
terre d' Eau, as the French term it ; by which
Invention the digging of the Bafins would
have plentifully fupply’d the Terraces on the
lower Side, and have made an handfome re-
gular

ipz Of the Parterre.

gularly conduced View to the adjacent Coun- 1
try, which mightily deferv’d it.

In the great Terrace, upwards, there was
a confiderable Rife, that afforded an handfom
Cafcade 5 and on the lower Side, an Emi- '
nence, over a beautiful Meadow, which Mea-
dow, with the neighbouring Village, and 0-
ther pretty Landfldps, might be view’d from
the uppermoft Terrace, on the lower Side of
this Defign, the Hedge being low, and the <;
natural Slope of the Hill falling awa j quite
down to it ; whilft the Wood, that lies under- is
neath, affords not a little Satisfa&ion, it be-
ing cut out into large Walks, that open at the
Bottom to the aforefaid Meadow ; but this I
could not Ihew, by Reafon the Scale would
not allow.

The Plainnefs of the whole Defign makes ‘
it appear, that it may be eafily executed, the
Slopes on one Side being entirely done to
Hand, only cutting out of the Hill ; whilft
the other (tho’ of more Expence) is as eafily
form’d, by Means of the Stuff' that is dug out
of the Bafins.

The Trees, I propofe on the Slopes, are no
other than Englifh Elm, under which, if the
Owner defires, he may place Vafa’s or Pyra-
mid Yews; but I think it as Well without. j

The firft Defcent (as appears by the De-
fign) is into a Level compos’d of plain Grafs,
and Statues; and the next is ail of Water;
round which if there were plac’d maritime Or-
naments, the Effect would anfwer the Ex- .

pence : •

Of the Pa rt err e. It 9 3

But the Defign is entirely plain, and only a
Grafs Verge round the Water. The next
Fall is a Bafin, whereinto, upon Occafion,
may be thrown a great Deluge of Water by
a Cafcade, out of that great Bafin that is a-
bove 3 with feveral Iet-d'Eau’s , from a Refer -
voir at the Top of the Hill. The next Divi-
fion is a Canal of 600 Foot long, which fini-
ihes the interior Part of the Defign. The
Height of the Terraces, and the Elm-Trees
thereoiY, with the Length of the Canal,
bounded, as it is, on each Side with Elms,
muft of Courfe make an handfome direct
View, befides the Pleafure that thofe fliady
Terraces will afford in the extream Heat
of Summer.

I can’t, indeed, but think it a great Fault in
many of our Gardens, that there is fo little
Shade, efpecially on Terraces, which are al-
ways left very naked, and planted on each
Side with nothing but clipp’d Plants 5 where-
as good Shade, and a lofty cool View, feems
much more defirable. I know many will ar-
gue, that the falling of the Leaves in Au-
tumn, will very much foul and fpoil the Beau-
ty of the Garden, and withal help to fpoil
the Water 5 but as this is but once in the
Year, one ought, above all Things, to ftrug-
gle with fo fmall an Inconvenience, when fo
great a one is in the Ballance againft it, I
mean the five beautiful Summer-Months, and
that during the Excefs of Summer-Heats 5
when all that can be faid on the other Hand,

O can’t

j 94 Of the Parterre.
can’t poffibly be put in any the lead Competi-
tion with it. But if any are fo curious, there
is now at Brumpton Park, a very great Stock
of tall dandard Yews, that will retain their
Leaves all Winter, and are, indeed, an im-
mediate and beautiful Shade.

This cutting their tall Pyramid Yews into
Statues, feems to have been one of the bed
Thoughts that has fail’ll in the Way of Gar-
dening for fome Years. The noble Verdure
and Shade that thofe Yews make, c~ , c but
recommend them to the Choice of this, as
well as the Umbrage of the lated Age.

As for the Wood on each Side, it is not ve-
ry pertinent in this Place (being upon Parter-
res) to fay much of it : The upper Side is cut
into long private Walks, which, altho’ they
have not that Beauty upon Paper,that Figures1
in Wood have, are yet much more retir’d and
private 5 the Want of which I take to be a .
very great F ault in mod of our Englifh Gar-
dens$ but this is already touch’d upon, and
will more abundantly in the Sequel of this
Book.

At the farther End is a large, open, riling
Lawn, and thereon a Statue, which will
have no mean Effeft, in refped to its being a
riling Hill, which owght to be plac’d amongd
the greated Beauties in Nature.

The oppolite Divilion, on the lower Side,
is cut out into little narrow Walks, after a
Labyrinth Manner.

In

confi<
one a
from
the (
Cafca
I hur
cond
utmc

Tl

fuppi

battc

natu

that

have

'rx ..3 'A C

Fay. iyj.

Of the Parterre. 195

In fine, ’tis an eafy cheap Defign ; and,
confidering the Beauty of the Terraces lying
one above another, and the View, not only
from the Houfe, but alfo at the Bottom of
the Canal the Houfe it felf, and all the
Cafcades of Water that fall from it, it may,
I humbly prefume, be reckon’d amongft the fe-
cond or third Rate Defigns 5 which was the
utmoft of my Aim in compofing it.

The Terrace- Walk at Letter A, is to be
fupported by a Wall, or the Earth may be
batter’d a&ay (as we call it) down into the
natural Slope of the Hill, which will fave
that Expence ; and with this I finifli what I
have to fay as to Parterres.

Here follows the Defign .

O 2 G H A P.

k_ t ^ .

Of Woods , Groves , Wilder -
neffes, Parks , &c.

I N T R O D U C T I O N.

HE greateft of all the natural
Embellifhments of our Country-
Seats, being in Woods and Groves
judicioufly contriv'd and cut out,
I {hall make it my Endeavour, in
this Chapter, to explain it, as much as in me
lies : For, in Truth, amongft all the Errors
committed in Gardening, there is none great-
er than in this.

Tho’ fince all that pretend to Judgment in
Gardening agree, that Variety is the greateft
and raoft diftinguilhing Charafteriftick in any
Country-Seat or Garden, one would think it

no

Of Woods and Groves , 8zc. T9 7

no very hard Matter, to fix upon one and the
fame Method in defigning of this beautiful
Part of our Bufinefs : But I know not how it
comes to pafs, People do differ, and that very
much 5 and one feldom hears of two Perfons
whofe Opinions jump together in any Defign,
one will find Fault with what another efteems
excellent in its Kind.

I think it proper, in this Place, if it were
poffible, to endeavour to reconcile the diffe-
rent Opinions of Perfons in Gardening, and
efpecially as to Woods, the beautifulleft Part
of it. And the belt and moft general Rules
that (in Words) I can poflibly lay down, are
to endeavour to follow and improve the Ad-
vantages of Nature, and not to ftrain her be-
yond her due Bounds.

Some there are that efteem nothing well in
a Defign, but long, large, wide, regular Ri-
dings and Walks $ and this, in Truth, is
right in an open Park or Foreft, where the
Owner rides and hunts : But that a Garden-
Defign for walking in only, or if thereto we
add Magnificence, which, I muff own, thofe
long Ridings have, yet it would be a Fault to
fet too great a Value upon them in a Garden 5
and for the fake of long level Walks, to level
all thofe little Eminencies and plea ling La-
byrinths of Nature : For tho' a few of thefe
Walks are absolutely neceffary, in Refped: to
the Grandeur and general Beauty of a Situa-
tion, as the Middle and Side Walk, and a ve-
ry few Diagonals, yet it is an unpardonable

0 3 Fault,

i <58 Of Woods and Groves , Szc,

Fault, as we fee it almoft every where, (let
the Expence be what it will) to have fcarce
any Thingin a whole Defign, but carries open -
Walks 3 fo that be the Garden 40, 50, or
60 Acres, one fhall fcarce find any private or
natural Turn in the whole 3 if the Wood
be grown, down come all the noble Trees
that ftand in the Way of this Scheme. And
this feerns to be the greateft Difference in
the Opinion of Perfons as to Defign. And
that this is not Fiftion, there area great ma-
ny Places do teftify, particularly that beauti-
ful Wood belonging to the Earl of Carlijle , at
Caftle-Homard , where Mr. London defign’d a
Star, which would have fpoil’d the Wood 3
but that his Lordlhip’s fuperlative Genius pre-
vented it, and to the great Advancement of the 1
Defign, has given it that Labyrinth diverting
Model we now fee it 3 and it is, at this Time,
a Proverb at that Place, York againft London ,
in Allufion to the Defign of a Londoner , and
Mr. London the Defigner.

But, to apply it more plainly to the Purpofe
in Hand, when you find a Wood that has a
great many Hills and Dales, and is almoft ail
of it compos’d of Irregularities, ’tis there one
fhould not ftrain either the Fancy or the
Purfe, but follow thofe little Shelvings and
natural Turns and Meanders. ’Tis there
you Ihould be regular in your Defign 3 but
whether the Level be up Hill or down Hill,
whether the Turnings quick or more flow 3

or

t

%

Of Woods and Groves , &c. 199

or whether the Wood it felf be thick or thin,
one ought always to take the Advantage of it,
and to make it moil agreeable to the Nature
of it, having always a particular Regard to
large old Oaks, Beech, and fuch like Trees 5
in which Cafe one would as foon fire one's
Houfe, as cut them down, fince 'tis the
Works of fo many Years, I may fay Ages, to
rear them again.

On the contrary, how common is it for Lay-
ers out of Gardens to refolve upon fome regu-
Scheme in the Clofet, and from it to cut out
their whole Defign ; fothat down go all the
Oaks, Beeches, &c. that have been fome Ages
coming to Perfeftion. And this, indeed, I
forefee will be the Qbjeftion that will be
made to fome Defigns that I have given 5 but I
fhall here explain when fuch Defigns are pro-
per to be us’d, and when not ; fo that I hope
thereby to caution my Reader from falling in-
to an Error on that Account.

When, therefore, we meet with a large
Wood in an open Park, not near, or on the
wrong (the North) Side of the Houfe, and
the fame be a Level, particularly if the
Wood be thick, and it does not deftroy the
general Profpeft of it by fo doing, 'tis there,
in my Opinion, a regular Scheme ought to
take Place.

But when the Wood is plac’d near the
Houfe, it is defign'd chiefly for Walking, ’to
be as private as is confiftent with its own Na-
O 4 ture.

200 Of Woods and Groves , Sic.

ture, as when it is naturally compos’d of fe-
veral Levels, Hills, and Hollows. This is
a Place defign’d by Nature, for the Exer-
cife of a good Genius in Gardening.

’Tis in large Hollows and low Grounds,
and in the Middle or Center of Woods, that
we make our little Cabinets and Gardens, of
which fome are to be found in this Book, and
others may be taken out of Mr. James s,
befides an infinite Variety that may be con-
triv’d $ but the Lines extended from them
fhould not be carry’d out too far, for that
will make one unavoidably fplit upon the for-
mer Error of Regularity.

If Water is to be had, one ought to look
for convenient Places to make Heads at (at as
little Expence as poflible) and to frame fuch
Figures as are moll fuitable to the Nature of
that Hollow ^ folikewife of Hills.

If the Wood is thin, ’tis there one may
clear it quite away, and make open Lawns.
And if the Wood be an Eminence, then all
the fmall Stuff on the Outfide ought to be
clear’d away, to open the diftant Profpeft, if
it deferve it ; but if it be an unfightly, barren
Profpeft, then let the Wood remain to blind it.

Thefe, and fuch like Particulars as thefe,
ought every Defigner to obferve, and then
the regular Defigner will not be fo much
blam’d for his Regularity, in as much as it is
an open level Park, is not plac’d near his
Houfe, or is on the North Side, where Gar-
dens and Walking-Places are not fo absolutely

requir’d,

Of Woods and Groves , Sic. 201

requir’d, but his Defign is for an open fpaci-
ous Wood, where the Owner is to ridej
hunt, &c.

Neither will the natural Gardener be ob-
ferv'd to have err'd, when he has fill'd all his
little Eininencies and Hollows with little
Gardens, Statues, and other rural Decorati-
ons 3 for his Wood is entirely for walking in 3
it lyes high, and he is not obferv’d to have
cut down any noble Trees, when, in Truth,
the Nature of his Wood would not allow it ;
neither has he (hewn himfelf fond of any
Mathematical Figure, but has made his De-
fign fubmit to Nature, and not Nature to
his Defign. The Infide of his Wood is fill’d
with Hares, Pheafants, the Statues of Rural
and Sylvan Deities all cut out in Wood,
while he contrives likewife that living Hares
and Pheafants lhall abound 3 by which
Means, befides the couchant Furniture in I-
mitation, he has really a great deal that is a-
live and in Motion, darting themfelves a-crofs
him where-ever he turns himfelf; He is of-
ten furpriz’d with little Gardens, with Caves, ’
little natural Cafcades and Grotts of Water,
with Pieces of Grotefque Painting, Seats, and
Arbors of Honeyfuckles and Jelfamine, and, in
fhort, with all the Varieties that Nature and
Art can furnifii him with. But this is but a
very imperfed Sketch of what a judicious Per-
fon may compofe in this beautiful Wood.

Proceed

202 Of Woods and Groves , &c.

Proceed we now to the defigning and laying
put of open, large, Ipacious Woods in Parks $
and afterward to the other more retir’d and
mere natural ones, design’d for Walking and
folitary Atnufements, after we have remark’d
fome few Things as to the right placing or
mifplacing of Wood $ for this is too common
an Error. I have touch’d fomething of this
elfewhere, but it likewife falls in properly e-
nough here.

Of Wood mifplacd.

Wood is mifplac’d, when it is too near the
Eye in any Place, when it crowds fo clofe up
to it, as to admit of no open Lawn or Brea-
thing, if it may be fo term’d 5 for, befides
that it flops the View too fhort, it iikewife
thickens the Air, and makes the Situation un-
healthy. It is likewife mifplac’d when it hin-
ders the pleafant Profped of any noble View 5
fuch is the Sea, or diftanc blue Hills, or
when near ones, and cloathed with Wood
or fine Turf. Be a Wood, therefore, it-
felf never fo beautiful, it would almoft
tempt the Owner to cut it down, except
he has any other Profpeds that exceed it.
And if he fhould buiid in the Middle of any
thick Wood, or does intend to fow or plant,
he ought, at lead, to open an Avenue of 100
or 1 50 Foot wide that Way, while his natu-
ral Meanders fhould be in Wood, as near as
poffible his Houfe. And in fuch Places where

Of Woods and Groves, Szc. 203

the Wood does not hinder a better Profped ; th is
is fuppofing the Wood is upon a level Ground;
but if it is upon a rifing Hill, it ought not to
be cut down by any Means, in as much as
Nature has thrown that in the Way, to fupr
ply all the other Defers of the Situation.

In general. Wood on the South Side (if the
Profpect be not extreamly fine) is not defira-
ble near at Hand, as lying too contiguous and
interwove with our Gardens ; but fhould be
clear’d away, and an open Lawn or Parterre
made, detach’d of all the Angles of Building ;
350 or 400 Foot at leaft from the Front of it
in fmall Buildings, and 5, 6, 7, or 8cd
Foot in larger. In which, as we have obferv’d
in the Chapter concerning Parterres, the Width
of the main Body of the Building (not the
Wings) is our general Direftion; wherein we
fhould allow, at leaft, twice the Width of
the Building, for the Diftance of Wood from
it, and, if poffible, without cutting down
too much Wood, two times and an half, or
three times, tho’ it come near up to the Out-
lide Angles of the Edifice.

But as to the North Front, which is, gene-
rally (peaking, the moft champion View,
there the opener and larger your Lawn is,’tis
ftill the nobler; and if the Wood is not al-
ready grown, a Lawn of at leaft a quarter of
a Mile in Length ought to determine the
View. For Wood plac’d at that Diftance,
or in larger Places fix times the fame, affords
a moft noble Termination to the View, as

may

204 Of Woods and Groves , Sccl
niay be fecn in that incomparably beauti-
ful Park of his Grace the Duke of Ancafter
at Grimflborpe in Lincolnfbire, and other Places!

Wood plac d at a Diftance, and upon
a Rifing, is, be (ides its Ufe, one of the no-
bleft and raoft pleafing Views in Nature. But
for the farther Illuftration of this, I refer to
the Chapter concerning Situations, and the
Plate of the Diftribution of Parks.

In the Interim, I can t but obferve a great
Fault in many of our Defigns, in bringing
our Avenues clofe to the Court-Gate, by
which Means we very often lofe the Beauty
of a very noble Lawn, while the Walk
would at the fame Time anfwer its End at a
great Diftance, were it to begin a quarter of
a Mile from the Houfe. Befides, as I lhall
hereafter fhew by a Scheme, Wood in this
Cafe crowded up too near an Houfe blinds
it j and I will affirm, as I lhall by and by
by Mathematical Demonftration ffiew, that a
Walk of an hundred Foot wide, if the Wood
is not crowded too clofe to the Building, will
ffiew it as much or more than one of the full
Width of the Building, fuppofing it two hun-
dred root, where is a large open Lawn before
it, and this will confiderably fave that De-
itrucf ion of Wood which is very often on this
Account made.

Qbfervx-

15*8

Of Woods and Groves , Sec.
Obfervation on Plate 32, Fig.

20 5

1.

This Plate contains the Draught of an open
Grove or Wood, cut out into Walks, with
fountains and Bafins in it, and may ferve for
a JittJe Park5 for if it is on the North Side
ol the Houfe, one can’t turn it into any Thing
more advantageous 5 fince, in the fir ft Place
the making is much cheaper than any ftrift
Garden. And, indeed, I believe the World
will allow it to be much more naturally beau-
ty ul and noble, than the moft elaborate fine'
Garden j and, as for the keeping, 10 1 per Ann.
in a Boy and Horfe, a long Pole to caft about
the Worm Calls and the Deers Buttons, with

3 ‘OH?,*0 cut 3nd root UP any flaring Weeds

°ffThl? oS’ a?d 3 BiJ1 fix>d in a P°le? to cut
oft fuch Boughs as are apt to grow in the Way

will be _fufficient5 this 10 /. will do as much as
100/. in the keeping of a very fine Garden,
befides the Beauty and Noblenefs there is in
feeing of the Deer feed in the open Lawns
and running backward and forward through
our whole Defign. This Defign I have late-
ly compos d for a Gentleman 5 and fince
us not yet executed, I here place it, at the
Front of my Defigns of Wood- Work
We have purpofely defign’d to clear away
all the brulhy Under-wood, in order to make
the Grove the more open 5 befides, the Deer
would break it in Pieces, and make it appear
io;ll, that one ought by all Means to take

this

20 6 Of Woods and Groves , &c.

this Care, in order to prevent that Blemifiij
and it can't be deny’d, but that an open Grove
is as beautiful as a dole one.

The natural Lawns in the Infide, are like-
wife purpofely clear, fo that there the Deer
may lye undidurb’d, and have their Food
fweeten’d by the Sun and Air.

The Walks are mod of them Grafs, which
the Deer will keep clofe as to the Mowing
Part 5 and as to the rolling, fweeping, &c.
it is to be done by a Man, Boy, and an
Horfe, I can't fee but this whole Defign,
(which is near 30 Acres, and might in any
fuch like Cafe be two or three hundred )
will appear as pleafant as the fined Garden in
the World.

It being fo very plain and apparent in
it felf, upon Paper, I fhall not multiply
Words to no Purpofe in the farther Explana-
tion thereof.

Obfervations on Fig. 2 and 3, Plate 32.

Figures the 3d and 3d in this Plate are the
Plann and Elevation of a large open Lawn
in the Middle of a Park or Wood, bounded
by Lines of planted Trees $ but this ought to
be above 1000 Foot long, and 800 Foot wide,
by which Means it will appear the nobled
Center that is in any Defign that I ever faw,
and deferves a much larger Figure to exprefs
its Beauty $ but fuch is our Misfortune, that
’tis very much to be doubted we have already

Of Woods and Groves, &c. 207

exceli’d the Strength of our Pockets in Plates,
and there being a Neceffity of having fome
more, we are oblig’d to contrail our Sails as
much as poflible, left perhaps we fail in the
Midft of a too adventurous Flight. But to the
Figure.

This little Attempt will fhew, that the
Plattoons at each Corner, are, by a natural
Elevation, mounted up into Turrets, while
the inter-fpaces are kept low, and appear like
Piazza’s, to convey one from one Turret to
another.

This. I prefume, is altogether new in
Planting, especially as to the Elevation of
the Turrets, which I fhall therefore fay fome-
thing the more of.

There are few Gentlemen, it is to be fup-
pos’d, but what have fome larger Elms and
Lymes than ordinary to plant thofe Plattoons
with ; and very ufeful in this Cafe are fuch
Avenues that are of 18 or 20 Years planting,
where the Trees ftand too thick, which is the
Fault of almoft all the Avenues that have
been planted within thefe twenty or thirty
Years laft paft $ fo that ‘tis not only poflible,
but alfo very requilite, that every other Tree
Ihould be taken up ; the Line it felf will be
maintain’d every whit as well, and the Trees
that remain will fpread themfelves the better.
This being granted, you are to take them
up carefully, (as will appear in its proper
Place) and prune the Head of the Trees,
be it either Elm or Lyme, into a Conic

Shape

2o8 Of Woods and Groves , &c.

Shape, and thofe Snaggs or Boughs that
are left, will throw out Branches in abun-
dance, and will at once form a Kind of a Tur-
ret, while the Intervals of this, or any other
Figure, may be planted with new Boughs, or
lower Trees, and fo kept low, by a little
pruning, that the great Trees may form
fomething in the Nature of Towers, and the
leffer will appear, as intended, in the Nature
of Corridores and Paffages.

And this third Figure fhews how much
may be borrow’d, both of Terms and aCtual
Directions in the defigning and laying out
Gardens, from military and civil Architecture.
And ’twas from the firft of thefe that the An-
cients form’d their Rules in the planting and
difpofing their Groves and Gardens, as may
be learnt from Virgil , and other Authors.
And of this Kind, ’tis certain, were the regu-
lar Plantations of the magnificent Cyrus , Dio-
clefian , &c. whofe Memoirs have had a Place
in the firft Volume of this Work $ to illu-
ftrate which, 1 lhall give my Reader a parti-
cular Plate, if this Book fwells not too faft
on my Hands.

The Plattoons at the Angles, and the Di-
ftance of all the Trees in the Intervals be-
tween Plattoon and Plattoon, may all be at
twenty five Foot, tho* the Scale is fo fmall in
this Figure, that no Certainty can be ga-
ther’d as to their Diftance.

Obferva -

Of Woods md Groves , &c. 209

Observations on Plate 32, Fig. 4.

This is the Figure of an open Lawn in a
Park or Wood, to which, from fix Centers,
are brought eighteen Walks, befides the
main Walk that runs thro’, which, reckon’d
from the Lawn it felf, makes twenty.

There is little to be obferv’d in tnefe grand
Centers and Lawns, but that they ought at all
Times to be of a confiderable Width } and
this, in particular, ought not to be lefs than
250 Foot long, and if longer, the better,
even 500 Foot $ by which Means the Walks
will be all confiderably widen’d in Proporti-
on. And ’tis aifo fuppos’d, that this Defign
is for an open Park or Wood, that lies on the
North Side of an Houfe, upon a Flat, and
for Ridings only ^ fince,were it us’d for rifing
Hills and daly Ground, where there are but
few large Trees, this Method would undoubt-
edly fpoil the whole, and make it too pub-
lick for a private Walking-Garden, and le-
vel to the Ground thofe ancient Trees, which
our Fore-fathers had all along preferv’d with
much Care.

It muft be obferv’d, that there are feveral
Niches in the middle Walk, to place Benches
and Statues in 5 for thefe add very much to
the Beauty, as well as Convenience of any
Garden or Wood $ and it cannot but be e-
fteem’d a confiderable Fault where-ever it is
neglefted. If there are any that will be at

P the

210 Of Woods and Groves , Sic:
the Trouble and Expence of placing more in
other Walks, efpecially in Centers, I can’t
but commend it; but this (hould be not over-
lavifhly, fince ’tis eafy to forefee that a large
Expence attends it.

I (hall, in the next two Plates, give fome
particular Defigns for Centers in little low-
fhrubb’d Wilderneffes, that from fome little
Eminencies may be view’d with Eafe : And
then, after fomething of regular Groves,
fhall come to what has been all along my
chiefeft Aim, Natural and Rural Gardening .

Observations on Plate 33,

We come now to regular Groves, Laby-
rinths, Oc. which have likewife their parti-
cular Beauty, as indeed this will, upon a few
Confiderations, appear to have.

The Center is compos’d of a neat Grafs-
Plat, encompafs’d round wish Feftins and Jet-
d'-Eaus, or falls of Water ; which muff
have a very good Effect, as it will appear eve-
ry where thro' and under the Trees, efpeci-
ally at the Ends of the Walks, and in the
Palfages thereof up to the Center.

It may be obferv'd, that under the Stan-
dard Trees I have defign’d Hedges; which
Hedges are to be of Eugh, or, rather, Swe-
dips Juniper, kept cut to about two Foot high ;
and the Standards, which I fuppofe to be mott
of them Eughs, (in as much as they are not

Of Woods and Groves, Sec. 2 1 1

jfo apt to foul the Walk :) And if the Planter
pleales, he may, between every one of them,
plant little flrip’d Standard-Hollies, about
three Foot and an half in Stem 3 and thefe
will look very bright amongft the Dock-
Eughs, and very much diverfify the general
Eughs 3 but this I could not exprefs here^the
Scale being of the fmalleft.

The Inlides are to be all Grafs-Works 3
whether plain or cut, 1 leave to the Opinion
of the ingenious Gardener 3 but be it which it
will, it cant but look well. And the Niches
in the Verge, on the middle and crofs Walk,
are to fet Benches on, detach’d and clear of
the Gravel 3 or may otherwife be left plain:
Tho5, if we would mix the Utile with the
Duke, the Quarters may be flock’d with
fuch Sohs of Kitchen-Stuff as are not of-
fenlive, as are Cabbages, &c . for Peafe,
Beans, Artichokes, being kept clean,

will look as well as any Thing, and pay for
their keeping.

The full of this Plate is, then, an open
Grove, with regular Walks, &c. which, as
they will certainly make an agreeable Confu*
lion, and an imperceptible Regularity, may
be admitted into the beft of our Gardens and
Woods 3 and they have this above common
Wilderneffes, that they are more airy and
light, and are ftill as fhady as any others.

212 Of Woods and Groves , See.

This Defign may alfo be turn’d to a regular
Wildernefs, or a promifeuous open Grove, as
well as this (as may fome of the others 1 have
given) which will, I hope, make them the
more acceptable.

Observations on Plate 34, Fig. 1, 2.

’Tis certain, that the Quadrate and Qyin-
cuncial Manner of planting and ranging
Trees, is the molt ancient, fince it is con-
firm’d from Abydenus , Eufebius , and others,
that that was the Form of the Hanging Gar-
dens of Babylon , as deferib’d by JT Lurtius 5
and in the memorable Garden of Alcinous , an-
ciently conceiv'd (as Sir Thomas Brown words
it) an Original Fancy from Paradife, there is
Mention made of well-cotitriv’d Order. Di-
omedes , (as the fame Author quotes him) de-
fer ibing the rural PolTellions of his Father,
gives an Account, in the fame Language, of
Trees orderly planted 5 and UlyJJes , being a
Boy, was promis'd by his Father forty Fig-
Trees, and fifty Rows of Vines producing all
Kinds of Grapes.

The Author of the Theory and Pra&ice
of Gardening , has, in his excellent Book
tranflated by Mr. James , given 11s a Spe-
cimen of what he calls Planting in Quincunce ,
in which he is in this miftaken $ becaufe,
in his Defign, the Trees are all plant-
ed fquare, or at Right Angles, when, in
Truth, the Qitincuncial Difpofition of Trees,

is

Of Woods and Groves, Szc. 2 1 3

is alternate, like a Figure of 5, as it is En-
glifli’d from Cicero $ and fo three Trees form
thereby an equilateral, or fometimes an equi-
crural Triangle 5 four Trees, a Rhombus , or
Lozenge 5 and five, a Figure of 10. But,
to finifli our Obfervation on this Authors
Miftake, and goon: This Method was not
only in Ufe in planting of Trees, but alfo
in many other Arts and Sciences, and efpeci-
ally Military Difcipline , and was, perhaps,
by them brought into Planting therefrom :

Thus Virgil:

Sic tumulis acclive folurn callefque fu pinos
Indulge or dinib us, nec fecius omnis in unguent ,
Arboribus pofitis fetfo via limine quadrat ,

Ut fape ingenti Bello cum longa Cohort es
Explicuit Legio , & campo Bet it Agmen a pert 0,
DireEitq^ a ties, ac late fluBuat omnis , &c.

By which handfom Defcription of Virgil ,
we find this Quincuncial Method to have its
Original from the Methods obferv’d by the
Generals of the Antients in ranging their Ar-
mies. The Rhombus, or Lozenge Figure,
was a remarkable Form of Battle in the Gre-
cian Cavalry, obferv’d by the Pallians , and
Philip King of Macedon , and frequently by
the Parthians $ and the Roman Battalia was
order’d after the fame Manner $ for thus the
Hafati , Principes , and Triarii , were plac'd
in their Bodies, and in thefe confifted the main
P 3 Strength

114 Of Woods and Groves , &Tc.

Strength of the Roman Battle V from which,!
and from innumerable other Confiderations,
tile ingenious Sir Thomas Brown, in his well-
known elaborate ElTay on the Gardens of
Cyprus , has eftablifh’d this Quincuncial Me-
thod. And Julius Cafar , in his Approaches
to the ftrong Town of Alife, in his Lines of
Circumvallation, fix’d in Stakes up to the
Head, after this Manner, in order to baffle
the Gan’s in their Affaults $ as we learn
from his Commentaries.

And the ancient Authors, Varro , Quintili-
an, and the aforemention’d^Chrrm, recom-
mend it as highly beautiful ^ but Virgil, in

particular, recommends it for its Ufe too :

■ • • •

Non animum mado uti pafcat profpeSus.inanetn ,
Sed quia non a liter- vires dabit omnibus aquas
Terra, neque in vacuum poterunt fe extendere

rami. Virg. Georg. 2.

But we may obferve, that the Advantage
of this Q>jincuitcia.l Method is fo much Irc-
yond the Quadrate, that an Acre of Ground,
where they are planted at equal Diftances in
the Rows, this Way, will have at lead a fifth
Part of the Number of Trees more than the 0-
ther, and that by Means of their alternate
Difpodtion. And this js particularly a very
good Way in, planting of anQrchard, or any
other Plantation, where the Planters would
difqofe of as many Trees as they can.

Of Woods and Groves , &c. z i 5

To come then to our Method of dividing
our Plantation after this Qtincuncial and
Quadrate Manner, on which the afore menti-
on’d ingenious Author, Sir Thomas Brown, has
fpent about 100 Pages, When the Width of a
Pieceof Ground is taken, you are firfl to fquare
itoutexadiy by the Method heretofore deli-
ver’d,in the Mathematical InftruBions for Gar-
deners: Which done, and four Stakes fet, one
at each Angle of your Work, divide it by an
uneven Number, fuch as you think will di-
vide the Rows of Trees at fifteen, twenty,
or twenty five Foot Diftance, more or lefs,
as the Occafion requires. As for Inftance, in
the 2d Figure of this next Plate, the Difbnce
from Corner-Tree to Corner-Tree is 3c 6
Foot, which, by Way of ElTay, I divide by
the uneven Number of 17, which gives 18
in the Quotient 5 and that 18 is the Number
of Trees in that Line, at 17 Foot Diftance.
And the Reafon that ? divide by this or any
other uneven Number, is, that thereby the
Trees range every Way, which, if they were
divided by an even Number, they would nor
do. But this is chiefly ufeful in Avenues, or
where there are large Walks that pafs through
one of thefe Plantations, in which, if you do
not take this Method, the Trees will not
range. But in regular Avenues, where Rang-
ing is requir’d, it being, indeed, the very
Principal requifite in thefe Kind of Works,
it is very neceflary, as will hereafter appear,

P 4 when

2i 6 Of Woods and Groves, &Zc.

when we come to (peak of Parks and Avenues.
But now to purfue the Thread of our Inftru-
cfions.

In this Cafe the Planter fhould therefore
choofe fuch a Number for his Diftance as the
Nature of his Tree requires : If it be for
Dwarf-Fruit, 13 Foot will do $ if Standard-
Fruit, 1 7, 19, or 21, and, fometimes, in
rank-good Ground 25 Foot $ but, if it be for
Foreft-Trees, which is at prefent our fuppos’d
Cafe, (tho* the general Scale does no; admit
it) then they ought to be at leaft 27, 29, or
fometimes 31 Foot 5 and, by this Means, if
you fquare out your Ground exactly ,and plant
the outer Rows firft, all the reft will range
quite thro’ your Defign.

And if it be an Avenue, or there are Walks
paffing thro’ it, you mull always make the
middle Width exaftly two, three, or four
Times the Width of the common Diftance of
your Trees : Thus, for Example, if your
Trees are at 31 Foot Diftance, your Walk,
if it be about 100 Foot in the Defign, muft
be reduc’d to 93 Foot, which is three times
the common Diftance of your Trees $ and
then let your Avenue be wider or narrower,
or the Ground be near a Level, your Trees
will range every Way. In order to this, you
ought to be very exact in fquaring and meafu-
ring out your Diftances, or you’ll be puzzled.

When you plant, therefore, in the Quin-
cuncial Manner, as in the ill: Figure of the
next Plate, you are to allow about 25 Foot a-

funder

Of Woods and Groves , Sec. z 1 7

funder in the main, 15, 17, or 19, for Dwarf
Fruit, and 35 Foot at leaft for Foreft-Trees 5
becaufe it is requir’d fo to be by the Large-
nefs of their Growth more than Foreft-Trees.
And by thisQuincuncial Diftribution of them,
becaufe, even by this Means, tho’ the Divi-
fions on this Figure are larger than the other,
yet does one hold near twenty Trees more
than the other, and alfo the Trees have all
neceflary Room ; which makes evident what
I have before afferted, that thisQuincuncial
Way is the beft, in as much as it holds more
Trees than the fquare Way does. Yet it muft
be obferv’d, that when any Perfon goes to
fetout one ofthefe Quincuncial Plantations,
he will have Occafion to ufe double the Num-
ber of Stakes, that he does in the.Quadrate,
that fo he may range them in alternately,
and make a Figure of V, with three Trees,
quite thro’ his Plantation, &c.

After the whole is thus figur’d out on the
Paper, or adually planted on the Ground,
’tis then the Crofs-Walks, or Jet them be di-
red, or, indeed, any other, that the Figure
beft admits $ but it muft be noted, that irt
alldired Walks, the middle Line of Trees,
or fometimes two or three Lines, muft be
left out, both to give the Walk its proper
Width, as alfo that the Trees on each Side
may be diredly oppofite, which they would
not otherwife be. But in all Diagonal Walks
the Quincuncial Method is beft, being by
the alternate Difpofition of the Trees both

parallel

2 1$ Of Woods and Groves, &c.

parallel and oppofite, as map be eafily ob-
ferv?d by viewing the Figure it felf, Numb, i,
in the next Plate.

It will not be requir'd I (hould in this
Place lay down the Method of Planting it
felf, that having been already hinted at, and
will in all its Parts (I hope) evidently appear
in the Sequel of thefe Endeavours i am ma-
king to oblige the Planting World.

Proceed we then, in the next Place, to
the third and fourth Figures in the next
Plate.

Qbfervations on Fig. 3, 4, Plate 34, concern-
ing Labyrinths.

It will be needlefs, in this Place, to exa-
mine much into the Etymological Derivation
of this Part of Gardening, or of its Anti-
quity, it being well known to fignify a wind-
ing, mazy, and intricate Turning to and
fro,thro’ a Wood or Wildernefs. This is what
the Antientstook particular Delight in 5 and
the Poets chofe them for fome of the plea-
fanteft Themes of their Works But, to quit
this, we may obferve, that thofe that have
been of late made in England , and, indeed,
fome old Defigns we have in feveral Parts,
and in feveral ancient Books publifh’d in our
own Tongue, have been all of (ingle Hedges.
And, by the Way, we may likewife obferve,
that this Part was, and has always been, one of
the firft Steps made in Gardening, in mod:

CouU“

JPtty. 2J&.

Of Woods and Groves , &c. 2 1 9

Countries, particularly in our own : And we
may obferve' to have feen very intricate Laby-
rinths in our old Books of Gardening, when
at the fame Time the other Defigns in Gar-
dening were altogether mean and infignifT
cant.

The third Plate is a Labyrinth of fingle
Hedges, or Banks, after the ancient Manner,
tho' not altogether of the fame Figure $ for
when I come to confider the Ufe and Nature
of a Labyrinth, according to all the Con-
ftrudions that have ever been made of it, via.
That ’tis an intricate and difficult Labour
to find out the Center, and to be (as the
Vulgar commonly like it for)fo intricate, as
to lofe ones felf therein, and to meet with as
great a Number of Stops therein and Difap-
pointments aspoffible 5 1 thought the only way
to accompliffi it, was to make a dubious
Choice of which Way to take at the very En-
trance and Beginning it felf, in order to find
out the Center, at which we are to end at B,
into a little Arbour cradled over 5 for which
Rea fon there is, in the very firft coming in,
in the Center, where the Grafs-Plat and Sta-
tue are defign’d, at A, fix different Entrances,
whereof there is but one that leads to the
Center, and that is attended with fome Diffi-
culties, and a great many Stops.

The moft that ever I obferv’d in this Cafe,
are at Hampton- Court, where, I take it, there
are but three or four falfe Stops, or Methods
fp lofe qr perplex the Rambler in his going

tn 5

220 Of Woods and Groves , &c.

in 5 whereas in this there is above twenty, and
I prefume to fay, (if it were of much Value
when I had fo fa id j that ’tis not a very eafy
Matter to find this Center ,without the Draught
or perhaps with it. But, be it as it will,
it is of no great Ufe to enlarge upon it, after
the Defign is thus fix’d 5 and in the large
Quarters and Divifion of a Wood, this may
give fome Light in the making them intricate
and perplexing, and may help to accomplifh
our Garden-Amufements.

The fourth Figure is the Draught of the
Labyrinth at Verfailles , which is allow’d by
all to be the nobleft of its Kind in the World,
and which I here place, to give my Coun-
trymen the Tafle of the French in Laby-
rinths 3 and becaufe this Draught may not
by any other Means fall into the Hands of
many of my Profeflion, I have given it as it
is there us’d $ and I may venture to fay, that
it is the only one that I have not compos’d
thro’ this whole Undertaking.

At the End of every Walk, in the View,
as one palles along, are plac’d fome of the
Fables of Jifop, which all of them are a con-
tinual Entertainment to the Ambulator.

The Walks are cut out (on Plate 8) in a
Wood 3 and fo there is a confiderable Thick -
nels of Wood between Hedge and Hedge,
which, in Truth, is much better than our
iingle Hedges 5 befides theirs are of quite an-
other Ufe and Turn from what ours are ; but
having given one of each, I have, I hope,

done

Of Woods and Groves, 8zc. 221

done what is requir’d of me, choofe which
you will. Their Way is fitteft for very
large Spots of Ground, but oursfor fmall ones;
but there is one Thing particularly attends
ours, which is the Narrownefs of the Walks,
by which Means the Hedges muft be always
kept clipp’d ; and which, in theirs, and accord-
ing to our Method of Rural' Gardening, need
not. But I pafs over this, and come to foine
other Centers, Figures, and Ornaments, in
our WoodWork; and the firft is deduc’d
from Architecture.

Amongft the feveral Arts and Sciences from
which the Theory and Pradice of Gardening
receives its Beauty, this of Architecture is
the greateft, whether we confider it in Refpedt
of the Rules and Terms we borrow from
thence, in the laying out and diftributing ’em,
or the Idea’s we receive from thence in Point
of Defign.

We have, in fome Places of this Kingdom,
already fome faint Pourtraitures and Begin-
nings, of defigning and laying down fome
little Spots of Gardening, in the Man-
ner that the Ichnography or Plan of a Build-
ing is; and by the Means of Eugh and other
tonfile Greens, to imitate the Elevation there-
of, in Columns, Pilafters, Niches, &c.
And this I remember to have feen fomething
of at Winchendon , againft a Wall there, where
the Greens are cut into Pilafters, &c.

From

±2 2 Of Woods and Groves , &<£.'

From thefe Beginnings, I thought I could
not better employ my Titne, than in giving
one Plate, to farther and improve what has
been fo imperfedly began ; fince hereby one
of the greateft Additions may in Time be
made to the Beauty of our Englifli Gardens,
that has in any Age or Country been made.
And the Truth is,whetl we confider the great
Quantities of tonfile Plants we abound with,
there is not, at firft Appearance, any better
Method of difpofing of them than this, nei-
ther has any other Country fo great an Ad-
vantage thereby as we have.

To prove this Afl'ertion, we need only
view thofe prodigious Magazines of Eughs,
Hollies, and other Greens, that are growing
about London j and how much they may add
to the Beauty of pur wildeft Plantations, by
being us'd fparingly, in fome Centers of our
natural Wood- Works, where the Owner is
often glad to find fome few Elegancies, and
neat little Gardens, made and kept by Art,
amidft the Variety of natural Objeds he is
creating to himfelf, and with which he is by
Nature furniih’d : Such, in particular, is that
beautiful Hollow at Kenjington , with the feT
veral Cabinet- Recefies and Niches round
it 5 and fuch as this Plan, or any other of
this Kind, may prefent him with $ there is
fome.thing in this entirely pretty and new in!
Gardening.

Of Woods and Groves , &e. 2 25

To begin then (by Way of Defcription)
at the circular Steps, on . the Extremities of
the Draughts, you rife up into an handfome
Avenue, planted on each Side with Eughs,
planted and cut into double Pilafters, each
bounded with a fhady Corridore or Piazza 5
and thefe, if the Eughs are planted large,
viz. feven or eight Foot high, will foon form
themfelves, by a little cutting, into inches.
Vaults, Groves, and all the other Beauties
we borrow from Architecture.

I Ihall, at the latter End of this Treatife,
when I am fpeaking of the particular Or-
naments of Gardens, amongft our Arbour-
Work, give feme little Plans and Uprights of
this Way of working $ and in the mean Time
have thought this not improperly plac’d a-
mongft our Woody Scenes.

To proceed then in the Defcription of this
Plan, you come by Degrees into the Center,
or Middle, whereas you had before been in-
troduc’d by double Pilafters, oh each Side of
your main Paflage, Avenue, or Cloifter ;
the Middle it felf is environ’d with circular
Angle Columns, and in the Infide with Ni-
ches and Pilafters^ in which Niches, I fup-
pofe. Statues, Urns, or other fuch like Deco-
rations, which, being white, will be very-
much fet off by the Darknefs of the Eugh 5
and at each Angle I have propos’d (as appears
by the Defign) that there fhall be little Sal-
loons, with Seats to fit clown, or what elfe
may be thought an Addition thereto.

(

’Tis

224 Of Woods and Groves, Sec.

’Tis eafy to obferve liicewife, that on each
Side are feveral little Rooms, or Cabinets of
Retirement, one within another 5 and, as all
of them are furnilh’d with Niches for Statues,
Urns, and other Vafes, and in the Middle
fome little Grafs-Plat or Fountain of Water,
I cannot but hope it will be thought extream-
ly pretty and diverting^ and for the farther
Accomplilhment of this Kind of Work, the
Plates I have already intimated, that are to
be at the End of this Treatife, will fufficient-
ly diredi.

The Entrance and Center being thus ex-
plain’d, at the upper End (as we term’d it)
may beobferv’d a Mount, of two Rifings,
in all eight Foot high, planted round with
fquare Eughs, at about four Foot Diftance,
(let it be more or lefson the Draughty) and
thefe will likewife, in a little Time, form
Arches, Pilafters, &c. and, in (hort, a natu-
ral Cover from the Sun. And this Elevation
is fo much the more to be defir’d, becaufe
’tis there we may {land and look round, and
with Eafe view all the adjacent Works, and
particularly thefe natural Corridores, which
tho’ they will be expenfive in keeping, muft
be efteem’d the moll furprifing Decoration
that any of our Gardens yet afford.

I need fay little as to the other Centers in
the Out (ides of this Work, they explaining
tbemfelves, being no otherwife than what is

and has been common enough with usj but

thofe

Of Woods and Groves , &c. 225

To begin then (by Way of Defcription)
at the circular Steps, on the Extremities of
the Draughts, you rife up into an handfome
Avenue, planted on each Side with Eughs,
cut into double Pilafters, and each bounded
with a (hady Corridore or Piazza $ and thefe,
if the Eughs are planted large, viz . feven or
eight Foot high, will foon form themfelves,
by a little Cutting, into Arches, Vaults*
Groves, and all the other Beauties we bor-
row from Architecture.

To proceed in this Plan, you come by De-
grees into the Center, or Middle, and whereas
you had before been introduc’d by double Pi-
Jafters, on each Side of your main Paflage,
Avenue, orCloifter$ here the Middle it felt is
environ’d with circular lingle Columns, and
in the Infide with Niches and Pilafters, in
which Niches, I fuppofej Statues, Urns, or
other fuch like Decoration?, which, being
white, will be very much fet off by the
Darknefs of the Eugh $ and at each Angle I
have propos’d (as appears by the Defign) that
there fhall be little Salloons, with Seats to
fit down, or what elfe may be thought an
Addition thereto.

’Tiseafy to obferve likewife, that on each
Side are feveral little Rooms or Cabinets of
Retirement, one within another ^ and, as all
of them arefurniftfd with Niches for Statues,
Urns, and other Vafes, and in the Middle
fome little Grafs-Plat or Fountain of Water,
I cannot but hope it will bethought extream-

Q. iy

224 Of Woods and Groves , &c.

]y pretty and diverting $ and for the farther
Accomphlbment of this Kind of Work, the
Plates, I have already intimated, will fufficient-
ly direft.

The Entrance and Center being thus ex-
plain’d, at the upper End (as we term’d it)
may be obferv’d a Mount, of two Riling®,
in all eight Foot high, planted round with
fquare Eughs, at about four Foot Diftance,
(let it be more or lefs on the Draughts^) and
thefe will likewife, in a little Time, form
Arches, Pilafters, &c. and, in fhort, a natu-
ral Cover from the Sun. And this Elevation
is fo much the more to be defir’d, becaufe
’tis there we may Hand and look rounds and
t with Eafe view all the adjacent Works, and
particularly thefe natural Corridores, which
fno’ they will be expenfive in keeping, mull
be efteem’d the molt furpriling Decoration
that any of our Gardens yet afford.

I need fay little as to the other Centers in
the Outlides of this Work, they explaining
thetnfelves, being no otherwife than what is
and has been common enough with us 5 and
the Difpolition of the reft is ealily manag’d.
I could be more particular in defcribing this
Plan, but I fear I have hitherto been too pro-
lix in the pleafurable Part of Gardening, for
which Reafon I lhall omit it.

CHAP-

2*5

CHAP. VIII.

Of Ef palter Trees , Hedges , &c*
and their Management .

S a general Security for a Garden
or Plantation againft Blafting jmd
tempeftuous Winds, it is neceflary
tQ pjant fubftantiai and lofty Vege-
tables 5 thefe are call’d Efpaliers, and are
likewife us’d for the bounding of Borders,
Walks, Avenues, &c. but mod commonly
for the Defence of Plants and Greens.

The feveral Sorts of Trees fit for Efpaliers,
are, the Dutch Witch and Englijh Elm, the
Lime, Abeal, Pine, Scotch Fir, Sccamore,
Beech, and Oak $ but the Elms and Limes are
very preferable to the others $ and the Firs
and Pines, next to them, deferve Place In
the Choice of thefe Trees, and Tranfpl^nting,
great Care ought to be taken $ they mud be
ft rong, and the larger the better, as they will

Q. 2 the

2 2 6 Of Efpaliers,

the fooner anfwer your Purpofe : You are
to take them out of their natural Earth
with as much Root to them as is poffible,
and they ought to be moderately prun’d, fo
that their Heads be not left too tall at
their firft Planting.

If your Efpaliers are Pines and Firs, they
are to be elected from fome Nurfery when
they are about three or four Foot high, but
not tranfplanted ’till they arrive at feven,
eight, or nine Foot in Height 5 when they are
to be taken up with alnioft all their Roots, and
as much Earth about them as three or
four Men can carry with each Tree in a
Hand-barrow 5 this Earth , remov’d with
them, will be a great means to fix them
where they are to be planted anew, and like-
wife prevent all ill Confequences which might
hinder their Growth. 9

Your Trees thus chofen, we come to tfee
Planting, which rauft be by no means too
deep, efpeciaily if the Ground incline to
Moifture, for thereby many Trees are fpoil’d.
As foon as they are planted. Care is to
be taken that they be very well flak’d, or
otherwife fenc’d, as a Guard againft vio-
lent Winds and Cattle, ’till they have ta-
ken Root fufficient to fubfift of themfelves 5
and they are, upon all Occafions, to be
plentifully water’d. The Firs being per-
petually green, and afpiring to a great
Height, appear very beautiful ; and what

adds

and Efpalier Hedges. 227
adds to their Ufefulnefs, is their long Du-
ration.

Before Gentlemen begin to make their Gar-
dens, thefe Plantations of Efpaliers ought to
be finifh’d, that no Time may be loft, or In-
jury enfue to the tender Plants for want of a ne-
ceflary Security. They are to be planted at a
reafonableDiftance without the utmoft Bounds
or Walls, and the Method of doing it is
this 5 Pirft draw Lines for two or three
Rows, pretty thick, having Regard to the
Ufe they are for; and when the firft Line
is fet, Jet the fecond be planted in fuch
Order, that every three Trees may make an
./Equilateral Triangle, by which means the
firft Range will be clos’d by the fecond ;
after this, a third Line is to be planted,
which muft bear the fame Proportion to the
fecond,. as the fecond dees to the firft: And
with thefe Ranges of three Rows the whole
Plantation, or Garden, may be encompafs’d,
if it can be conveniently done.

This Way of Planting is of excellent Ufe
and Benefit to all Perlons who intend to
make large Plantations of Firs and Pines
for Avenues, Views, or Walks of Shade in
Pafture Grounds, Parks, or other grazing
Grounds, or to bound their Gardens by de-
lightful Vifto’s. And if you are to make Efpa-
lier-Tdedges, for the Defence of tender Greens
and Plants, from malevolent Winds, the
Trees for your Ufe are the following; the
Butch Witch and Englijh Elms, as before,

a 3 the

2i% Of Efp alters,

the Horn-beam, Spruce Fir, Pine, and Scotch
Fir, Lime, Privet, Yew, Holly, Laurel,
White-thorn, Maple, Alder, Apple, Pear.

The Dutch and the Witch Elm are the
freeft Growers, and come fooneft to Per-
feftion 3 And if they are for a Frame of
Wood, and to be ferviceable the firft Year,
they are to be chofen of two Sizes, the
firft about eight or ten Foot high, and the
fecond about four or five Foot in Height 3 to be
good brulhy Trees from Top to Bottom as near
as may be, and let them be prun'd, but
fo that the Side-Boughs may remain to fpread
out and be faften’d to the Frames. The
large ones are to be planted about three
Foot Diftance from each other, and between
them $re to be planted the lelTer fiz’d ones.
But if your Efpalier Hedges are to be made
without a Frame of Wood to fupport them,
then the Trees rauft be of a fmaller Size,
the largeft to be not above fix Foot in Height,
and the fmall ones of about three or four
Foot high 3 they are to be planted as the
others, but the Boughs rauft be cut with-
in an Inch or two of the Stem, and as
they grow they are to have frequent Clip-
pings to make them thicken in Brulh, and
grow upright and uniform, whereby they’ll
appear like a Wall.

The Horn-beqm and Beach are inferior
to none, for an Efpalier, of thofe Sorts of
Trees as filed their Leaves 3 but they can-
not be planted fo large as Elms. Chufe

two

and Efpalier Hedges. 229

two Sizes, the largeft of four or five Foot
high, and the fmalleft of two or three Foot,
and plant the largeft at eighteen inches Di-
ftance. The Spruce Fir has great Advan-
tage over the others, by it’s being green
all the Year, and it will beft endure a dif-
crerionary Clipping } let the largeft Plants
be about three Foot and a half long, and the
fmalleft about two Foot in Length, and plant
the large ones about eight Foot afunder, with
the fmaller Size Plants between them. The
Fine and Scotch Fir require the fame Ma-
nagement

in the ordering Limes for Efpaliers, the
largeft Size may ba fix or feven Foot high,
the leffer three Foot high, to be planted in
the fame Qrder and Diftance as the Elm.
Yew majces a noble, firm, and durable Ef-
palier, and for this Ufe will excel the beft
Brick-Wall 5 yop are to make a Choice of
the largeft of about a Foot and a half high,
and the lefier about nine Inches, or a Foot,
the large ones to be planted about two Foot
afunder, and the fmall ones between them.
The Holly makes an excellent Efpalier,
continues green all the Winter, grows excee-
ding thick, difdains the Power of the feve-
reft Storms, and if thefe Trees are well ma-
nag’d they’ll grow at lead two Foot in a
Year.

The Laurel } the large Plants«to be about
three or four Foot high, and the fmall ones
about a Foot and a half} the largeft to be

t Q. 4 planted

2^0 Of kfpaliers,

planted at three Fool Diftance. White-tloorn
and Privet make very good Hedges, but they
are not to be planted fo large as other Trees,
Maple, if planted of young Sets, will make
tolerable Efpalier Hedges, and thickens well
after Clipping 5 and Alder for a wet or moift
Ground, makes a fubftantial Hedge. Apples
and Pears will make good Efpaliers^ if your
Choice be of the largeft Size from Standards
afpiring in height, and growing upright, and
the fmaller of Dwarfs, or good bufhy young
Trees 5 the Sizes to be much the fame as the
Elm, and they are to be planted abour four
or five Foot Diftance from each other : Thefe
laft mention’d Ef pal iers are very ufefui for
the bounding of Kitchen Gardens from the
Sight of Walks or Gardens of Pie ifure.

The wooden Frame for Efpalier Hedges
is neceftary where the Ufe of thofe Hedges is
requir’d, the firft or fecond Year after plan-
ted. Thefe Frames are to be made v6 ry fub-
frantial, about feven, eight, or nine Foot
high ^ the Diftance of every Poft afunder,
and the length of the Rails to be equal to
the length of the Pofts, which is commonly
about eight Foot for an Ffpalier Frame of
the fame Height from the Surface of the
Ground $ and to this Frame there may be fix
Rails, each being about fixteen Inches afun-
der. The higher the Trees are that are plan-
ted, the more fubftantial ought the Pofts to
be for their Support, and Care mu ft be ta-
ken that the Frame be erected upright and

ftraightj

and Efpalier Hedges. 231

ftraight 5 and all the Sizes of Efpaliers, for
thefe Frames, are to be fo regulated, that the
Trees or Plants may be of a handfome uni-
form Growth, and fufficiently furnilh’d with
Side Boughs, to thicken and till up the feve-
ral Spaces.

The Form of the Ground for Efpaliers
ought to be oblong^ and in laying it out, the
two longelt parallel Sides Ihouid run Forth
and South, or thereabouts } and as 1 or the
Extent, you are to proportion it according to
the Number of the tender Greens and Plants
which you defign it fhall . receive } always
allowing for proper Diftances in placing
them, and for Allies. The Situation ought
not to be remote from the Green-houfe, for
Convenience in removal of the Greens, for-
ward and backward, as Seafons (hall require.
In marking out the Dimenfions make Allow-
ance likewife for the Borders, which Ihouid
be anfwerable to it, and well trench’d, two
Foot and an half or three Foot deep } for if
the Soil happens not. to be naturally good fo
deep, and you do not enrich it, after the
Trees have been planted fome Years, when
they come to ftrike Root, they’ll penetrate
down to the poor barren Earth, and become
thereby exceedingly hinder’d in their Growth.

Efpaliers deaden the Violence of the Winds
with greater Security to tender Greens and
Plants than the belt Brick or Stqpe Wall, by
Reafon Walls, being compact and clofe built,
have a ftronger Power to drive them back
> ■ • - ’ . - and

2 3 2 Of Efpaliers ,

and therefore detriment the tender Plants that
are near 5 but if the moil tempeftuous Wind
beats againft thefe Efpaliers, (efpecially if
they are made of Spruce Fir, Holly, or Yew)
they give Way to its Force, without any
Manner of Repulfe, or Injury to the tender
Plants encompafs’d by them.

Pines and all Sorts of Firs look very well
when planted as Efpaliers 5 they make a fine
tow’ring Figure in the Winter Seafon, when
all other Trees are rufty, and the Fields
have likewife loft their Verdure $ and if they
are planted on a riling Ground, fo as to be in
View at a diftant Profpect, they appear very
noble, and agreeably adorn a magnificent
Seat. I proceed now to the profitable Part
of Gardening.

■

CHAP.

23$

CHAP. IX.

Of Fruit-Gardens ; Planting ,
Pruning , Grafting, &c. 0/
Fruit-Trees.

HE Situation of a Garden is always
the firft Thing to be taken Care of 5
and tho’ a little Valley, or low
Ground, is the moft agreeable for
Kitchen-Produds, yet Ground on a moderate
Elevation, fo as not to be too dry, is every
way beft for the Fruit-Garden : For if the
Fruits do not grow fo large in fuch a Soil,
yet it will be recompenc’d in their Beauty,
Richnefs of Tafte, and Forwardnefs: But if
your Situation be fo high as to incline to
Drought, or be on an exad Level, 'twill be
neceffary to lay out your Ground on a little
Inequality, but fuch a one as may be unper-
ceiveable, and that the Water H the South-
ern Walks may fall to the Roots of the Trees.

Next

2 34 0/ Fruit -Car dens.

Next to the Situation, the Expofition of a
Garden is to be regarded. And whatever Si-
tuation you are forc’d to fubmit to, it ought
to have all the Afpsds of the Sun $ tho’ the
Variety of Soils makes, in many Cafes, a par-
ticular Expofition the moll: agreeable. If your
Garden be of ftrong Earth, and of Confe-
quence cold, the South Expofure is beft $ but
then this Expofition is very fubjed to Winds
in the Autumn. If the Soil be light and hot,
then the Eaft Expofition is to be preferr’d $
but this is annoy’d by the North- Eait Winds,
and the Wall-Trees have little Benefit of the
Rains which generally come from the Weft.
The Weftern Expofure is very liable to the
North-Weft Winds in the Spring, and the
Autumn Winds. And the Northern Afped
is only fit for Pears and Baking Fruits : So
that all thefe Expofitions having their Defects,
upon Experience it is found beft to have Walls
ereded for Fruit, not diredly facing the car-
dinal Points, but between them $ as, the
South-Eaft and South- Weft Afped for the
beft Sort of Fruit, and the North- Eaft and
North-Weft Afped for the worft Sort, which
will generally anfwer all Expedations..

The beft Figure for a Fruit-Garden, is a
Square about half as long again as broad $
and the Extent imy be from forty Yards in
Length, and twenty four in Breadth, to one
hundred aq$;fixty Yards, and one hundred $
tho’ thirty or forty Yards fqua»re is a fuffici-
ent Compafs of Ground for a Garden to

con-

Of Fruit-Gardens. 235

contain the raoft delicate Fruits 5 and fquare
Plats of Ground are the moft commodious,
as uniform Beds of Strawberries, Artichoaks,
Afparagus, Sallading, &c. to fill up the
Spaces, cannot be well laid out in Ground of
irregular Dimenfions.

When the Situation and Expofition of a
Garden are fix’d, and the Extent laid out,
the next Thing we come to is the bell Fruits^
of which I fhall give a fhort but ufeful Cata-
logue for all Expofitions.

For a South Afpeft, inclining to the Eaft;
or Weft, the bell Peaches are the Red and
White Magdalene , the Minion , the Royal
Peachy the Old Newingtony the White Peachy
the Purple , the Admirably the ChevreuXy the
Fivety the B our dine , the Red Roman Ne &a-
rine. Apricots for Eaft and Weft Walls, are
the Orange Apricot and Mafculine Apricot .
Figs againft a South-Eaft or South-Weft Wall,
the White Figy and Long Purple . Pears for
the South-Eaft or South- Weft Afpeft, are the
Buree dit Roy, the Summer Bon Cretieny the
Orangey the Verte Longue , the St Germain ,
the Magdalene y the Ambret , the Colmar , the
Mufcaty the Ambret , the Spanith Bon Cretieny
the Chryfany the Winter Bon Cretien: For
North-Eaft or North-Weft Walls, the Kathe-
rine Peary the Orange Bergamoty the Roufellety
Worcester Black Peary are the moft proper 5
and for Dwarfs, the Rerga?nitb Windfory
Swans Eggy CniJJe Madam, -&c. Of Plums
there are few fit for the belt Walls hefides

the

2 3 6 Of Fruit-Gardens-

the Imperial Blue and White Perdigron and the
Apricot Plum : For the worft Walls and
Dwarfs, the Royal, the Orleans , the Violet,
the Mu/cle, the Perdigron, the Queen-Mother ,
the Dama/cene, the Tellow Buffet, the Pear-
Plum, the White Bonum Magnum, the Dam-
/on, are to be chofen. Cherries for Dwarfs
or Standards, or againft Eaft or Weft Walls,
the May- Duke and the Orleans, or Bloody
Hearty and the Morelia for a North Wall.

This Colledion of Fruits will very well
ferve for your beft Fruit-Garden ; and before
I come to their Planting, it may not be amifs
to obferve, that Peaches and Vines thrive beft
in dry light Ground ; that Plums, Cherries,
delight in a ftrong Earth; and Figs, Pears,
Apples, &c. agree with all Sorts of Soils, pro-
vided the Ground be near three Foot deep.
The Seafon of Planting is from the Middle
of OBober to the Middle of March , but it is
not to be undertaken in frofty Weather. And
the Autumn is preferable to the Spring, by
reafon the Tree, during the Winter, will be
better fix’d and fettled, fo as to withftand the
Winds in March, and Drought of the Spring.
For the Diftance to be obferv’d in planting of
Fruit-Trees, a Wall of feven or eight Foot
high, will require the Trees to be planted
about fifteen or fixteen Foot afunder : And if
the Wall be ten Foot high, twelve Foot Space
will be erfjpgh ^ but the Apricot, Plum, and
Cherry, ought to be planted at a greater Di*
ftance than a Peach or Nedarine.

When

Of Fruit-Qardens. z^-j

When the Ground is not extraordinary-
good, it is to be enrich’d before you commence
your Plantations r You muft firft dig Holes
where you intend to plant your Trees, about
three or four Foot fquare, and two Foot in
Depth, which are to be fill’d up again with a
good Compoft of Dung and Mould 5 wherein
you are to obferve, that if the Soil be a hun-
gry Gravel, or Sand, rotten Horfe-Dung and
Cow-Muck, mix’d with rich Mould, will be
proper j and if your Ground be Marl, or ftifF
Clay, you are to get a Compoft of Rubbilh,
Lime, fmall Pieces of Brick and Tile, Coal-
Alhes, and Drift-Sand, to mix with Dung
and Mould : Fill up the Hole with this half
a Foot higher than the reft of the Level, and
take Care to preferve fome of the fineft Mold
near the Top, to plant your Tree in, and it
will do very well : But untry’d Earth, dug
from a Wafte or Common fed with Cattle,
is the beft and moft agreeable Soil for the
Roots of all manner of young Trees.

Your Ground thus prepar’d to receive your
Trees, and Stakes being put in the Middle of
the Holes, as Marks where to plant them in
the Order you intend, I come to the Plant'
ing, wherein I fhall firft take Notice of the
Pruning neceffary. When you have made a
good Choice of Trees from well-manag’d Nur-
feries, you are to Ihorten the bigger Roots to
about fix Inches from the Stem,i|§nd to take
off all the fmall Fibres $ and the Head muft
be prun’d fo, as to leave not above two

Branches

238 Of Bruit-Gardens.

Branches,and thofe reduc’d to about fix Inches
above the Place of Grafting : A fingle Branch
is fufficient for a Head $ and this Pruning
may be done any Time before its beginning
to Ihoot in the Spring. -

If your Tree be for the Wall, fet the Root
as far from the Foundation as the Top will
allow : By this Means the Root will have a
greater Liberty to fpread backward, and con-
sequently the Tree will thrive the better:
When the Tree is thus plac'd in the Ground,
with the Head fpreading 3gainfl the Wail, fill
the Hole with the Mould, wherein if the Tree
be young and tender, you are to take Care to
fill in the Soil gently, but for others lefsCare
will fuffice. And the laft Thing is the Securi-
ty of the Root from Frofts, which may be
done by laying half rotten Dung *all round
the Tree, and upon that Fern or Straw five
or fix Inches thick, two or three Foot every
Way from the Body of the Tree : But to
.keep the Roots cool and moift in the Summer,
a fmall Quantity of Sand and Pebble-Stones
laid round, a little Diftance, will be molt ef-
fectual.

Where you fet Trees in Borders, in the
preparing of your Ground, it is a common
Practice to make a Trench by the Wall-Side,
two Foot broad and the like Depth : For this<
Trench you are to mingle good old Dung with
the Earth^and fill it up lightly near as
high as you intend the Borders to be, and then
you are to tread it down, fo that it be not

above

Of Fruit'Gardens.

above half full in the Places you defign to fet
the Trees. But where the Soil is defective in
the Bottom, or a young Tree is planted in
the lame Place and Soil where, an old one has
been, you muft prepare your Ground with
Comport as far as the Roots of the young
Tree need to go, or the old ones has grown i
And it is very prudential to fet the Trees
(hallow, and raife the Earth about them,
tho* in a warm dry Soil a little Elevatior^wiil
ferve 5 but in a wet Clay you cannot ordina*
rily plant too high 5 and altho’ fome of the
bigger Roots Ihould afterwards appear above
the Surface of the Earth, they will do
very well, if you in the Beginning covet
the Roots with the beft fine Mould, (and
herein you are to allbw for the Settling of
the new Earth, which ufualiy finks three or
four Inches) and preferve them moirt for one
Year againft the fcorehing Heats of the Sun.

Thefe are the mcrt ufeful Obfervatioris
relating to planting of Fruit-Trees 5 and as
they chiefly concern Wall-Fruit, before I
conclude this Head, I (hall communicate a
few Obfervations relating to the building of
Fruit-Walls*

Of all Materials proper for building of
Fruit-Walls, Brick is certainly the beft, it
being not only the handfomeft, hp the warm-
eft and kindeft for ripening of Fruit, befideS
the uQpft convenient for Nailing 5 for fmall

24° Of Fruit-Gardens*

Lath-Nails will in this Cafe fuffice, where-
by a confiderable Expence is fav’d, which
would be unavoidable in Stone-Walls, where
the Joints are larger : And your Brick with
Copings of Freeftone, and fine Stone Pilafters,
or Columns, at proper Diftances, to feparate
Trees, and break the Force of Winds, make
the moft beautiful and profitable Walls of
any other whatfoever.

Some Perfons advife, in the building of
Garden-Walls to make them with Half-rounds,
every Semicircle being eight Yards round on
the Infide, and about fix Yards in the Face
or Diameter, each taking in two Trees 5 and
that between every Half-round there be two
Foot Breadth of plain Walling, on the Top
of which may be plac'd a Flower-Pot about
two Foot in Height, to contain a handfora
Green, and a Vine to be planted at the Foot,
to fill up the Space to the Top : By Means of
thefe Rounds every Part of the Wall will, one
Time of the Day or other, enjoy a Share of
the Sun 5 and the belt Walls will not fail of
being exceeding hot by the Reflection or Col-
lection of the Sun-beams in the Rounds, and
alfo be more fecure from pernicious Winds.

In fome Parts of England I have known
Walls built partly of Stone and partly of
Brick, which have been exceedingly commo-
dious : The Brick of itfelf is not fubftantial
enough forvWalls in fome Places, nor indeed
is its Duration any where equal to Stone j
wherefore a great many Gentlemen, to have

both

Of Fruit-Gardens. 241

both fubftantial and wholefom Walls for
Fruit, have been at the Expence of buildirig
a double Wall, the Outfide being compos’d of
Stone, and the Infide of Brick, or rather a
Stone-Wall lin’d with Brick. And where you
are to build Walls for Fruit, againft Terras-
Walks, to prevent the ill Effeds of Damps, it
is a very good Method to leave a Space of a-
bout two Foot the whole Length of the Wall,
between the inner Wall next to the Bank of
Earth and the outward Wall, to receive your
Fruit, whereby the laft will be always ren-
der’d healthful, and the Produds of Fruit
will anfwer your Labours.

Thefe Methods of ereding Walls I mud
confefs are very expenfive ; but if you pro-
pofe a Quantity of Fruit, you cannot well
avoid them : Tho’ Mr. Laurence, in his Trad
of Gardening, makes Mention of Walls built
of Earth and Straw well temper’d together,
known by the Name of Mud-Walls, as pro-
per for Fruit. Thefe Walls are common in
Northamptonjhire and Leicefterjhire, and this
Gentleman affirms they are better than any
other Walls for accelerating the Ripening of
Fruity and if they are made of very good
Earth, and exadly temper’d. Nails will do to
fallen the Trees} otherwife. Pegs of Wood
mull be made, fuch as are us’d for bad Walls,
particularly of Stone, where the Mortar is
decay’d, and the Joints therebyjibecome the
larger. The large Coping of Straw that is
ufuaily laid upon Walls of this Kind, is a

R 2 great

242 Of Fruit-Gardens.

great Advantage to the Fruit, in fheltering
them, and keeping off all perpendicular Rains:
But thefe Walls are by no means fightly, foe
which Reaf on they are feldom us’d.

I had like to have omitted taking Notice,
that Walls of an Eaft Afpeft are preferable to
thofe of a Weft, by reafon the early Rays of
the Sun free the Fruits the fooner from cold
and pernicious Dews, which, of Confequence,
renders them moft healthful to all Sorts of
Fruit. To conclude this Chapter 5 When
your Trees are planted, if you permit them
to ftand with their tall Heads tack’d to the
Wall, (to prevent their being Ihaken) "tilF
the Beginning of March, you are then to
fhorten their Heads carefully, cutting away
the Branches flopewife, the Slope facing the
Wall, with a iharp Knife. <

Pruning of Fruit Trees in general'.

A fkilful Gardener is not only a Phyficiatt
to aged infirm Trees, but a Nurfe to the young
ones 5 and he may, with good Management,,
make Fruit-Buds grow where he pleafes, but
not when he pleafes 3 and this by a diicretio-
nary Pruning.

When a Tree is planted, and has produc’d'
two fine well-difpos’d Branches, with feme
weak ones amongft them, the only Bufinef's
you have then to do, is to fhorten them all
equally to within five or fix Inches in Length..
But if the Petition of the two Branches be ir-

Of Fruit-Gardens. 243

tegular, as one lower than the other, or both
on one Side, there, rouft be but one preferv’d
to begin the Formation of a fine Figure.

It fometimes happens that a Tree will pro-
duce five, fix, or feven Branches the firft
Year; in which Cafe it is fufficient that three
or four of the belt be preferv’d ; for the reft
oiuft be tvholiy taken away. And a Multi-
tude of Branches in the firft Year, is not al-
ways a Sign of Vigour, they fometimes pro-
ving weak, from whence you may conclude
there is an Infirmity in the Roots ; though in
Pruning, generally, a vigorous Tree cannot
have too many Branches, if they are well or-
der’d, as a weak Tree can’t well have too
few.

The Sap of all Trees muft be kept within
due Bounds for their Prefervation, and greater
Liberty is to be allow’d ftrong Trees than
weak ones ; for which Reafon all ftrong and
vigorous Branches are to be left of a greater
Length than feeble ones, and the Branches of
a fickly Tree are to be prun’d fhorter, and to
be fewer in Number thanthofe of an health-
ful Tree. And it is belt to prune weak Trees
early, that the Sap may not wafte it felf on
fuch Parts as ought to be retrench’d. Fruit-
Buds that are neareft the End of the Branches,
are ufually thicker and better fed than 0-
tliers.

In the pruning of Wall Fruit-Trees, all
Branches which (hoot directly forward, are
to be cut off clofe to the Branch from whence

R 3 they

244 0/ Fruit ^Gardens.

they fpring : And to preferve your Trees in
their Beauty and full Health, the utmoft Care
is to be taken to keep them from being crowd-
ed with Wood, and it is oftentimes neceiTary
to take away even bearing Branches $ for it is
impoflible that a too great Number of Branches
can be well fupply’dwithjuices,whereby either
the Blofloms will drop off, or the Fruit will
never ripen, but wither on the Tree.

A convenient Space between one Branch
and another is confident with Regularity,
and conflantly to be obferv'd in all manner of
Prunings : And that you may pleafe the Sight,
you are to take Care not to let one Branch
crofs another, unlefs it' be to fill a Space in
the Wall, which is more unfeemly ^ thougha
flender bearing Branch may be fometimes per-
mitted to deal behind the main Body of the
Tree, or its larger Branches, and be no Of-
fence to the Eye, but may gratify the Tade
at the End of the Year.

The more Horizontally the Branches of a
Tree are carry ’d, the more apt and the bet-
ter difpos’d that Tree is to bear Fruity and
the more perpendicular the Branches are led,
the more inclin’d fuch a Tree is to increafe in
Wood. When fmall weak Branches ffioot
from the like, and the thiid Shoot is ftrong,
always ufe them as falfe Wood : And it is very
difficult to drengthen weak Branches without
fometimes cutting away others that are fuperior
to them, even the upper Part of thofe from

which

Of Fruit-Gardens. 245

which they {hoot. Shoots put forth in Au-
tumn are always bad, and mult betaken off.

When an old Tree (hoots ftronger Branches
towards the Bottom than the Top, and the
Top appears in an ill State of Health, it will
be neceffary to cut it off, and form a new Fi-
gure from the lower Branches $ but if the Top
be vigorous, cut off the lower ones, unlefs it be
thofe that are well plac’d, to continue for the
Benefit of the Tree : And where old Trees are
very weak, to preferve them, you are to dif-
burden them aliiioft totally, leaving very few
Branches for Wood, and thofe to be (horten’d
to five or fix Inches, always taking Care that
thofe as are left be not over much wafted.

Thefe are the general Rules to be obferv’d
in the Management of Pruning, wherein I
have been very exadand particular, without
troubling the Reader with a tedious indigefted
Heap of Informations, or omitting any thing
neceffary. I proceed now to the particular
Prunings for the various Sorts of Wall-Fruit
Trees, and begin with the Peach.

Pruning of the Peach.

The Peach is fo apt to put forth Plenty of
bearing Branches, after it has been planted
two or three Years, that there is no manner
of Difficulty in making a Choice of thofe as
are good and for your Purpofe 5 but where
the Peach-Trees are vigorous, it is necef-
fary to defer the firft pruning ’till they are
R 4 ready

24 6 Q/ Fruit-Gardens .

ready to bloffom, that you may be at the
greater Certainty in preferving thofe Branches
which may be molt likely to bear Fruit, and
then to fhorten them as they require.

The Fruit - bearing Branches are eafily
known by their fwelling Buds 5 thefe are to
be reduc’d to five or fix Inches in Length,
but the laft Year’s Shoots may be left ten or
twelve Inches long: And in about three Years
Space the Wood muft be taken away entirely
at feveral Prunings 5 but in the mean Time
you are to take Care to furnifh your Wall with
other Wood. You mud always cut out what
great Wood can conveniently be fpar’d, and
take away all dead an3 yellow fickly Bran-
ches.

• You are not to commence your Pruning of
the Peach ’till the hard Frofts are over.
When you have reduc’d your Tree to Beauty
and Order, you have little to do, but shin-
ing your Fruit kill Midfummer , when the
Shoots are to be fiiorten’d and faften’d to the
AVall -* and kis no Matter in what Order vou

j j

perform this Operation, (fo as you give the
Fruit all the Advantage of the Sun you can)
becaufe it muft be alter’d the next Pruning.

If your Peach Trees make tco much Hafte
to bear, it is a certain Sign of Infirmity, and
they muft be manag’d accordingly, by Pruning
the Branches fhort, and plucking off all or
moft of the Bioffoms or Fruit 5 and this js
Jefs difficult a great deal than when a Peach
i? over vigorous j for then Nature is apt to

Of Fruit-Gar deni. 247

make a Confufion, which requires great Skill
to know what Branches to chufe, and what
to re j eft.

Stone Fruit, efpecially Peaches and Apri-
cots, require a fecond and fometimes a third
Pruning $ the laft of which is to be perform’d
towards the Middle of Mayt when the Fruit
is either knit or blafted.

The Culture and Management of the Nedo-
rine and Apricot is the fame with that of the
Peach, but the latter is the moft apt to run
into Wood.

Pruning of the Fig.

Tho’ this Tree is not very common in En-
gland., yet we have no Tree that produces a
more plentiful Crop, if rightly manag’d and
p rain’d 3s it ought to be.

The 'Pruning of this Tree is very different
from that of others 5 for as the Practice is to
take off the finall Branches in pruning of
other Trees, fo here it is to be avoided, by
Reafon this Tree puts forth its Fruit chiefly
at the Extremities of the laft Year’s Shoot,
and commonly at the three laft Eyes 5 but
you may cut forae of the weak f mailer Shoots,
which do not promife to bear, provided you
do it clofe to the great Wood.

You mu ft take out the great Wood entirely,
to avoid Confufion $ and the Branches of the
Tree ought not to be permitted to grow too
high, which \yould prevent their being full $

therefore

242 Of Fruit-Gardens.

therefore the new thick Branches ought to be
fhorten’d Yearly to a Foot or thereabouts,
and the Bud at the End of the Branches to be
broken off in the Spring Time, that inftead
of one fingle Branch it may have two, and
it may caufe them to (hoot out Figs the
earlier.

The Seafon of Pruning the Fig, is the lat-
ter End of March j and whatever you cut
from the Fig, you muft do it as clofe to the
great Wood or Root as you can $ and 1 have
known a whole Tree entirely cut down to
the Roots after an unkind Winter, for its
Recovery from a fickly State of Health, which
it has effected. Take care to keep it from
Suckers, which this Tree puts forth in great
abundance.

It is belt in the Summer to let this Tree
have fome Liberty from the Wall, and qpt
to let it continue clofe tack'd, as othdr Fruit
Trees $ but in the Winter fome of the ftrag-
gling Branches ought to be cut off, and the
bell and biggeft Branches to be tack’d clofe
to the Wall in November, that they may be
the more effectually Ihelter’d from the Frofts
in the Winter, by a Defence of Mat or other-
wife, efpecially in an extreme cold Seafon.

The North-Eaft Wind, and fometitnes a
South Wind, proves fatal to thefe Trees.

fnming

Of Fruit-Gardens. 249

Pruning of the Vine.

The Vine puts forth the moft and the
longeft Shoots of any other Fruit-Tree; but
the leffer and weaker Shoots never bear any
Fruit, and therefore they rauft be entirely
taken away.

Vines require a firft, fecond, third, and
fometimes a fourth Pruning; the firft Prun-
ing muft be done before the End of February ,
and herein the Vigour of the Tree is to be
regarded : The Number of Branches to be
left are to be proportion’d fo, as to make no
Confufion in the moft vigorous Trees ; and
the thickeft and belt plac'd are to be pre-
ferv’d, limiting their Length to four or five
Buds or Eyes, and the firft and fecond only
generally bear Fruit.

The fecond Pruning of the Vine is to be
perform’d about the Middle of May, when
the Branches have fhot two or three Foot,
and the Bunches of Grapes are perfedly
form’d : The Manner of doing it is by pinch-
ing off the Branch about fix Inches above
the Fruit, after which you are to Nail it
to the Wall. The third Pruning is to be
commenc’d about Midfummer ; the Defign of
this is to reduce the Multitude of luxuri-
ant Branches, and to let in the Rays of the
Sun, to accelerate the Ripening of the Fruit;
but in the Operation you are to have a dif-
cretionary Regard to Rains and cold Nights,

which

250 Of Fruit -Gardens.

which we have fometimes even at this Time
of the Year. If the Fruit-bearing Branch
be not very vigorous, it ought to be cut clofe
to the Fruit in July : And if your Vine be,
on the contrary, extremely vigorous, it will
produce long Shoots from the Extremity of
the lalt Pruning, which mull be ftiorten’d a-
gain, and makes the fourth Pruning.

A Vine ought to be always kept thinner
of Wood than any other Fruit Tree, and
for that Reafon there cannot be too great Care
taken in infpe&ingwhat Branches of old Wood
may be well fpar’d, and how you can conve-
niently fupply their Places with new Shoots
that are vigorous. The old Wood is to be cut
out, and the Branches of the foregoing Year
are generally to be taken away, unlefs it
happens to be an old Vine, and you cut off
the old Stem, fupply ing its Place with a
young one 5 or you have an Occafion to en-
creafe the Height or Spreading of the Tree,
and then they fhould be Ihorten’d to the
leaving only two Eyes.

Pruning of the Pear.

As the fmall Branches of the Vine pro-
duce no Fruit, fo likewife the large Branches
of the Pear-Tree are ufelefs in Bearing.

There are few Obfervations to be commu-
nicated relating to the Pruning of this Tree,
befides the general Rules already laid down 5
but thofe are to be carefully follow’d, for

this

Of Fruit-Gardens. z 5 1

the Pear, in a rich Soil, is apt to be very
unruly, running prodigioufly into Wood and
luxuriant Branches.

For this Reafon, Plafhing is of the moll *
Signification, efpecially of very vigorous
Branches: Cutting them about half Way
through, near the Place from whence they
fhoot, will diffidently abate their Vigour.
And to fill a Vacancy in a Wall, this Ma-
nagement is of great Ufe 5 for by this Means
you may reduce your Tree to what Form and
Order you pleai'e. But Plalhing is not to
be pra&is’d on any Tree but the Pear or
Plum.

The full-bearing Buds of the Pear-Tree
appear very vifible in November, when the
Leaves are off 5 and they are to be carefully
prefer v’d. All Branches proceeding from the
Knob, whereon the Stalk of a Pear grew,
are to be taken away, but the Knob it felf is
not to be cut. The Extremity of the laft
Year’s Pruning is to be taken off, and all
falfe Wood or Water-Shoots, viz. thofe as
have Eyes at a greater Diftance than ordi-
nary, are to be perfectly cut away. *

Winter and Summer Bon Cretien Pears
fpread and extend themfelves beyond any
others, wherefore you rauft allow them fuf-
ficient Room and Height ^ and a Confine-
ment by fhort Prunings would render them
barren and full of Wood.

A languilhing Pear-Tree may be reflor’d
by Pruning, and Removal into better Ground ^

252 Of Fruit-Gardens .

but this Management will not do with the
Peach, efpecially if the Gum appear.

• Pinching of Pears or Peaches, is an Opera-
tion perform’d upon thick new Shoots, with-
in two or three Eyes of the Branch they
proceed from : It is to be done on the Top
of the thick Branches, which would other-
wife remain ufelefs from their Situation, and
yet fpend much Sap.

Cherries and Plums require little Skill in
their Pruning, fo that the general Directions
are fufficient for their Management.

Grafting and Inoculating.

Thefe are us’d for the Propagation of Ve-
getables. Peaches , FeElorines , and Jpricots ,
are not to be rais’d any ocher Way than by
Inoculation or Budding $ and as for Pears ,
Cherries , and Plums , tho’ they may be graft-
ed, yet the Inoculating is to be prefer’d, it
being lefs hazardous and more pleafureable.

The Method of Inoculation is thus : About
Midfummer , or a Month before or after,
which are good Seafons, take off a vigorous
Shoot from a Tree you would propagate 5
then make a Choice of a Stock about three
or four Years Growth, and in a fmooth Place
of it make a downright Slit in the Bark, a
little above an Inch in Length, and another
crofs-wife, at the Bottom of that, to give
Way to the opening of the Bark : This
being done, with your Pen-knife gently loofen

Of Fruit-Gardens. 253

the Bark from the Wood on both Sides,
beginning at the Bottom ; then prepare your
Bud, by cutting it off with your Fen-knife,
and entering pretty deep into the Wood, as
much above as below the Bud, to the Length
of the Slit in the Stock. After the Bud is
thus prepar'd, with the Point of the Pen-
knife and your Thumb take out the woody
Part of it, (but herein take particular Care
that the Eye of the Bud be preferv’d) then
put your Bud in between the Bark and the
Wood of the Stock, at the crofs Slit, lead-
ing it upward by the Stalk where the Leaf
grew 'till it exa&ly clofes : Then bind it a-
bout with coarfe woollen Yarn, the better
to make all Parts of it regularly clofe, and
the Bud incorporate it felf with the Stock $
and the Operation is done.

In three Weeks the Bud will be incorpora-
ted, and then you muft Joofen the Yarn,
that it may not gall the Place too much,
which will be dangerous in a vigorous Stock.
The quicker this Operation is perform'd the
better 5 and you are to put two or three Buds
into one Stock of Peaches and Is chlorines,
that if one do not fucceed, another may.

If your Buds inoculated in June do not hit,
you may make a fecond Attempt the fame Year
on the fame Stock, and that with very good
Succefs. And any Time between the Begin-
ning of June and the latter End of Augujf ,
in a good Seafon, molt Trees may be inocu-
lated 5 and fcmetimes Pears may be inoculated

254 Of Fruit-Gardens*

in September , and do very well : But Care is
to be taken that the Branch or Shoot made
Choice of for Buds to inoculate with, do not
lye by any Time (as in Grafting) for it is
to be immediately employ’d.

When your Stocks are large, and the Bark
k become thick and ftubborn, that it will
not readily part, nor handfomely clofe up,
you muft be content to graft 5 but you
may inoculate on flender Shoots made near
the Grafting Place, even the fame Year. And
in refped to Stocks in general, you cannot
exped Succefs, if the Bark does not readily
part from the Wood on making an Incifion
with your Pen-knife, and the Sap run well.
The Cherry , Plum, and Pear, rarely fail to
anfwer Expedition in Budding} but the Ap-
ple is very apt to deceive us, becaufe the
Bark is not fo inclineable to part as in other
Fruit.

There are a great many Ways of Grafting,
but I fhall fatisfy my Curiofity with men-
tioning only four. The firft is the ancient and
common Method of Grafting in the Cleft, or
Slit-Grafting, perform’d on Pear, Cherry ,
and Plum Stocks, the latter End of February
or Beginning of March. After you have chofe
your Stock, in a fmooth Place cut the Head
of it off flopewife, then even the Top hori-
zontally with your Knife : This being done,
make a Slit near two Inches deep down the
Middle of the Stock, with a large ftrong Pen-
knife or otherwife } then prepare your Scion

(taken

Of Fruit-Gardens. 255

(taken from a vigorous Shoot of the forego-
ing Year, and cut and laid in the Shade tor
about a Fortnight or three Weeks before us’d)
Hoping it on each Side from a Bud or -/ye,
but leaving it thinner on that Side which
goes into the Stock than on the Out- fide, fo
that it may conform it.felf to the Slit in the
Stocky then place the Scion in the Stock,
and clofe the Bark of each exactly. This is
all you have to do in this Operation befides
Claying, which is done by tempering Clay
and fhort Hay together, and putting it round
the Stock and the lower Part of the Scion,
but fo as not to difiurb the latter. The Scion
mufi not be left with above three or four
Eyes above the Stock : And in Cafe the Stock
be large, you may put in two Scions in the
Cleft, one on each Side. If the Stock be
very large you may ufe a Mallet and a large
Knife, or other fharp Inftrument, to make
your Cleft, and prepare a Stick of hard Wood,
by cutting it ilopeways,.to put into the Slit
upon pulling out your Knife, and keep it 0-
pen for the Scion 5 And if your Stock be fo
ftrong as to pinch your Grafts, it will be ne-
ceffary to drive a fmall Wedge of dry Wood
into the Slit, but not fo as to let the Scion
loofe.

Grafting in the Bark is the next Method
I have to obferve, and this is preferable to the
other, but it is generally perform'd only on
off Apples . The Way of this Grafting is to cut
the Head of the Stock, as already directed, but

S infiead

2 5 6 Of Fruit-Gardens-

inftead of flitting the Stock, flit only the Bark,
a little above an Inch on the South- Weft Side,
or as long as the Hop’d Part of the Scion ; and
at the Top of the Slit loofen the Bark with
the Top of your Knife : Then with a fmooth
Inftrument, made of Ivory or hard Wood, cut
flopewife, as the Scion, make Room for the
Scion, by thrufting it down between the
Bark and the Wood of the Stock, where the
fame was flit : This done, take your Scion
(being prepar’d with a flat Slope about an
Inch long, ending on a Point, and begun
from the Backfide of an Eye) and put it into
the Stock, thrufting the Pop of the Slope as
low as the Top-Surface of the Stock, but firft
taking out your opening Inftrument ^ and
you are to order the Bark on each Side the
Scion to fall clofe to the Stock : All which
being done, you are today it over as before.
This Grafting is to be perform’d in the Be-
ginning of April , and is efteem’d beyond the
other, as the Union of the Scion and the
Stock is the fooner compleated, and the Stock
receives not fo grievous a Wound.

The third Method of Graftng is by Ap-
proach, or Inarching 5 this is perform’d where
a Stock grows fo near another Tree, whofe
Fruit you would propagate, that it may
be join’d with a Branch of that Tree, by
cutting the Sides of the Branch and Stock
about three Inches long, and fo fitting them,
that the Paffages of the Sap may meet 5 in
which Pofture let them be bound and clay’d :

When

Of Fruit-Gardens. 257

When they are well cemented, cut off the
Head of the Stock about four Inches above the
Binding, and in the Month of March follow-
ing cut off the Stub that was left of the
Stock, as alfo the Scion underneath 5 then
clofe the grafted Place, that it may fubfift by
the Stock only. This Manner of Grafting
agrees beft with Vines, Oranges, Pomegra-
nates, and fuch like Shrubs $ and is alfo done
by cutting off the Head of the Stock at firfl,
Hoping it about two Inches long, and joining
the Scion thereto.

The laft Grafting I fhall take Notice of is
Whip* Grafting : In this Operation both the
Stock and Scion fhould be of the fame Big-
nefs 5 the Stock muft be Hop'd a full Inch or
more, and the like muft be done to the Sci-
on, and then one is to be ty’d upon the
other 5 or elfe a Shoulder may be made on
the Scion, to fuit with which, the Top of the
Stock fliould be cut 5 then bind them together
and clay the Place.

Having now gone through the feveral Sorts
ofPrunings, Graftings, I fhall finifh this
Chapter with the Stocks proper for all Kinds
of Fruit. For Peaches, Pavies, &c . Stocks
may be rais’d from the Stones of thofe Fruits,
or you may graft on the fame Trees $ Almond
Stocks are alfo very good, as are likewife the
Suckers of Mufcle-Plums and Pear-Plums,
where thofe Trees were never grafted* For
Apricots and Plums, the feveral Sorts of Plinn-
Suckers will do, or Stocks of any Kind of

S 2 Plums

2 5 8 Of Fruit-Gardens.

Plums, except the Damfon rais’d from the
Stone. For Cherries, the Stocks that are
rais’d from the common wild Black Cherries
are beft. For Pears, the Trees or Stocks that
are rais’d from the feveral Kinds of Pears : And
likewife the Quince Stocks are very good, as
they cure the too great Luxuriancy of Growth
common to thefe Trees, and for a Time an-
fwer the Purpofe of bearing quickly $ but
they are not long-liv’d, neither do they bear
fuch fair large Fruit, or make fuch handfome
regular Trees as thofe grafted on a Pear-
Stock, for which Reafon they are often reje&ed.
Stocks rais’d from the feveral Sorts of Kernels -
are mod fit for Apples.

CHAP.

2 59

CHAP. X.

>

Of Orchards , Vineyards, and
their particular Culture .

HE Advantages arifing from well'
manag’d Orchards are fo very consi-
derable to the Owners, that I efteem
an Account of their particular Cul-
ture worthy Place in a Treatife of this Na-
ture.

And, firft, I (hall take Notice of the
Preparation of your Ground for thefe profita-
ble Plantations. If the Ground be a Turf or
Green-Sward* it will be neceffary to give it
a thorough Plowing, two Years before you
begin to fet your Trees therein, to render it
mellow and loofe $ and fitch Manure is to be
employ’d, as is raoft agreeable for the Improve-
ment of the Land. A flat, watery, and (hal-
low Soil may be improv’d by plowing and ga-

S 3 thering

260 Of Orchards , Vineyards , Szc.

thering up the Ground near the Places where
the Trees are to be planted, and the Furrows
between will help carry off the Water. But
if the Land be fpringy, it muff be trench’d at
the Head of the Spring, deeper than the
Channel runs in the Earth: This Trench
may be left open and cleans'd yearly, or fill’d
with Ofier-Boughs, and cover’d at Top with
the Earth and Turf that was dug up, and tho’
the latter will raife the Ground much higher
than the other Land $ yet the Wood and loofe
Earth will very much fink it by Degrees.

The Situation of your Orchard ought to be
chofen in Land a little declining, lying open
to the South, South-Eaft, or South-Well, and
defended from the North Winds by Woods,
Efpalier Trees, Buildings, Grounds,
the Soil to be rather dryifh than moift, the
Earth fat, and natural Mould deep } for Or-
chard Fruit-Trees grow not only very large,
but broad, and Ihoot into the Earth a conlide-
rable Depch. To preferve the Trees from
Winds, it is a very good Method to plant
Walnut or Chefnut Trees in Rows, two or
three of them on the North Side of the Or-
chard, which will make a very good Defence 5
and fome Shelter is Jikewife ne’ceffary on the
Weft Side, to break the Force of the Autum-
nal Winds, which do very great Injury in
throwing down the Fruit.

If

Of Orchards, Vineyards, &c. 26 1

If your Ground be uneven it ought to be
levell'd, or elfe fuch Trees as grow pendant,
or are not apt to grow tall, muft be planted
in the higbeft Situation, and fuch as are afpi-
ring, in the loweft Places : And for the Pofi-
tion of your Trees, on the North Side you are
to fet the firft Rows of Pear, or other Fruit-
Trees, as are apt to grow tailed:, and the reft
fouthward, as they decreafe in Height, as
near as may be judg’d 5 that fo all of them may
in a greater Meafure partake of the South Sun,
and be lefs liable to the Blafts of the northern
Winds.

In three Years Time after Grafting, Trees
may be remov’d from the Nurfery into the
Orchard 5 and the beftTime for tranfplanting
is from the latter End of September to the
End of November, tho‘lthe fooner you begin
this Work in Seafon, the greater Succefs you
may expeft. If the Leaves are not all fallen
when the Trees are remov’d, they muft be
pick’d offj and if they are not very weak-
body’d, they are to be prun’d, only three or
four of the principal Branches muft be left
on the Top, that (hoot outwards, which fhould
be quite lopped off when they arrive at almoft
a Year’s Growth : But if the Trees are weak,
thofe chief Branches are to be prun’d to a
Bud or fmall Twig^ and in all Cafes the
Ends of large Roots are to be reduc’d.

S 4

Orchard

i6z Of Orchards , Vineyards ,/ "See,

Orchard Fruit-Trees are to be planted at
do lefs Diftanee than eight Yards, and not to
exceed fourteen, wherein Regard is to be had
well to the Kinds of Fruit-Trees to be
r ented as the Soil ^ for feme Sorts of Trees

ke up a great Deal more Room in their
Growth than others , and in rich Land no
Per Ion can be ignorant, but the Tree muft
arrive to a greater Stature than in a poor Soil •
and a good Diftanee is always the beft, not
only for the Growth and Health of the
Trees, but likewife for the Ripening of the
Fruits.

I could here recommend a more than ordi-
nary Care in the laying out of the Orchard,
fo as to make it appear with the utmoft Beau-
ty and Magnificence 5 I would have a hand-
fome Walk ail round, a grand one thro’ the
Middle the whole Length, and a fpacious
crofs Walk. This might be effected by plant-
ing all' your Trees on a Line, leaving near a
double Space between the Rows, in the Mid-
dlCj on the Sides, and a-crofe, and planting
the fevetai Walks of feveral Sorts of Fruit 5
as the Middle Walk may be lofty Pear-Trees,
the Crofs Walk your larger Kinds of Apple-
Trees, one End Walk of. Golden Pippins, the
other of Cherries, and the two Side Walks
of Codlins, or other Fruit-Trees in Hedges.
This Method, and keeping your Walks mow’d,
would make an agreeable Variety, and render
your Orchard as delightful as a Grove or little
Wood } but herein Care is to be taken to give

Of Orchards, Vineyards, Sec . 263

the various Kinds of Fruit-Trees their proper
Situations and Fofitions, otherwife the Beauty
of your Orchard will leflen the Produft of Fruit,
and you may dearly purchafe your Pleafure.

It is beft to remove Trees very young, pro-
vided it can be done with Security, and that
they be expedirioufly fet in the Places affign’d
them after they are taken up, pruning the
greateft Part of the Tops, but not cutting too
much of the Root. And when you are to
remove Trees of ten or twelve Years old, a
circular Trench muft be digged round them the
November before they are tranfplanted, as nar-
row as may conveniently ferve 5 but fo deep
as to meet with moft of the fpreading Roots,
at fuch a Diftance round about the Body of the
Tree, as you would cut the Root off at when
you remove it. Asfoon as the Trench is made,
the Roots are to be cut off clear, and without
fplitting or bruifing the Bark, and then the
Trench is to be fill’d up again : Thefe great
Roots by the October following will have put
forth many fibrous Roots, and have made Pre-
paration for more 5 which, upon Removal,
will enable the Tree to draw a greater Quan-
tity of Nourifhment than otherwife it would
do, by «which Means it will profper the bet-
ter in its new Situation. And Care muff be
taken in tranfplanting of large Trees, that
the fame Side of the Free be planted to the
South Eaft, &c . as formerly flood that Way 5
unlefs it be a leaning Tree, when the inclin-
ing Side is to be fet towards the South Weft,

from

264 Of Orchards, Vineyards , Sec.

from whence we have the ftrongefl: Winds,
without any Regard to its former Pofition.

In the Management of tail Orchard Fruit-
Trees, you are to cut off ail the Side Branches
'till the Trees are arriv’d to the Height de-
fir’d $ but if the Tree be defign’d to fpread
low, fome Branches rauft be left on each
Side, .but not fo many as to weigh down the
Tree : And for rhe firft three Years they arc
not to be permitted to grow bulhy-headed,
which may be prevented by cutting off fome
of the infide Shoots, and fuch as grow crofs
one another, or pendant. If the Soil be not
rich enough, it is to be amended in two or
three Years in the Winter, by opening the
Earth round about each Tree on the Outfide
of the Ground that was digg’d at their firft
■fetting, and in a Month after, with fome pro-
per Manure mix’d with the Mould that came
forth, filling up the Trench again. Or the Soil
may be improv’d by making a Trench along
theupper Part of the Orchard, with a fmall
Gutter cut down to every Ro\y of Trees, (the
upper Turf about half a Yard’s Breadth round
about every Tree being taken off) and when a
rainy Day comes, let the Draining of an ad-
jacent Dunghill be let down one Rt*w, fo
that, as near as may be, each Tree may enjoy
it three or four Days at feveral Times in one
Winter : But if the Pofition of the Orchard
be fuch, as not to admit of this Method, then
you are to take two or three Pails full of
Water enrich’d with Dung, and carry it to

every

Of Orchards , Vineyards , Sec . 26 5

every Tree, pouring it in where the Roots
were open’d, being firft ftirr’d at the Bottom,
and putting in the old Earth again againft the
Spring.

When an Orchard is firft planted, the
Ground may be fown with Beans, Peafe, or
other Kitchen- Legumes 5 or withWheat,provi-
ded due Care is taken in collecting the Har-
veft, not to injure the Trees with reaping
Utenfils 5 and by this Means the Profit of the
Soil may be continu’d from the Beginning:
But in this Cafe the Ground muft be fubftan-
tially good, otherwife it will be fo much im-
poverish'd, as to impair the Trees, and very
much impede their Growth. The beft Fence
for an Orchard is the White Thorn, which
may be plafh’d when grown up, the better to
prevent the creeping of Sheep or Swine into
it$ but no fmooth quick Fence fhould be fet,
their Tops and Roots, when grown, being
injurious to the Hedge and Fruit-Trees. Plant
two Rows of good Hawthorn, and a dead
Hedge on the Qutfide of the Ditch, and your
Quick-fet will grow the fafter 5 for if the
Hedge be upon the Ditch, it is apt to choak
the Quick : But for an old Fence about your
Orchard, you are to plafh it well, amend the
Ditch, and cut down all the Trees on the
Outfide of the Hedge, except on the North
and Weft Sides} the one requiring a Defence
to keep the Orchard warm, as the other wants
a Security againft the Autumnal Winds: And
the South and Eaft Sides ought to be open, to

2 66 Of Orchards, Vineyards , Sec.

let in the Rays of the Sun, for the Ripening
of your Fruit.

Of Vineyards.

That Vineyards may be fo cultur’d in Eng-
land, as to produce large Quantities of Grapes,
and thofe fo well ripen’d, as to afford a good
and fubftantial vinous Juice, needs no Demon-
ftration, when in feveral Parts of Somerfet-
Jhire there are at this Time flourifhing Vme-
yardsj and the Vineyard of the late. Sir Wil-
liam Bajfet in that County , has annually fur-
nilh’d fome Hogfheads of good body’d and pa-
latable Wines, which I have been credibly in-
form’d by Gentlemen who have drank confide-
rable Quantities of it with the greateft Satif-
fadion.

It is not fo much owing to the Inclemency
of the Air here in England, that our Grapes
are generally fo very much inferior to thofe
of France and other hotter Climates, as to
the Want of an exad Culture 5 tho’ 1 con-
fefs at the fame Time, that the beft Manage-
ment will not anfwer our Expedatidns with-
out a tolerable Seafon to ripen the Fruit t, and
fometimes the Varioufnefs of the Weather in
the Summer will unavoidably render the Fruit
fow’r and immature $ but this does not always
or generally happen, and therefore we are not
to be difeourag’d.

To

Of Orchards , Vineyards , Sec. 267

To proceed to the Culture and Manage-
ment of Vineyards. When you have mark’d
out the Ground defign’d for your Vineyard,
in the Month of July plough up the Sward,
while the outermoft Coat of the Earth is very-
dry and combuftible, or burn-beak it, and in
January following fpread the Allies. The
Ground being thus prepar’d, cut Trenches
a-crofs from Eaft to Welt, on riling Ground,
that the Vines Handing in Ranks in this Po-
lition, the Riling and Setting of the Sun may
by that Means pafs thro’ the Intervals, which
it would not do if they were fet in any other
Situation, neither would the Sun be fo capa-
ble to dart its Rays upon the Plants during
the whole Courfe of the Day. Afterwards
ftrain a Line, and dig a Trench about a Foot
deep place your Setts in it at about three
Foot Diftance one from another 5 trim off the
fuperfluou6 Roots, leaving no more than three
or four Eyes or Buds upon that which is above
the Ground, and plant them near half a Foot
deep. Hoping after the manner as Quick-fett
is commonly planted, fo as they may point up
the Hill ?. That being done, take long Dung
or Straw, and lay on the Trenches, of a con-
venient Thicknefs to cover the Earth, and
to prefer ve the Roots from dry piercing Winds,
which would ovherwife much annoy them,
and from the e iceflive fcorching Heats in
Summer. Keep them well hoed and free
from Weeds, and water them as Occalion
ferves.

The

2 58 Of Orchards, Vineyards, &c.

The beft Time to plant is in January 5 and
the firft Seafon of pruning the Vine is the
Month of January in the next Year 5 and then
you are to cut off all the Shoots as near as you
can, except one of the moft thriving ones,
which is to be left with only two or three
Buds ’til May the fecond Year after planting ^
and clear the Roots of all Suckers, which
draw out the Virtue of your Setts, and care-
fully deflroy the Weeds. The fame Manage-
ment is requir’d the third Year, by taking
away all the Shoots in January , but one or
two of the moft profperous. Then dig your
whole Vineyard, and lay it level, taking
Care not to cut or wound any of the main
Roots with your Spade : As for the younger
Roots, it is not fo material. And this Year
you may enjoy fome of the Fruit of your
Labour, which, if anfwerable to your Wilhes,
will put you upon providing Props for your
Vines, of about four Foot long, to be placed
on the North Side of the Plant. In May rub
off fuch Buds as you fufpect will produce fu-
perfluous Branches. When the Grapes arc
about the Bignefs of Bird-Shot, break off the
Branches with your Hand at the fecond Joint
above the Fruic, and tye the reft to the Prop.
This Breaking is preferable to Cutting^ by
reafon Wounds made on Vines with a fliarp
Inftrument, are very apt to bleed.

The

Of Orchards, Vineyards , &c. 269

The next Tear after Bearing being the
fourth Year, you’ll have generally three or
four Shoots to every Plant ; and therefore in
December cut off all the Branches, except
one that is ftrongeft and inoft thriving, which
you are to leave for a Standard about four
Foot high, (taking away the reft clofe to the
Body of the Mother-Plant) and to tye it to
your Prop ’till it be large enough to make a
Standard of itfelf : Neither muft you per-
mit any Shoot to break out, but fuch as
fprout at the Top four Foot from the Ground;
and thefe in France are commonly cut off
every Year, depending upon the new Shoots,
which are the only bearing Branches. But
fome propofe to leave two or three Branches,
one fucceflively after the other, and by this
Management they always cut off the oldeft
every Year, and nurfe up the other young
ones ; tho’ herein the Number of the Branches
fhould be proportionable to the prefent Con-
dition of the Vine. In Anguft , when the
Fruit begins to ripen, break off thofe Shoots
that you find too thick, and take away fome
of the Leaves difcreetly from the Fruit; and
if in breaking the Shoots you perceive any
Plant to bieed, rub fome Allies upon it, or
fear it with a hot Iron.

If your Ground be poor, which will be
difcover’d by often ftirring and the Weaknefs
of the Crop, prune the Vines as is already
directed, and fpread good rotten Dung mixt
with Lime over the whole Vineyard, letting

it

270 Of Orchards, Vineyards, See.

it lye all the Winter to wafh into the Earth,
and mingling about ten Bufhels of Lime with
a Load of Dung and if fome Alhes and Soot
be 'likewife thrown upon the Ground, it will
do very well. ' Turn in this Manure about
February with a flight Digging, but not too
deep 5 and this is to be done in a dry Seafon,
and not in wet Weather, left it make the
Ground bind too much, and encourage the
Growth of rank Weeds. But to forward the
Ripening of Grapes, and render the Plants
fruitful, the Blood of Beafts mix’d with
Lime or Soot is excellent to lay to the Roots
of the Vines in December and in July 5 and
if the Seafon be very dry, Watering in Au-
gujl is a very great Advantage to the Trees.

In the Management of your Vintage, ga-
ther your Fruit in a dry Day, while they are
very plump and tranfparent, the Seeds or
Stones being black and clear, not vifcous or
clammy, when the Stalk begins to fhrivel at
the Part next the Branch, which is a Sign it
Las done feeding 5 and if Raia or Froft im-
mediately follow after* they' are. thus fit to be
gather’d, get them in as foon as is poffible :
It is beft to cut, and not pull the Clufters of
Grapes from the Vine, tind to put them into
Bafkets, out of which take them gently, and
lay them in Heaps on a Floor to fweat for
four or five Days or a Week, which will ve-
ry much accelerate their Ripening.

This

Vol. 2. Of Orchards, Vineyards^ &c. 271

This is all I have to infert in this Volume 5
and I hope what I have mention’d, will prove a
fatisfadory Entertainment to all curious and
polite Gentlemen, and perfedly inftrudiye to
thofe of my Profeffion. I fhail conclude with
fome Lines from Mr. Dry dens Tranflation of
Virgil , which embellilh the Charader of a
fkilful Gardener : They are j (fpeaking of an
old Corycian Swain) ,

He reaps the ProduB of his labour'd Ground.
His Limes are firft in Flow’r, his lofty Pines ,
With friendly Shade fecure his tender Vines ;
He ranks his Elms in even graceful Rows ,
l I’d the grafted Pear-Tree to difpofe :
makes with fpr ending Planes a cool Retreat ,
< hade good Fellows from the Summers Heat.

H E

THE

INDEX.

A

Paper

Avenues

Page,

Ngle, Definition of in Geometry 5

Angle, to cut into two equal Points upon

B

i ..

Book, for Meafuring of Land .

A Bill, or Estimate

Box and Needle for Surveying

14

216

52

57

65

Circle, to fir ike on Paper I (

Circle, the Center to find out ibid

Circles, Content of the Segment to firif ant
Circles divided 48, I2<

Chain, Gunter 's for Meafuring * 6c

Court-

INDEX.

Court-Yards p. 135

Court-Yards defcrib'd on Hates 138, 145

D

Diftauce, acceffible or inaccejjible to take 93
Defcription and Ufe of meafuring InHruments

116

Dividing of Lands 1 1 7

Of a Triangle fever al Ways ibid.

Of a triangular Piece of Land into

any Number of equal and unequal
Parts, by Lines proceeding from a
Point ajfigrid 118

Of a triangular Piece of Land, ac-
cording to any Proportion given 1 1 9

— Of four -fide d Figures or Trapezia 120

Of an irregular Plot of any Number of

Sides , by a Hr ait Line thro* it 123

• Of Lands an eafy Way 125

Of a Circle , according to any Pro-
portion, by a Line concentrick with
the frH • "V29

v E,

Equality of Things in Geometry 9

Enneagon brib'd, or a Figure of nine Sides

22

An Eftimate ’ 57

Efpalier Trees, Hedges, Sec. 225

Fir ft planted before the Garden laid

out 227

Frames for them 230

T 2 Efpalier

INDEX.

Efpaliers, in what Order planted
Their Ufe and Beauty

p. 231
ibid.

Figures Geometrical, crooked and curvilineal,
misfd and compos'd
Fields plotted, how done
Fruit- Gardens

Situation of

Fxpofition

• Catalogue of Fruits

■ Planting and Soils

' Walls for Fruit, the fever al Sorts' If,

and Methods of erecting 239

* Priming of Fruit-Trees ' 242

8

76, 86, 95, &c.

233

ibid.

234,

235

236

Geometrical Instructions, Sic. r

GunterV Chain, the Ufe of in Surveying 60
Groves, cut out into Walks, Sic. 205

Groves and Labyrinths . 210, 219

Grafting of Fruit-Trees, the feveral Methods
°f

Hexagon, regular upon a tight Line given xo
Heptagon, or a figure oj feven Sides to make
upon a Line given 2o

Heplagor.Sj tojind the fuperficial Contents 50

I In

1 S D E X.

Inftru&ions, Geometrical, for Gardeners p. i
Inftru&ions, Numerical 23

Index, an Instrument for Meafuring defcrib’d 6 5
Inoculating of Fruit-Trees 252

A Line defin'd 2, &c.

A Line parallel to a right Line given , to draw

A Lin e given, to cut into two equally 14

Laying out of Lands 1 30

Lawn in a Park or Wood, the Figure of 209

M

Meafuring and catting up uneven Ground to he
remov'd 3 1

Meafuring, feveral Operations of,, in Arithme-
tick 39, dec.

Meafuring Book 52

Menfuration of Lands Particulars of 5 6
Meafuring, Stations for 99

Meafuring Rods defcrib'd 116

N

Numerical InttruBions for Gardeners, d\C. 23
Needle for Surveying 65

New Lands laid out 1 3 1

O An

INDEX.

O

An Oval defcriV d upon a Length given, and to
•find the fuperficial Contents of p. 17, 49
O£topo;>, within a Circle 21

OScc'or to make from a Line given ibid.
Of Orchards 259

Preparation of Ground ibid.

• — Difpofition of Fruit-Trees 2 61

- Laying out of Orchards 262

Planting 2 69

■ Fencing , &c. 265

P

A Point defind I

Pofitions/or putting Geometry in PraElice 1 1
Perpendiculars elevated, tic. 12

Pentagon, to frame upon a Line given 18
Pentagons or Polygons, to find the fuperficial
Content of 50

Protra&or, the Ufe of 62

The Plain Table 64

Plot of a Field taken 7 6, Sic.

Of Parterres * 183

Proportion of Parterres, ice. 185

Parterres Figures of 190

Pruning of Fruit-Trees in general 242

Of the Peach 245

Of the Fig 247

Of the Vine 249

• Of the Pear 250

R Rules

INDEX,

R

Rules of PraQict and Multiplication, for Gar -
dening p. 24

A Road furvefd 88

Remarks in purveying of Land 99

S.

Of a Superficies
A Spiral Line
Scales for Surveying
Stations

b

1 6

60

99

Of Tetragonal orfquare Figures 7

A Triangle equilateral, to frame upon a freight
Line given, Sic. 15, 42

Theodolite, the Ufe of 70, 79, 88

A Trapezium reduc'd into a Triangle 120
Of Terrace-Walks, their feveral Kinds .-151

Proportions 153,185

— — Figures of Terrace-Walks 154, Sic,
Like a Fortification 174

O/’Vineyards 2 66

Not fo much Inclemency of the Air as ill

Culture occafions bad Grapes ibid.

— r— Planting and Culture 267

Vine-

sRfqAj- 65-5

v,2_

GETTY CENTER LIBRARY